Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Craft Person Station User`s Guide

Transcription

Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Craft Person Station
User’s Guide
MC17246
July 1997
TimePlex Group
Worldwide Headquarters
400 Chestnut Ridge Road
Woodcliff Lake, NJ 07675
USA
(888) 777-0929 • (201) 391-1111
Americas Division
400 Chestnut Ridge Road
Woodcliff Lake, NJ 07675
USA
(888) 777-0929 • (201) 391-1111
CANADA
30 Fulton Way
Richmond Hill, ON
Canada L4B-1E6
(905) 886-6100
Americas Customer Support
16255 Bay Vista Drive
Clearwater, FL 34620
USA
(727) 530-9475
Timeplex Federal Systems, Inc.
Far East Division
12150 Monument Drive
Suite 750
Fairfax, VA 22033
USA
(703) 385-3366
30th Floor, Windsor House
311 Gloucester Road
Causeway Bay
Hong Kong
(852) 2830 9889
Europe/Middle East/Africa
Division
Australia/New Zealand
Division
Langley Business Centre
Station Road, Langley
Slough, Berkshire, SL3 8DT
United Kingdom
(44) 0 1753 601000
Level 21
1 York Street
Sydney, NSW 2000
Australia
(612) 9 247 1422
EUROPE/AFRICA DISTRIBUTORS
10 Rue de Genéve, Bte 17
B-1140 Brussels
Belgium
(32) 2 745.02.30
FRANCE
39 Avenue des Trois Peuples
F-78180 Montigny-le-Bretonneux
France
(33.1) 30.64.81.00
GERMANY
Edisonstrasse 11-13
D-60388 Frankfurt
Germany
(49) 610-973-8505
4/98
NO WARRANTIES ARE EXTENDED BY THIS DOCUMENT. The technical information in this document
is proprietary to Timeplex, Inc. and the recipient has a personal, non-exclusive and non-transferable
license to use this information solely with the use of Timeplex products. The only product warranties
made by Timeplex, Inc., if any, are set forth in the agreed terms and conditions for purchase of a
Timeplex product. Timeplex, Inc. disclaims liability for any and all damages that may result from
publication or use of this document and/or its contents except for infringement of third party copyright or
misappropriation of third party trade secrets. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner
without the prior written consent of Timeplex, Inc.
U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED AND LIMITED RIGHTS
All software and related software documentation supplied by Timeplex, Inc. to the United States
Government are provided with Restricted Rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is
subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer
Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraph (c)(2) of the Commercial Computer Software–
Restricted Rights at CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.
All documentation, other than software documentation which are provided with Restricted Rights, are
provided with Limited Rights. U.S. Government rights to use, duplicate, or disclose documentation, other
than software documentation, are governed by the restrictions defined in paragraph (a)(15) of the Rights
in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013.
“DFARS” is the Department of Defense Supplement to the Federal Acquisition Regulation.
Contractor/manufacturer is Timeplex, Inc., 400 Chestnut Ridge Road, Woodcliff Lake, NJ 07675.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Revisions may be issued at such
time.
Timeplex, entréeLINK+, Express Switching, LINK/2+, and Synchrony are registered trademarks of
Timeplex, Inc.
Express Routing, TIME/VIEW, miniLINK/2+, microLINK/2+, and LINK/100+ are trademarks of Timeplex,
Inc.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
HP OpenView is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
SPARCstation is a trademark of SPARC International, Incorporated, licensed exclusively to Sun
Microsystems, Incorporated.
SunOS is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Incorporated.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through
X/Open Company Limited.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
NOTICE
Telecommunications products must be installed and operated in compliance with the relevant

National Regulatory requirements summarized in the REGULATORY section of the Synchrony
ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Installation and Maintenance Manual. READ IN FULL,
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, any product-specific National Regulatory requirements applicable to
the country of installation.
©1994 - 1998 Timeplex, Inc.
ii
STCPSUG
7/31/97
DISCLAIMER
Ascom Timeplex is now Timeplex, Inc. The new company logo is
. Please disregard any references to the company’s former
name in this manual.
Thank you.
1998 Timeplex, Inc.
01/01/98
STCPSUG
7/31/97
WARNING
NO OPERATOR SERVICEABLE PARTS ARE
INSIDE THIS EQUIPMENT. SERVICE MUST BE
PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
VORSICHT
NICHT VOM BENUTZER REPARIERPARE TEILE IM
GEHÄUSE. BITTE WENDEN SIE SICH AN
QUALIFIZIERTES WARTUNGSPERSONAL.
ATTENTION
CET APPAREIL NE CONTIENT AUCUN ELÉMENT
QUE L'UTILISATEUR PUISSE RÉPARER. CONFIER
LA MAINTENANCE À UN PERSONNEL
TECHNIQUE QUALIFIÉ.
WARNING:
THIS EQUIPMENT MAY HAVE MORE THAN ONE
POWER SUPPLY CORD. DISCONNECT ALL
POWER SUPPLY CORDS BEFORE SERVICING TO
AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK.
VORSICHT:
DIESES GERÄT HAT MEHERE NETZANSCHLÜßE.
ZUR WARTUNG ALLE NETZKABEL TRENNEN UM
ELEKTRISCHEN SCHLAG ZU VERHINDERN.
ATTENTION:
CET APPAREIL COMPORT PLUS D'UN CORDON
D'ALIMENTATION AFIN DE PRÉVENIR LES CHOCS
ÉLECTRIQUES. DÉBRANCER TOUS LES
CORDONS D'ALIMENTATION AVANT LA
MAINTENANCE.
iii
About This Manual
This manual supports Release 2.1 of the Synchrony ST-1000 and ST-20 bandwidth managers.
The Synchrony™ ST-1000/ST-20 Craft Person Station User’s Guide is part of the Synchrony
library, which also includes the following:
• Synchrony™ General Information Manual
• Synchrony™ ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual
• Synchrony™ ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Installation and Maintenance Manual
• Synchrony™ ST-1000/ST-20 Craft Person Station Command Reference Manual
• Synchrony™ ST-1000/ER-5 Internetworking User’s Guide, Volumes 1 and 2
• Synchrony™ ST-1000/ER-5 Internetworking Installation and Maintenance Manual
• Synchrony™ Network Management System Installation Manual
• Synchrony™ Network Management System User’s Guide, Volumes 1 and 2
• Synchrony™ Network Management System Administrator’s Guide
• Synchrony™ AD-10 Point-to-Network User’s Guide
• Synchrony™ AD-3/AD-7 User’s Guide
The Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Craft Person Station User’s Guide serves as a reference for users
of the Craft Person Station (CPS) software. The CPS is required for initial node-level
configuration and serves as a supplement to the Synchrony Network Management System. CPS
is not intended as the primary network management tool, but can be used for remote diagnostics
and troubleshooting if for some reason a node is inaccessible from a Synchrony Network
Management System workstation.
Ascom Timeplex recommends that users obtain formal training prior to
using this product. This manual is intended to supplement –not replace–
formal training.
Contact Educational Services at 1-800-356-8338 for information.
iv
STCPSUG
7/3197
Products Covered by This Manual
This manual applies to the Synchrony ST-1000 and ST-20 bandwidth management systems and
to the Synchrony AD-3, AD-7, and AD-10 access devices. The ST-1000 accepts both bandwidth
management modules and internetworking modules (see the Table of Modules on the following
page). Information on ST-1000 operation using the internetworking modules is provided in the
ST-1000/ER-5 Internetworking User’s Guide, Volumes 1 and 2, and in the ST-1000/ER-5
Internetworking Installation and Maintenance Manual.
• Craft Person Station distribution software, RP66084
• ST-1000 and ST-20 bandwidth management system operational software, RP66080,
RP66081, RP66082, RP66083
• AD-10 access device operational software, RP66072
NOTE:
For important updated information following the printing of this
manual, refer to the accompanying Release Notes.
NOTE:
Throughout this manual, the term ST node applies to models
ST-1000, ST-50, and ST-20.
Also, throughout this manual, the term LINK/+ represents the
following products:
• LINK/2+ Integrated Connectivity System
• LINK/2+ Facilities Management System
• miniLINK/2+ Integrated Connectivity System
• microLINK/2+ Integrated Connectivity System
• entréeLINK+ System
• LINK/100+ Integrated Connectivity System
STCPSUG
7/31/97
v
Each ST node consists of some or all of the following modules:
Table of Modules
BANDWIDTH MANAGER MODULES
Common Equipment Modules
Module
Name
NCP-1
NCP-2
NCP-3
Nodal Control Processor (except ST-20))
Nodal Control Processor
Nodal Control Processor
LXM-1
RXM-1
Left Expansion Module (except ST-20)
Right Expansion Module (except ST-20)
I/O Modules
Module
Name
Type
T1M-4
T1 Module
DS-1
DSX-1
E1M-2
E1M-4
E1 Module
G.703 120 ohm balanced
G.703 75 ohm unbalanced
SDM-4R
Synchronous Data Module
V.35
V.11 (V.36/RS-449, X.21, RS-530)
E1 120 ohm balanced,
E1 75 ohm unbalanced
V.35
V.24 (V.24/RS-232)
V.11 (V.36/RS-449, X.21, RS-530)
SDM-8
SDM-8E
V.35
V.11 (V.36/RS-449, X.21, RS-530)
RTM-12
Remote Termination Module
RTM
Server Modules
Module
Name
SGM-1
SGM-1/19.2K
SGM-1/128K
Subrate Groomer Module (56Kbps and 64Kbps AD-10 aggregates)
Subrate Groomer Module (19.2Kbps and 64Kbps AD-10 aggregates)
Subrate Groomer Module (64Kbps and 128Kbps AD-10 aggregates)
FSM-16
FSM-64
Frame Server Module (16 port)
Frame Server Module (64 port)
ASM-16
ASM-16A
ASM-16C
Applications Server Module (CELP/ATC)
Applications Server Module (X.50 or ADPCM)
Applications Server Module (X.50, CELP/ATC, or ADPCM)
LGM-2
LINK Gateway Module
DSM-1
D-Channel Server Module
INTERNETWORKING MODULES (ST-1000 only)
Module
vi
‡
Name
IEEE 802.3/
Ethernet II IRP
Independent Routing Processor Module (IEEE 802.3/Ethernet II)
IEEE 802.5/
Token Ring IRP
Independent Routing Processor Module (IEEE 802.5/Token Ring)
FDDI IRP
Independent Routing Processor Module (FDDI)
V.35 WAN IRP
Independent Routing Processor Module (V.35)
V.11/EIA RS449 WAN IRP
Independent Routing Processor Module (V.11/EIA RS-449)
STCPSUG
7/3197
Table of Modules (Cont’d)
INTERNETWORKING MODULES (ST-1000 only) ‡ (Cont’d)
Module
Name
ISDN/BRI
Independent Routing Processor Module (BRI ISDM service via V.11/RS449 or V.35)
TIA/EIA-613
HSSI IRP
Independent Routing Processor Module (DS3 or SONET STS-1 in DTE
mode, other HSSI IRP module in DCE mode)
Multi-Interface
WAN
Independent Routing Processor Module (V.28 with V.54, V.35 with V.54,
V.11 with V.54, X.21, and EIA RS-449)
ATM ICP
Independent Cell Processor Module (ATM service)
IPP
Independent Packet Processor Module
‡ = Information about these modules is provided in the ST-1000/ER-5 Internetworking
user documentation.
Organization of This Manual
This manual describes the Craft Person Station (CPS) software and provides information on
setting up and using the CPS. Detailed information is provided on features, installation, and
typical activities.
NOTE:
For detailed information on the individual CPS commands, refer to
the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Craft Person Station Command
Reference Manual.
The information is organized as follows:
• Chapter 1, Craft Person Station Overview, describes CPS features and system
requirements.
• Chapter 2, Getting Started, provides information on system connections, CPS software
installation, system start-up, and how to back up and restore the configuration database.
• Chapter 3, Using CPS, provides information on using local and nodal commands, and
describes the CPS Help utility.
• Chapter 4, Typical Configuration Activities, provides examples of step-by-step procedures
using CPS commands to configure an ST node.
• Appendix A, CPS Node Configuration, outlines the required node configuration steps and
provides a cross reference to the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Configuration Planning Manual.
• Appendix B, Alarm and Error Messages, provides a list of alarm and error messages, and
describes the reason the message was generated.
• Appendix C, Status Parameters, provides brief descriptions of all status command
parameters grouped by network function.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
vii
• Appendix D, Scheduling Network Operations Using a CPS -based Facility, describes how
to use a CPS-based facility to schedule events such as time-of-day switching and channel
grooming to occur without the need of network operator intervention.
Service
For service in the U.S. and Canada, contact Customer Support at 1-800-237-6670.
For service outside the U.S., contact your local sales representative.
Information required for service is:
Model No. ________________________
Serial No. ______________________________
Warnings, Precautions, and Notes
Be sure that you understand all directions, warnings, and limitations before using this product. In
this manual:
• WARNINGS present information or describe conditions which if not observed could result in
injury.
• PRECAUTIONS reflect conditions which could cause product damage or data loss.
• NOTES describe limitations on the use of the equipment or procedure.
If Product Is Received Damaged
Forward an immediate request to the delivering carrier to perform an inspection and prepare a
damage report. SAVE container and packing material until contents are verified.
Concurrently, report the nature and extent of damage to Customer Support so that action can be
initiated to repair or replace damaged items or instructions issued for returning items.
The responsibility of the manufacturer ends with delivery to the first carrier. ALL CLAIMS for
loss, damage, or nondelivery must be made against the delivering carrier WITHIN 10 DAYS OF
RECEIPT of shipment.
To Return Product
Please obtain instructions from Customer Support before returning any item(s). Report the fault
or deficiency along with the model, type, and serial number of the item(s) to Customer Support.
Upon receipt of this information, Customer Support will provide service instructions or a Return
Authorization Number and other shipping information. All items returned under this warranty
must be sent to the manufacturer with charges prepaid.
viii
STCPSUG
7/3197
Contents
Chapter 1. Craft Person Station Overview
FEATURES.......................................................................................................................... 1-1
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................... 1-2
Chapter 2. Getting Started
SYSTEM CONNECTIONS.................................................................................................. 2-1
Craft Port Specifications................................................................................................ 2-1
Craft Port Connection (ST Node)................................................................................... 2-2
Modem Port Specifications............................................................................................ 2-2
Modem Port Connection (ST Node)............................................................................... 2-3
SP Port Connection (LINK/2+ Node)............................................................................. 2-4
CPS SOFTWARE INSTALLATION.................................................................................... 2-5
Installing CPS Software Using DOS.............................................................................. 2-5
Installing CPS Software Using Windows 3.1.................................................................. 2-5
Installing CPS Software Using Windows 95................................................................... 2-6
CPS APPLICATION START-UP......................................................................................... 2-7
Starting the CPS Application Using DOS....................................................................... 2-7
Starting the CPS Application Using Windows 3.1.......................................................... 2-7
Starting the CPS Application Using Windows 95........................................................... 2-8
The CPS Prompt............................................................................................................ 2-8
Customizing the CPS Environment................................................................................. 2-9
ST NODE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ............................................................................ 2-9
DATABASE BACKUP AND RESTORE............................................................................. 2-9
Backing Up the Configuration Database........................................................................2-10
Restoring the Configuration Database...........................................................................2-10
Chapter 3. Using CPS
ENTERING COMMANDS .................................................................................................. 3-1
LOCAL CPS COMMANDS ................................................................................................. 3-2
Using Local Commands................................................................................................. 3-5
Using Local Commands to Control Output Devices........................................................ 3-5
NODAL CPS COMMANDS ................................................................................................ 3-5
Nodal Command Types.................................................................................................. 3-6
Nodal Command Types.................................................................................................. 3-6
Nodal Command Format................................................................................................ 3-7
Addressing..................................................................................................................... 3-8
Using Nodal Commands................................................................................................. 3-9
Using the WITH Keyword............................................................................................3-11
CPS HELP...........................................................................................................................3-12
ADDITIONAL MODES OF OPERATION .........................................................................3-14
Terminal Mode.............................................................................................................3-14
STCPSUG
7/31/97
ix
Transparent Mode.........................................................................................................3-15
USING CPS IN ST-LINK/+ HYBRID NETWORKS...........................................................3-16
CPS Communicating With Remote ST Node via LINK/2+ Supervisory Port.................3-16
CPS Communicating With Remote LINK/2+ Node via ST Craft Port
or Modem Port ........................................................................................................3-18
CPS Communicating With Local or Remote LINK/2+ Node via LINK/2+
Supervisory Port......................................................................................................3-19
USER INTERFACE COMPATIBILITY..............................................................................3-21
Chapter 4. Typical Configuration Activities
CONFIGURING NODE PARAMETERS............................................................................. 4-4
Procedure 4-1. Configuring System Profile Parameters................................................... 4-4
Procedure 4-2. Configuring Node Management Parameters............................................. 4-4
Procedure 4-3. Configuring Softload Parameters............................................................ 4-5
CONFIGURING ACCESS PARAMETERS......................................................................... 4-6
Procedure 4-4. Configuring CPI Port Access Parameters................................................ 4-6
Configuring Modem Port Access.................................................................................... 4-7
Procedure 4-5. Configuring IP Access Parameters.......................................................... 4-7
Procedure 4-6. Configuring Root Access........................................................................ 4-8
Procedure 4-7. Configuring Node Access Parameters..................................................... 4-9
Procedure 4-8. Configuring Community Profile Parameters............................................ 4-9
CONFIGURING ALARM AND TRAP PARAMETERS.....................................................4-10
Procedure 4-9. Configuring the Alarm Log....................................................................4-10
Procedure 4-10. Configuring Trap Access Parameters...................................................4-10
CONFIGURING CPI AND MODEM PARAMETERS........................................................4-11
Procedure 4-11. Configuring CPI Communications Parameters......................................4-11
Procedure 4-12. Configuring Modem Communications Parameters................................4-11
CONFIGURING CLOCKING PARAMETERS...................................................................4-12
Procedure 4-13. Configuring Clocking Parameters.........................................................4-12
CONFIGURING CHANNEL PROFILE PARAMETERS....................................................4-13
Procedure 4-14. Configuring Channel Profile Parameters...............................................4-13
CONFIGURING VOICE PROFILE PARAMETERS ..........................................................4-13
Procedure 4-15. Configuring Voice Profile Parameters..................................................4-14
CONFIGURING MODULE PARAMETERS ......................................................................4-14
Procedure 4-16. Configuring Module Parameters...........................................................4-14
CONFIGURING SYNCHRONOUS PORT PARAMETERS...............................................4-16
Procedure 4-17. Configuring Synchronous Port Parameters - SDM Port
to SDM Port ............................................................................................................4-16
to T1M or E1M Port................................................................................................4-19
CONFIGURING T1 PORT PARAMETERS .......................................................................4-23
Procedure 4-19. Configuring T1 Port Parameters..........................................................4-23
CONFIGURING E1 PORT PARAMETERS .......................................................................4-24
Procedure 4-20. Configuring E1 Port Parameters..........................................................4-24
CONFIGURING BUNDLE PARAMETERS.......................................................................4-25
Procedure 4-21. Configuring Bundle Parameters...........................................................4-25
ADDING A BUNDLE TO A T1 OR E1 PORT ...................................................................4-26
Procedure 4-22. Adding a Bundle..................................................................................4-26
x
STCPSUG
7/3197
CONFIGURING INTERNODAL LINK PARAMETERS....................................................4-27
Procedure 4-23. Configuring Internodal Link Parameters...............................................4-27
CONFIGURING TDM CHANNEL PARAMETERS...........................................................4-28
Procedure 4-24. Configuring TDM Channel Parameters................................................4-28
CONFIGURING FRAME RELAY PARAMETERS............................................................4-29
Point-to-Point Frame Relay and HDLC.........................................................................4-30
Procedure 4-25. Configuring Frame Relay Parameters - T1M
or E1M NxDS0 Connections....................................................................................4-32
Procedure 4-26. Configuring Frame Relay Parameters - SDM Connections....................4-36
Procedure 4-27. Configuring Frame Relay Parameters - SDM Encapsulation of
HDLC/SDLC ..........................................................................................................4-40
CONFIGURING TRUNK GROUP PARAMETERS ...........................................................4-43
ASM Voice Channels....................................................................................................4-44
Procedure 4-28. Configuring Trunk Group Parameters - PBX to PBX
at Different Nodes....................................................................................................4-44
Procedure 4-29. Configuring Trunk Group Parameters - PBX to AD-10
Procedure 4-30. Configuring Trunk Group Parameters - AD-10 to AD-10
at Same Node ..........................................................................................................4-57
at Same Node ..........................................................................................................4-63
CONFIGURING X.50 PARAMETERS...............................................................................4-67
Procedure 4-33. Configuring X.50 Parameters - Connections
Between X.50 Networks...........................................................................................4-67
Between X.50 Network and Subrate I/O Devices Local to ASM...............................4-73
Between X.50 Network and Subrate I/O Devices Remote to ASM............................4-79
CONFIGURING ACCESS DEVICE PARAMETERS.........................................................4-86
AD-10 Applications......................................................................................................4-86
Procedure 4-36. Configuring AD-10 Access Device Parameters - Connections
Between AD-10 and ST Node..................................................................................4-87
Between AD-10 Voice or TDM Mode Ports.............................................................4-95
Between AD-10 TDM Mode Data Ports and Other Devices....................................4-102
Between AD-10 TDM Packet Mode Ports..............................................................4-107
Between AD-10 TDM Packet Mode Ports and Other Devices.................................4-112
AD-3/AD-7 Applications............................................................................................4-120
Procedure 4-41. Configuring AD-3/AD-7 Access Device Parameters - Connections
Between AD-3/AD-7s Connected to Same RTM Module........................................4-120
Between AD-3/AD-7s and other CPE at the Same Node (Local Drop)....................4-124
Between AD-3/AD-7 and AD-10 Access Devices at the Same Node (Local Drop)..4-128
STCPSUG
7/31/97
xi
Between AD-3/AD-7 and X.50 Network at the Same Node (Local Drop)................4-133
Between AD-3/AD-7 and Frame Relay or HDLC at the Same Node (Local Drop)..4-139
Between AD-3/AD-7 Access Devices at Different Nodes........................................4-146
CONFIGURING LINK GATEWAY PARAMETERS.......................................................4-151
LINK Gateway Applications.......................................................................................4-151
Procedure 4-47. Configuring an LGM Datalink...........................................................4-152
Procedure 4-48. Configuring Synchronous Data Connections to SDM Ports................4-157
Procedure 4-49. Configuring Synchronous Data Connections to AD-10 Ports..............4-160
Procedure 4-50. Configuring Synchronous/Asynchronous Data Connections
to AD-3/AD-7 Ports ..............................................................................................4-165
Procedure 4-51. Configuring Analog Voice Connections..............................................4-169
Procedure 4-52. Configuring PBX Voice Connections.................................................4-175
CONFIGURING PBX NETWORKING PARAMETERS ..................................................4-180
Procedure 4-53. Configuring PBX Networking Parameters -Central DSM Module.......4-180
Procedure 4-54. Configuring PBX Networking Parameters -Local DSM Modules........4-187
Procedure 4-55. Configuring PBX Networking Parameters -Remote/Local
DSM Modules.......................................................................................................4-193
APPENDIXES
Appendix A. CPS Node Configuration
NODE CONFIGURATION STEPS......................................................................................A-1
1. Initialize the node’s configuration database.................................................................A-1
2. Set the system profile, node management, and master clock configuration..................A-1
3. Set the IP access configuration...................................................................................A-1
4. Set the trap access and alarm configuration................................................................A-1
5. Set the node access configuration...............................................................................A-2
6. Define community profiles.........................................................................................A-2
7. Define the clock fallback list......................................................................................A-2
8. Define the channel profiles.........................................................................................A-2
9. Define the voice profiles.............................................................................................A-2
10. Define at least one INL............................................................................................A-2
11. Reset the node..........................................................................................................A-3
COMMAND/CONFIGURATION PARAMETER CROSS-REFERENCE............................A-3
Appendix B. Alarm and Error Messages
Appendix C. Status Parameters
Appendix D. Scheduling Network Operations Using a CPS-Based
Facility
SCHEDULER.......................................................................................................................D-1
xii
STCPSUG
7/3197
DOS BATCH FILE ..............................................................................................................D-2
CPS SCRIPT FILE ...............................................................................................................D-2
Time-of-Day Channel Switching....................................................................................D-3
Channel Grooming.........................................................................................................D-3
SAMPLE FILES...................................................................................................................D-4
Example 1. example.bat File..........................................................................................D-4
Example 2. tod_sw.cps File............................................................................................D-5
Example 3. cps.log File..................................................................................................D-6
Examle 4. tod_grm.cps File ...........................................................................................D-7
INDEX
Figures
2-1
2-2
2-3
CPS to ST Node Connections.................................................................................... 2-2
CPS to ST Node Connections Using Modems............................................................ 2-3
CPS to LINK/2+ Node Connections.......................................................................... 2-4
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
Command Format..................................................................................................... 3-7
Initial CPS Online Help Display...............................................................................3-13
Online Help Display for a Local Command..............................................................3-13
Entering a Command Using Online Help..................................................................3-14
CPS Commands to Remote ST Node Via Local LINK/2+ Node SP Port...................3-18
LINK/2+ SP Commands to Remote LINK/2+ Node Via Local
ST Node CPI Port...............................................................................................3-19
LINK/2+ Commands to Local or Remote LINK/2+ Node Via CPS
Connected to Local LINK/2+ Node SP Port........................................................3-20
3-7
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Sample Application: Local to Remote Synchronous Port...........................................4-17
Sample Application: Local Synchronous Port to Remote T1/E1................................4-19
Frame Relay Support...............................................................................................4-31
HDLC/SDLC Support .............................................................................................4-31
T1M or E1M NxDS0 Frame Relay ..........................................................................4-32
SDM Frame Relay (Sheet 1 of 2).............................................................................4-37
SDM HDLC/SDLC Configuration...........................................................................4-41
PBX to PBX Trunk Group Configuration (Different Nodes).....................................4-45
PBX to AD-10 Trunk Group Configuration (Different Nodes)..................................4-48
AD-10 to AD-10 Trunk Group Configuration (Different Nodes)...............................4-54
PBX to AD-10 Trunk Group Configuration (Same Node).........................................4-58
AD-10 to AD-10 Trunk Group Configuration (Same Node)......................................4-64
X.50 Network to X.50 Network...............................................................................4-68
X.50 Network to Subrate I/O Device Local to the ASM...........................................4-74
X.50 Network to Subrate I/O Device Remote to the ASM.........................................4-80
AD-10 Applications.................................................................................................4-87
AD-10 to ST Node Connection................................................................................4-89
Interconnecting AD-10 Voice or TDM Ports ............................................................4-96
xiii
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-30
4-31
4-32
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-36
4-37
4-38
Connecting AD-10 TDM Mode Ports to Other Devices..........................................4-103
Interconnecting AD-10 Packet Mode Ports.............................................................4-108
Connecting AD-10 Packet Mode Ports to Other Devices.........................................4-113
AD-3/AD-7 Applications.......................................................................................4-121
AD-3/AD-7 Local Switch......................................................................................4-122
AD-3/AD-7 Local Drop to AD-3/AD-7 or Other CPE............................................4-125
AD-3/AD-7 Local Drop to AD-10 .........................................................................4-129
AD-3/AD-7 Local Drop to X.50 Network..............................................................4-134
AD-3/AD-7 Local Drop to Frame Relay or HDLC.................................................4-140
AD-3/AD-7 Remote Connection to AD-3/AD-7......................................................4-147
LINK Gateway Applications..................................................................................4-152
Configuring an LGM Datalink...............................................................................4-153
LINK/+ Sync Data to SDM Sync Data ..................................................................4-158
LINK/+ Sync Data to AD-10 Sync Data ................................................................4-161
LINK/+ Sync/Async Data to AD-3 or AD-7 Sync/Async Data...............................4-166
LINK/+ Analog Voice to AD-10 Analog Voice......................................................4-170
LINK/+ Node PBX to ST Node PBX.....................................................................4-176
PBX Networking (Central DSM Module)...............................................................4-181
PBX Networking (Local DSM Modules)................................................................4-188
PBX Networking (Remote/Local DSM Modules)...................................................4-195
Tables
xiv
2-1
CPS Prompt Format ................................................................................................. 2-8
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
CPS Cursor Control Keys......................................................................................... 3-1
Local CPS Commands.............................................................................................. 3-2
Nodal Command Types............................................................................................. 3-6
Resource Identifiers.................................................................................................. 3-8
Address Syntax......................................................................................................... 3-9
LINK/2+ SP Commands From CPS in SP Mode......................................................3-17
LINK/2+ Key Commands From CPS in Terminal Mode to
Local LINK/2+ Node..........................................................................................3-20
LINK/ST User Interface Compatibility.....................................................................3-21
4-1
Configuring Specific Module Type- Parameters........................................................4-15
A-1
CPS Configuration Commands..................................................................................A-3
B-1
B-2
Alarm Summary.......................................................................................................B-1
Error Messages....................................................................................................... B-13
STCPSUG
7/3197
Chapter
1
Craft Person Station Overview
The Craft Person Station (CPS) is a DOS based application that allows a user to configure and
troubleshoot Synchrony Bandwidth Manager network elements and connections. Commands
entered at the CPS can be directed to either the local node or to remote nodes on the network.
In a hybrid ST node/LINK node network, the CPS can issue ST commands to a remote ST node
via the SP port on a LINK/2, and the CPS can issue most LINK commands to a remote LINK
node via the CPI port at the ST node. For additional information, see the “Using CPS” chapter.
Detailed information about each CPS command is provided in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Craft
Person Station Command Reference Manual. Detailed information on ST node configuration is
provided in the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning
Manual. Information about ST node maintenance and troubleshooting procedures is provided in the
Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Installation and Maintenance Manual.
The purpose of CPS is twofold: it is required for initial node level configuration and serves as a
supplement to the Synchrony network management software. CPS is not intended as the primary
network management tool, but can be used for remote diagnostics and troubleshooting if for some
reason a node is inaccessible from a Synchrony Network Management System workstation.
Features
CPS features consist of the following:
• Nodal control and configuration.CPS operators can define, modify, delete, and display a
complete set of parameters for both local and remote ST nodes.
• Comprehensive status of system elements.CPS operators can display the status of network
connections, individual hardware components, and node configuration.
• Alarm information access.CPS operators can define, modify, delete, and display alarm
information for both local and remote ST nodes. Displayed alarms can be recorded to any
enabled logging device (e.g., disk or printer).
• Diagnostic loopbacks for communication links.CPS operators can define and initiate a
comprehensive set of diagnostic loopbacks and message generator tests to verify communication
links between network components.
• Multi-level script file execution.CPS commands can be executed from a script file with up to
four levels of nesting.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
1-1
• Dual mode operation. CPS operates in either online or offline mode. In offline mode
commands are checked for syntax only to allow verification prior to saving commands to a
script file. Commands entered in online mode are executed by the target node.
• Customized operation.CPS local commands provide complete control of the operation of the
CPS application.
• Flexibility. CPS can be run directly from the 3½ inch distribution disk and does not require hard
disk installation. The software provides alternate modes of operation (e.g., dumb terminal
emulation) which make supplementary utilities unnecessary.
• Softload module operating code.CPS is capable of softloading to the local ST node directly
from the 3½ inch operational software floppy disks.
System Requirements
The CPS runs on an IBM compatible PC that connects to any node via the Craft port or the
Modem port on the Nodal Control Processor (NCP).
NOTE:
The CPS distribution software requires approximately 300K of free
conventional memory.
The minimum requirements for running CPS in DOS is:
• 80386 processor running at 33 MHz
• 4 Megabytes of RAM
• DOS 3.3
The minimum requirements for running CPS in Windows is:
• 80486 processor running at 33 MHz
• 4 Megabytes of RAM
• Windows 3.1
The following are also required:
• High Density 3.5-inch floppy disk drive
• 1 Meg of hard disk space
• RS-232 communications port (COM1 or COM2)
• CGA/EGA/VGA compatible display
• Additional serial (COM1 or COM2) or parallel printer port (optional)
1-2
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Chapter
2
Getting Started
This chapter provides the basic information required to connect, set up, and use the Craft Person
Station (CPS). Once set up, the user can issue commands to configure the network, retrieve
network status information, and run diagnostic procedures. Access to specific nodes or node
elements depends on factors such as password level and partition assignment.
System Connections
The CPS connects to the Craft port on the Nodal Control Processor (NCP) Module of an ST node
using one of two optional serial communications cables:
• Nonredundant cable, ST/NCP-CPS (Part No. 610125)
or Craft port
• Redundant cable, ST/NCP-RCPS (Part No. 610124)
Alternatively, the CPS connects via modems to the Modem port on the NCP Module of an ST node
using one of two optional serial communications cables:
• Nonredundant cable, ST/NCP-MDM (Part No. 610133)
or
• Redundant cable, ST/NCP-RMDM (Part No. 610131)
The CPS can also connect to the supervisory port of a LINK/2+ Network Module (NCL) using the
LC232-M (Part No.61215) or LC232-F (Part No. 61216) cable.
Refer to the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Installation and Maintenance
Manual for cable diagrams.
Craft Port Specifications
The Craft port on the NCP Module has the following specifications:
• Serial, asynchronous, RS-232 electrical interface
• 8-pin modular connector on the NCP module
STCPSUG
7/31/97
2-1
• Communication rates of 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, and 19200 bps
Craft Port Connection (ST Node)
To connect the IBM compatible PC to the Craft port of the NCP Module at an ST node:
1.
Determine the type of serial port (9-pin or 25-pin) on the PC. If the PC serial port is a 25-pin
connector, use a 25-pin to 9-pin cable adapter.
2.
Determine the number of the PC serial port (COM1 or COM2). Refer to the documentation
supplied with the computer.
3.
Connect the CPS interface cable to the serial port on the PC.
4.
Plug the 8-pin end of the CPS interface cable into the Craft port of the NCP Module.
Figure 2-1 provides an illustration of the CPS/NCP connections.
CRAFT PORT
CRAFT PERSON STATION
ST NODE
ST/NCP-CPS CABLE
RS-232 SERIAL
INTERFACE
PC-COMPATIBLE COMPUTER
NCP
SLOT #1
NONREDUNDANT NCP
CRAFT PORT
ST NODE
RS-232 SERIAL
INTERFACE
NCP
SLOT #1
ST/NCP-RCPS
REDUNDANT CABLE
NCP
SLOT #2
CRAFT PORT
REDUNDANT NCPs
Figure 2-1. CPS to ST Node Connections
Modem Port Specifications
The Modem port on the NCP Module has the following specifications:
• Serial, asynchronous, RS-232 electrical interface
2-2
STCPSUG
7/31/97
• DB-9 male connector on the NCP module
• Communication rates of 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, and 19200 bps
Modem Port Connection (ST Node)
To connect the IBM compatible PC via modems to the Modem port of the NCP Module at an ST
node:
1.
At the PC end, cable the PC serial port to the associated modem. Refer to the modem and PC
user documentation.
2.
At the ST node end, plug the 9-pin end of the interface cable into the Modem port of the NCP
Module.
3.
Connect the 25-pin end of the interface cable to the associated modem. If required, use a -pin
9
to 25-pin cable adapter.
Figure 2-2 provides an illustration of the CPS/NCP connections using modems.
MODEM
PORT
ST NODE
ST/NCP-MDM CABLE
RS-232 SERIAL
INTERFACE
MODEM
NCP
SLOT #1
MODEM
NONREDUNDANT NCP
MODEM
PORT
ST/NCP-RMDM
REDUNDANT CABLE
RS-232 SERIAL
INTERFACE
ST NODE
NCP
SLOT #1
MODEM
MODEM
NCP
SLOT #2
MODEM
PORT
REDUNDANT NCPs
Figure 2-2. CPS to ST Node Connections Using Modems
STCPSUG
7/31/97
2-3
SP Port Connection (LINK/2+ Node)
To connect the IBM compatible PC to the SP port of the NCL Module at a LINK/2+ node:
1.
Determine the type of serial port (9-pin or 25-pin) on the PC. If required, use a 9-pin to
25-pin cable adapter.
2.
Determine the number of the PC serial port (COM1 or COM2). Refer to the documentation
supplied with the computer.
3.
Connect the CPS interface cable to the serial port on the PC. Ensure that the connector is
fastened securely.
4.
Plug the 25-pin end of the interface cable into the SP port of the NCL Module.
Figure 2-3 provides an illustration of the CPS/NCL connections.
SP PORT
RS-232 SERIAL
INTERFACE
LINK/2+ NODE
LC232-M/F CABLE
NCL
SLOT #1
NONREDUNDANT NCL
SP PORT
LINK/2+ NODE
RS-232 SERIAL
INTERFACE
LC232-M/F CABLE
REDUNDANT
Y ADAPTER
NCL
SLOT #1
NCL
SLOT #2
SP PORT
REDUNDANT NCLs
Figure 2-3. CPS to LINK/2+ Node Connections
2-4
STCPSUG
7/31/97
CPS Software Installation
The following procedures describe how to install the CPS software application on a PC using
DOS, Windows 3.1, or Windows 95.
Installing CPS Software Using DOS
To install the CPS software using DOS:
1.
Insert the CPS application disk (RP66084) into the floppy disk drive (a: or b:) of the PC that
will be used as the craft person station.
2.
Start the CPS software installation utility by entering the following command at the DOS
prompt:
a:\dosinst
or
b:\dosinst
3.
A dialog box appears informing you about the minimum system requirements. To continue
with the CPS installation, press the Enter key.
NOTE:
4.
You may abort the installation program at any time by pressing the
Esc key.
You are next prompted to enter the destination drive and directory name. You may accept the
default drive/directory or choose your own. After selecting the drive and directory, press the
Enter key.
The CPS application program will now be installed. This takes about one minute.
5.
A dialog box will appear signifying that the installation successfully completed. Pressing
either the Enter key or Esc key will take you to the CPS directory. Enter thedir command
to view the files installed in the CPS directory. One file will be namedcps0210.exe, or
something similar. This is the executable file that you will use to start the CPS application.
NOTE:
6.
The filename cps0210.exe only applies to the initial release of CPS
software. If a maintenance release is required, the file name will be
different. For example, the first maintenance release of CPS software
may be named cps0211.exe.
Remove the CPS application disk from the drive and store it in a safe place.
Installing CPS Software Using Windows 3.1
To install the CPS software using Windows 3.1:
1.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
2-5
2.
Start the CPS software installation by choosing File from the Program Manager window and
then selecting Run from the menu. Type the following in the Command Line:
a:\wininst
or
b:\wininst
Then click on OK.
3.
with the CPS installation, click on the OK button.
NOTE:
You may abort the installation program at any time by clicking on the
Cancel button.
4.
You are next prompted to enter the Windows Groupname. You may accept the default
Groupname or choose your own. After selecting the Groupname, click on the OK button.
5.
default drive/directory or choose your own. After selecting the drive and directory, click on
the OK button.
6.
A dialog box will appear signifying that the installation successfully completed. Clicking on
the OK button will cause the Timeplex Apps window to appear. You may now start the CPS
application by double-clicking on the Craft Person Station icon in the Timeplex Apps
window.
7.
Installing CPS Software Using Windows 95
To install the CPS software using Windows 95:
1.
2.
Start the CPS software installation by clicking on the Start button and selectingRun from the
menu. Then type the following in the Command Line:
a:\wininst
or
b:\wininst
3.
with the CPS installation, click on the OK button.
NOTE:
4.
2-6
You may abort the installation program at any time by clicking on the
Cancel button.
You are next prompted to enter the Windows Groupname. You may accept the default
Groupname or choose your own. After selecting the Groupname, click on the OK button.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
5.
default drive/directory or choose your own. After selecting the drive and directory, click on
the OK button.
6.
A dialog box will appear signifying that the installation successfully completed. Clicking on
the OK button will cause the Timeplex Apps window to appear. You may now start the CPS
application by double-clicking on the Craft Person Station icon in the Timeplex Apps
window.
7.
CPS Application Start-Up
The following procedures describe how to start the CPS application on a PC using DOS, Windows
3.1, or Windows 95.
Starting the CPS Application Using DOS
To start the CPS application on a PC using DOS:
1.
At the DOS prompt, enter the following commands:
cd\pathname
cps0210
where pathname is the directory location of the CPS application andcps0210 is the
executable file that starts the CPS application
NOTE:
The filename cps0210 only applies to the initial release of the CPS
application software. If a maintenance release of CPS software is
required, the file name will be different. For example, the first
maintenance release of CPS software may be named cps0211.exe and
you would, therefore, enter cps0211.
The screen displays CPS version information, the CPS command prompt, and a status line.
3.
Use local commands to set up the appropriate communication configuration (e.g., COM port,
baud rate). Refer to the "Using CPS" chapter for the appropriate local commands.
4.
Once communication with the ST node or LINK/2+ node is established, the system may
require an access password. Enter the correct password; otherwise, access to the nodal
commands will be denied.
Starting the CPS Application Using Windows 3.1
To start the CPS application on a PC using Windows 3.1:
1.
From the Program Manager, open the Timeplex Apps window.
2.
Double-click on the Craft Person Station icon in the Timeplex Apps window.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
2-7
The screen displays CPS version information, the CPS command prompt, and a status line.
3.
4.
Starting the CPS Application Using Windows 95
To start the CPS application on a PC using Windows 95:
1.
From the main window, click on the Start button.
2.
Select Programs from the Start menu.
3.
Select Timeplex Apps from the Programs menu.
4.
Move the arrow right to select the Craft Person Station application.
5.
Click on the Craft Person Station application icon.
The screen displays CPS version information, the CPS command prompt, and astatus line.
6.
7.
The CPS Prompt
The CPS prompt indicates the current mode of operation and connection status as shown in Table
2-1. The modes of operation are discussed in detail in the "Using CPS" chapter.
Table 2-1. CPS Prompt Format
Mode of Operation
CPS command mode
Prompt Displayed
>>>> CPS==>
node CPS==>
Terminal mode
Transparent mode
2-8
Connection Status
Not connected to a node
Connected to a node
node CPI>
Connected to a node via CPI port
node MDM>
Connected to a node via modem port
>>>> TRANS:
Not connected to a node
node TRANS:
Connected to a node
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Customizing the CPS Environment
If a script file named CPS.CFG has been created in the CPS home directory, the file will be
executed before the CPS command prompt is displayed. The CPS.CFG script file customizes the
CPS start-up environment. For example, the following CPS.CFG script file sets the COM port,
baud rate, data bits, stop bits, and parity. The CPS is then placed in online mode, alarm polling is
enabled, and the screen is cleared:
//com 1
//baud 9600
//databits 8
//stopbits 1
//parity none
//online
//alm on
//cls
The Craft port on the NCP Module has a default configuration of 9600 baud, no parity, 8 data
bits, and 1 stop bit. The set cpi command can be used to change the Craft port configuration once
communication with the node has been established. Refer to the "CPS Commands" chapter in the
Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Craft Person Station Command Reference Manual for a description of
the set cpi command.
Likewise, the Modem port on the NCP Module also has a default configuration of 9600 baud, no
parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit. The set mdm command can be used to change the Modem port
configuration once communication with the node has been established. Refer to the "CPS
Commands" chapter in the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Craft Person Station Command Reference
Manual for a description of the set mdm command.
ST Node System Configuration
For information on configuring an ST node, see theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Management Configuration Planning Manual. After the node has been configured, refer to the
following paragraphs for information on backing up and restoring the configured database.
Database Backup and Restore
The following procedures describe how to back up and restore an ST-1000 or ST-20 node’s
configuration database.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
2-9
Backing Up the Configuration Database
After system configuration has been completed, perform the following procedure to backup the
node configuration database. Periodically perform database backups after changes have been made
to the system configuration.
1.
From a CPS connected directly to the node whose database is to be backed up, start the CPS
application by entering the following command at the DOS prompt:
pathname \cps0210
where pathname is the directory location of the CPS software
NOTE:
2.
This command only applies to the initial release of the CPS software.
If a maintenance release of CPS software is required, it will have a
different file name. For example, in the first maintenance release of
CPS software, the file may be named cps0211.exe. In that case, you
would enter cps0211.
To upload the database from an ST node and save it to the default directory of the PC running
the CPS software, at the CPS prompt, type:
upload file filename.one pathname\filename.two
where filename.one is the file to be uploaded, pathname is the directory location on the CPS
that you wish to store the uploaded file (if other than the default directory), andfilename.two
is the filename you assign to the backed up database.
For example: upload file sts50.mib c:\database\node0001.dbf
NOTE:
The database backup process will take about 20 minutes if the speed
of the CPI port is set to 9600 bps. Setting the speed to 19200 bps will
reduce this time to about 10 minutes.
Restoring the Configuration Database
1.
From a CPS connected directly to the ST node whose database is to be restored, start the CPS
application by entering the following command at the DOS prompt:
pathname \cps0210
where pathname is the directory location of the CPS software
2.
At the CPS prompt, type:
set sfload file_name= "filename.ext" dir_name= "pathname"
dst_port= 0:0:0 sw_type=st_db src_nms_node= node#
src_nms_ip=1.0.0.0 timeout=150
where:
"filename.ext" is the filename of the database you wish to restore.
"pathname" is the directory location on the PC of the file to be downloaded.
(For example, "\temp" defines the location as the temp subdirectory.)
2-10
STCPSUG
7/31/97
0:0:0 is the destination port of the online NCP Module.
node# is the node ID of the local ST node at which the CPS is connected.
150 is the inactivity timeout in seconds.
3.
Verify that the softload parameter settings are correct by typing:
dsp st sfload
4.
To download the database, type:
dnload start active
The backed up database will be downloaded to the node.
NOTE:
5.
The database restore process will take about 20 minutes if the speed
of the CPI port is set to 9600 bps. Setting the speed to 19200 bps will
reduce this time to about 10 minutes.
To activate the restored database, type:
rst node
PRECAUTION:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
The rst node command temporarily interrupts service on
the node.
2-11
Chapter
3
Using CPS
This chapter describes how to use the Craft Person Station (CPS) and provides information on
CPS commands as well as operational software upgrade procedures.
For ST-LINK/+ hybrid network considerations, information is included about issuing:
• CPS commands to a remote ST node from a CPS connected to a LINK/2+ node supervisory
port
• LINK/+ commands to a remote LINK/2+ node from a CPS connected to an ST node CPI port
• LINK/+ commands to a local or remote LINK/2+ node from a CPS connected to a LINK/2+
supervisory port
Entering Commands
All CPS commands are executed from the CPS prompt. The CPS is not case sensitive. Commands
can be entered in upper or lower case. The CPS interface saves a command history and provides
the ability to recall a previously entered command to be edited or reissued. Table -1
3 describes the
cursor control keys used to recall and edit CPS commands.
Table 3-1. CPS Cursor Control Keys
Key(s)
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Left Arrow
Scrolls downward through a list of previously entered commands. Previous
commands can be edited and then executed by pressing the Enter key.
Moves the cursor one character position to the left.
Right Arrow
Moves the cursor one character position to the right.
Backspace
Deletes the character immediately to the left of the cursor.
Delete
Home
End
Ctrl+Up Arrow
Ctrl+Down Arrow
Ctrl+Left Arrow
Ctrl+Right Arrow
Esc
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Description
Scrolls upward through a list of previously entered commands. Previous
commands can be edited and then executed by pressing the Enter key.
Deletes the character at the present cursor position.
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line.
Moves the cursor to the end of the command line.
Moves the cursor to the top of the command history.
Moves the cursor to the bottom of the command history.
Moves the cursor left to the beginning of the previous segment of the
command.
Moves the cursor right to the beginning of the next segment of the command.
Cancels the current command and clears the command line.
3-1
To enter CPS commands from the CPS:
1.
At the CPS prompt, type the complete command or scroll through the previously entered
commands using the Up and Down arrow keys until the desired command is displayed. Edit
as required.
2.
Press the Enter key to execute a command.
• If the command was entered incorrectly, an error message is displayed. At the CPS prompt,
reenter the command.
• If the command was entered correctly:
- The command is executed.
- The response is displayed.
- The CPS prompt is displayed.
The CPS provides two types of CPS commands, local commands and remote commands.
Local CPS Commands
Local commands control the operation of the CPS software and are preceded by a double slash (//).
Typically, local commands are followed by a value such as baud rate or node number; or by the
object of the command, for example, a file name or device. In some cases, hot key equivalents are
also provided. Table 3-2 lists the local commands.
NOTE:
The key combination Ctrl+C can be issued to terminate a script file or a //loop
command execution. If the script file has been executed from another script file using
the //do command, only the currently active file is terminated (the current level).
Table 3-2. Local CPS Commands
Command
3-2
Description
//ackalm xx
Clears the CPS background alarm polling count for the corresponding
ST alarm log.xx (1-32)
//alm on
//alm off
Enables/disables background alarm polling.
//alm_nodelist xxxx1
xxxx2 . . . . . . . xxxx 8
Displays total number of alarms for up to eight nodes (separated by
spaces) if alarm polling is enabled (//alm on).
//append filename
Opens an existing log file named filename and adds any new output to
the end of the file. Equivalent to //open if file does not exist.
Hot key: F9
//baud xxxxx
Sets the baud rate to xxxxx for the selected COM port.
//close
Closes the currently open log file. Hot key: F8
//cls
Clears the screen.
Hot key: ALT+C
//com x
Designates COM port x to be used for communication with the NCP’s
Craft Person Interface (CPI).
//cpi_mode nnn.nnn.
nnn.nnn [community]
Changes the modem port from the SLIP (default) mode to the CPI
mode, where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the SLIP address of the NCP. If the
optional modifier community is not specified, then public will be used.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Table 3-2. Local CPS Commands (Cont’d)
Command
Description
//cps_ip nnn.nnn.nnn.
nnn
Sets the source IP address nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn used by the //ping and
//cpi mode commands.
//databits x
Sets the data bits to x for the selected COM port.
//date
Sends a date stamp to all enabled output devices (uses PC clock).
//delay x
Sets a delay of x seconds.
//disable device
Disables output to the selected device. See //enable for values.
//do cmdfile
Executes a script file with the name cmdfile.
//echo on
//echo off
Enables/disables echoing output to selected devices (screen, printer,
log file):
on: Echoes output to the selected devices.
off: Output is not echoed to the selected devices.
//edit filename
Opens the file named filename to be edited.
//editor editorname
Selects the editor to be invoked by //edit.
editorname=editor executable file (with path if required)
//enable device
Enables output to the selected device. Valid devices are:
screen
Display
printer
Selected printer
log file
Selected disk file
//end
Used in a script file to perform the same function as //exit (except
exits to DOS prompt).
//exit
Exits the current script file or quits the CPS program. Hot key: ALT+X
//fc
Sets the flow control mode for the selected COM port.
//fifo [1|2] [on|off|?]
Enables FIFOs of 16550A UART on selected COM port:
1: Selects COM 1 serial communications port
2: Selects COM 2 serial communications port
on: Enables FIFOs on selected UART
off: Disables FIFOs on selected UART
?: Displays UART type and FIFO status (Does not apply to PCs
using Windows 3.1)
//getalm
Executes an immediate background alarm poll, regardless of the //alm
setting.
//help on
//help off
Activates/deactivates online help.
Default is help on.
//home
Sets the home directory of the CPS.
//host_ip nnn.nnn.
nnn.nnn
Defines the default IP address nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn for the //ping and
//cpi mode commands.
//login
Logs in to the CPI after prompting for a user password. Hot key: F5
//logout
Logs out of the CPI and restores modem port to SLIP mode. Hot key:
F4
//loop x cmdfile
Repeatedly executes a script file with the name cmdfile (x=the number
of repeats). If x is unspecified, the script repeats until manually
stopped by pressing the Ctrl+C key combination.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
3-3
Table 3-2. Local CPS Commands (Cont’d)
Command
3-4
Description
//more on
//more off
Enables/disables screen pagination, which pauses the display every
24 lines:
on: Pauses the screen every 24 lines. Press Spacebar to
advance one screen. Press the Enter key to advance one line.
Press the Escape key to cancel pagination. Hot key: F7
off: Screen continues to scroll without pause. Hot key: F6
//node xxxx [host|st|li]
Sets node xxxx as the default node for external commands. To clear a
node setting, type //node 0 host.
host: Default node type is node type to which COM port on PC
running CPS is connected.
st:
Default node is specified ST node.
li:
Default node is specified LINK node.
//note message
Sends an unfiltered message to all enabled output devices. Maximum
number of characters is 255.
//offline
Places the CPS in offline mode. CPS commands are only checked for
syntax and are not transmitted to the Nodal Control Processor (NCP).
Logging and history mechanism are still active. Hot key: F2
Default is offline.
//online
Places the CPS in online mode. Hot key: F3 Default is offline.
//open filename
Creates, opens, and sends output to a log file named filename. If a file
named filename already exists, it is replaced. Any data in the file is
lost. Only one log file can be open at a time. Log files may be
assigned any valid DOS drive, path, file name, and extension.
//parity value
Sets the parity for the selected COM port. Specify none, even, odd,
mark, or space.
//ping nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
Verifies connectivity between CPS and modem port when modem port
is in SLIP mode, where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the SLIP address of the
NCP.
//printer lptx
Defines a printer port x to be used for logging.
//shell
Transfers operations to a DOS shell. At the DOS prompt, type exit to
return to the CPS program.
//showalm
Displays the CPS background alarm polling count for the
corresponding ST alarm log.
//status
Displays the status of the CPS I/O devices.
//stopbits 1
//stopbits 2
Sets the stop bits for the selected COM port to 1 or 2 bits.
//terminal
Switches to dumb terminal mode.
Hot key: F10 Toggles between terminal and CPS command modes.
//time
Sends a time stamp to all enabled output devices (uses PC clock).
//timeout x
Sets the wait time for NCP responses to x seconds.
//timestamp
Sends a date and time stamp to all enabled output devices (uses PC
clock).
//transparent on
//transparent off
Enables/disables transparent mode:
on: Literal transmission of command line input.
off: Command line input translated before transmission.
//version
Displays the CPS software version and copyright information.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Using Local Commands
At the CPS prompt, enter a local command from Table 3-2. For example, to create a log file named
screen and save it to a floppy disk in drivea, type:
//open a:screen
All output that is displayed on the monitor is also sent to the floppy disk. To close the log file, type:
//close
or press the F8 key.
Using Local Commands to Control Output Devices
The local commands //enable, //disable, and //open are used to control output devices. Command
input and responses generated by the CPS can be sent to one or more of the following output
devices:
• Log file
• Printer
• Screen
To verify the status of an output device, enter the following command at the CPS prompt:
//status
The following information is displayed:
I/O Device, Option, and CPS Status
Screen
: Enabled
Log file : ’filename’
Printer : Disabled
More
: Enabled
Echo
: Enabled
Memory Available : XXXXXXX bytes
Nodal CPS Commands
Nodal CPS commands provide complete access to all configuration, control, and status parameters
for ST nodes and typically include command keywords and corresponding values.The following
sections provide a brief overview of the nodal commands. A complete description of each command
is provided in the "CPS Commands " chapter of theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Craft Person
Station Command Reference Manual.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
3-5
Nodal Command Types
Types of nodal commands are indicated by the command root and are summarized in Table -3.
3
Table 3-3. Nodal Command Types
Command
Root
3-6
Command
Name
Action
add
add
Creates a specified network resource.
clr
clear
Deactivates diagnostic operations.
Clears error notifications.
Deletes entries from a log.
con
connect
Connects a channel.
del
delete
Deletes a specified network resource.
disable
disable
Disables a specified resource function.
dnload start
download start
Initiates a software download from the CPS, NMS, or another ST to
the specified ST.
dsc
disconnect
Disconnects a channel.
dsp
display
Displays the configuration settings for a specified network resource.
dsp st
display status
Displays the status of a specified network resource.
dsp stat
display statistics
Displays the statistics for a specified network resource.
enable
enable
Enables a specified resource function.
flush
flush
Invalidates a MIB group. If a rst node command is then issued, that
MIB group will then be returned to the factory default state (flushed).
ins
insert
Activates a specified network resource (loads configuraton settings
and software). Resource cannot be out of service due to failure.
lp
loopback
Initiates a diagnostic loopback.
restart
restart
Restarts an INL.
rmv
remove
Takes a specified network resource out of service.
rst
reset
Loads configuration settings for a specified network resource. All
configuration changes take effect. Resource is temporarily taken
offline.
Takes an I/O or server module temporarily offline to load configuration
settings and software from the NCP. All configuration changes take
effect.
Forces an expansion module to toggle to circuit 1.
Recalculates specified MIB group CRC.
set
set
Sets initial configuration or changes existing configuration settings for a
specified network resource.
tgl
toggle
Forces an expansion module to toggle to the redundant circuit.
trc ch
trace channel
Displays path information for a specified channel.
update
update
Loads nonintrusive configuration settings. Nonintrusive changes do not
require the resource to be taken offline. Resources affected by the
change can be disrupted. The update command will fail if any intrusive
configuration changes have been made.
upload file
upload file
Initiates a software upload from the local ST to the CPS.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Nodal Command Format
The nodal command format is shown in Figure 3-1 and includes the following items:
• node xxxx - Optional prefix used to designate that this command is directed to a remote node
• command root - Basic instruction part of command (for example:set, del, dsp, rst)
• command object - Modifier that defines to what object the command is to be applied (for
example: set sdm port)
• resource/device address - Specifies to what part of the node the command is being directed.
The address could be a physical or virtul port, a module slot number, a DS0 bundle, a table
index entry - to name a few (for example:set sdm port 1:3:5). Conventions for addressing
various network elements are described in Tables 3-4 and 3-5.
• keyword(s) - For configuration commands, are used to select parameter values. For display
commands, are used to selectively display parameters. If keywords are not used in a display
command, all fields are displayed.
NOTE:
When entering a keyword that has a numerical parameter value, you must enter the
entire numerical value.
[node xxxx] dsp ch tdm n:s:p:c dst_node dst_addr
KEYWORDS
ADDRESS
COMMAND OBJECT
COMMAND ROOT
OPTIONAL REMOTE NODE DESIGNATION
Figure 3-1. Command Format
STCPSUG
7/31/97
3-7
Addressing
ST resource and element addressing is based on the definitions shown in Tables 3-4 and 3-5.
Table 3-4. Resource Identifiers
Symbol
Resource Identifier
Possible Values
node
Node number
(command prefix)
1-2000
N
Node number (part of
address)
1-2000
inl#
INL number
1-32
n
Shelf number
1-4
s
Slot number
(See note at end of
table.)
1-17 (ST-1000)
1-12 (ST-20)
For ST-1000, slot 1 is reserved for an NCP on shelf 1
or LXM on expansion shelves. Slot 17 is reserved for
an RXM.
For ST-20, slot 1 is reserved for an NCP.
p
Port or trunk group
number
1-64 (for physical port)
1-32767 (for virtual port or SAF address)
b
Bundle number
1-31
t
Server module type
128 (for FSM)
129 (for SGM and SGM/AG service)
130 (for ASM/X.50)
131 (for DSM)
132 (for LGM)
180 (for ASM voice trunk groups)
181 (for AG voice trunk groups)
g
Server module group
1-64
e
Network element
= b for E1/T1 bundles
= DLCI (1-1023) for frame relay channels
= AD-10 local port number (1-64) for AD-10 channels
= ASM/X.50 circuit address (1-20) for X.50 channels
= 0 for TDM channels originating at synchronous data
ports or server virtual ports
= port number for AD-3 (1-2) or AD-7 (1-6) port
= exchange code entry for DSM D-channel
NOTE: For some CPS commands, slots 13 through 16 are indicated as viable selections
when addressed to an ST-20. This is not, however, true, as the slot number range for ST-20
nodes is 1 - 12.
3-8
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Table 3-5. Address Syntax
Resource/Device Address
Syntax
Node address
N
Shelf address
n
Slot address
n:s
Physical port address
n:s:p
Virtual port address or trunk group address
t:g:p
Bundle address
n:s:p:b
Physical channel address
n:s:p:e
Virtual channel address
t:g:p:e
Using Nodal Commands
Nodal commands can include the command, the object of the command, the address, keywords,
values, and a node prefix.
NOTE:
Throughout this User’s Guide, colons (:) are used as separators in the command
string. For ST commands, you may also use periods (.) or semicolons (;) as
separators. For LINK/2+ commands, however, you must use colons.
Set Command Example
The following example sets the partial configuration for a module in slot 16 of shelf 2:
set module 2:16 hw_type_reqd=t1m hw_subtype_reqd=2
redun_mode=one_to_one start_mode=auto description="module
description"
The command is set, the object of the command ismodule,and 2:16 is the address specifying the
shelf and slot for a module.
Following the command are the keywords and values, each corresponding to a specific module
parameter. For example, redun_mode=one_to_one designates the module redundancy mode
as one-to-one.
Display Command Example
The following command displays the complete module configuration:
dsp module 2:16
To display only the description for the module at shelf 2 slot 16 enter:
dsp module 2:16 description
STCPSUG
7/31/97
3-9
The wild card * or a range of values can be used in the command resource/device address. For
example, to display the description for all the modules on shelf 1 enter:
dsp module 1: * addr description
To display the description for only the first four modules, enter:
dsp module 1:1 -4 addr description
The keyword addr , idx or num is available in display commands to echo the command
object for logging purposes when wild cards are used.
If no keywords are included in a display command, the entire configuration is displayed. Keywords
are used as filters to restrict the display.
Remote Commands
Commands are executed in the local node by default. When a remote node is the target of a
command, use the node prefix. For example, to display the description of shelf 1 at remote node
100 enter:
node 100 dsp shelf 1 description
Additional information on remote commands is provided in the section on using CPS in STLINK/+ hybrid networks.
Character String Limitations
Input at the CPS prompt is limited to 256 characters. Occasionally, configuring a network element
requires more than 256 characters. In these cases it is necessary to enter the command in more than
one part:
set fsm port 128:2:3 partn=12 lmi_actv=ansi_617d
lmi_poll_time=5s lmi_wait_time=20s lmi_full_enq_interv=55
lmi_monitor=4 err_threshold=5 dev_type=user_to_net
max_frame=1024 shared_zero=no max_cir=56 avg_pkt=64b
allocation=any bill_seg_size=64b
set fsm port 128:2:3 bill_ctrl=ena start_mode=auto
NOTE:
3-10
Although it cannot be shown here, CPS uses a "ticker tape" style display where all
input appears on a single line which can continue beyond the display screen.
Commands can be viewed by using the Left arrow, Right arrow, Home, and End
keys.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command Effectivity
Certain changes to network configuration do not take effect immediately. Parameters classified as
intrusive or nonintrusive must be activated using a rst (reset) or update command. All other
parameter settings take effect immediately. Intrusive and nonintrusive parameters are identified in
the "CPS Commands" chapter of the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Craft Person Station Command
Reference Manual.
Intrusive parameters are activated by issuing an rst command. When a reset is executed, the
resource is temporarily taken offline. Nonintrusive parameters can be activated without taking the
resource offline by issuing anupdate command. When an update is executed, resources affected
by the change may be disrupted.
Using the WITH Keyword
To provide display filtering capability, the WITH keyword may be used with any display (DSP)
command that includes a range. Keywords may be listed before the WITH keyword, but only those
keywords following the WITH keyword will affect filtering of the display. If no keywords are listed
before the WITH keyword, then all applicable keywords will still be selected automatically.
When multiple keywords are used following the WITH keyword, those keywords are logically
"ANDed" together. The result is that the filtering is more restrictive than when using a single
keyword.
NOTE:
Not all keywords are available when using the WITH keyword in a display command.
The CPS help will display those keywords that are valid.
Following are typical examples of commands using the WITH keyword.
Example 1:
dsp st module 1.2-17 hw_rev sw_rev with hw_type=t1m
Displays the hardware revision number and software revision of all T1M modules in shelf 1.
Example 2:
dsp st ch 1.2.3.* with status=disconnected
Displays the status of all channels that are disconnected at port 3 of the module in slot 2 of shelf 1.
Example 3:
dsp st ch 2.5-7.*.* with status=loopback
Displays the status of all channels that are in loopback on all ports of modules in slots 5 through 7
of shelf 2.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
3-11
Example 4:
dsp con inl *.* with src_node=400 dst_node=200
Displays the end points of all channels on all internodal links having node 400 as their sourceand
node 200 as their destination.
Example 5:
dsp bdl 1.3.*.* start_mode with update=reset_required
Displays the configuration for all bundles on all ports of the module in slot 3 of shelf 1 whose
update status is reset_required.
Example 6:
dsp fsm port 128.1.200-299 with description="System Test"
Displays the configuration of frame relay ports 200 through 299 that have a description of "System
Test" on the Frame Server Modules in redundancy group 1. This example shows how the user can
provide additional filtering by using the description keyword in those commands where it is
applicable.
CPS Help
The CPS offers help at every level for both local and nodal commands. The online help facility is
activated using the local command//help on or deactivated using the local command//help off.
When the CPS program is initially run, online help is active and pressing the F1 key displays the
hot key selections followed by a menu of the local commands, Figure 3-2.
NOTE:
If online help is not active, pressing the F1 key only displays the hot key selections.
At any time, typing ? will cause the online help to display the nodal command menu and typing/?
will display the local command menu.
3-12
STCPSUG
7/31/97
CPS==> /
<ALT+C> Clear screen
<F1>
Help
<F2> //OffLine
<F3> //OnLine
<F4> //Logout
<F5> //Login
?
<ALT+X> EXIT
<F6> //More OFF
<F7> //More ON
<F8> //Close
<F9> //Append CPS_CMDS.LOG
<F10> //Terminal
Shows Nodal Cmds
/?
Valid Local Commands are:
ACKALM
ALM
CLOSE
CLS
DATABITS
DATE
ECHO
EDIT
EXIT
FC
HOME
HOST_IP
MORE
NODE
OPEN
PARITY
SHOWALM
STATUS
TIMEOUT
TIMESTAMP
<F1>=Help
NODE=LOCAL
Shows Local Commands
ALM_NODELIST
COM
DELAY
EDITOR
FIFO
LOGIN
NOTE
PING
STOPBITS
TRANSPARENT
LOG CLOSED
APPEND
CPI_MODE
DISABLE
ENABLE
GETALM
LOGOUT
OFFLINE
PRINTER
TERMINAL
VERSION
OFFLINE
CPI
BAUD
CPS_IP
DO
END
HELP
LOOP
ONLINE
SHELL
TIME
0 ALARMS
NO COM= Port
Figure 3-2. Initial CPS Online Help Display
When you enter a command, the online help will provide you with all available selections
associated with that command. For example, if you enter the local command//enable, the online
help system will prompt you with the available devices associated with that command,
Figure 3-3.
CPS==> //enable
Valid Devices are:
SCREEN
LOG
PRINTER
<F1>=Help
NODE=LOCAL
LOG CLOSED
OFFLINE
CPI
0 ALARMS
NO COM= Port
Figure 3-3. Online Help Display for a Local Command
Figure 3-4 shows the screen sequence that occurs as the CPS online help prompts you at each
successive step of entering a command. The command shown in the figure is an example of the
nodal command set module 1:5 hw_type_reqd=t1m.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
3-13
CPS==> ?
Valid Commands are:
ADD
CLR
CON
ENABLE
FLUSH
INS
RESTART RMV
RST
UPLOAD
CPS==> set
Valid Commands are:
AD
AD10
CLK
CMNTY
E1M
FSM
MDM
MG
SDM
SFLOAD
TRA
TRAP
DEL
LI
SET
AG
CMNTY_PRF
FSM16
MODULE
SHELF
VOICE
DISABLE
LP
ST
ALM
CPI
FSM64
NMS
SRTE
X50
DNLOAD
NODE
TGL
DSC
ONLINE
TRC
ASM
DCH
INL
NODE-LIST
SYS
BDL
DL
IP
RLY
T1M
DSP
PING
UPDATE
CH
DSM
LGM
RTM
TONE
CPS==> set module
Valid Range is 1-4:1-18
CPS==> set module 1:5
Valid Key Words are:
START_MODE
DESCRIPTION
HW_SUBTYPE_REQD
REDUN_MODE
MAX_BYPASS
MAX_SRC
BACKGND_TESTS
PORT_TESTS
START_DIAGMASK_EXT BGD_DIAGMASK_EXT
CPS==> set module 1:5 hw_type_reqd=
Valid HW_TYPE_REQD Values are:
NCP LXM RXM T1M E1M SGM LGM ASM
<F1>=Help
NODE=LOCAL
LOG CLOSED
HW_TYPE_REQD
GROUP
START_DIAGMASK
DIAG_MODE
FSM
OFFLINE
SDM
RTM
CPI
DSM
0 ALARMS
NO COM= Port
Figure 3-4. Entering a Command Using Online Help
Additional Modes of Operation
Besides the command mode, the CPS provides two other modes of operation, terminal mode and
transparent mode. The following paragraphs provide information about these additional modes.
Terminal Mode
CPS provides dumb terminal emulation through the selected COM port. Terminal mode is
activated by the local command//terminal or the F10 hot key. Terminal mode is used to:
• Verify connectivity to an NCP
• Communicate with a modem to gain access to a remote NCP
• Establish communication with an AD-10 control port to configure the AD-10, or to gain access
to a remote ST node via the AD-10 pass-through mode
3-14
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Terminal mode provides a simple line-oriented TTY terminal. That is, characters are placed only
on the current line. Although all ASCII characters are transmitted in terminal mode, terminal mode
does not support the display of non-printable characters. In addition, when in terminal mode, the
CPS does not support:
• Cursor control keys
• Logging to a printer or a disk file
• File transfer
• Line break (Alt B) transmission or recognition
• VT-100 emulation
• Special processing of incoming data
Terminal mode does provide the ability to monitor and control the COM port EIA functions (DTR,
DSR, RTS, CTS, and DCD). Tab size is fixed at 8. There are several hot keys that allow you to
govern certain aspects of the terminal session, including:
• Local echo
• LF to LF/CR translation for received data
• LF to LF/CR translation for transmitted data
• Screen clearing
Current hot key assignments can be viewed by pressing theF1 key while in any mode of operation.
Transparent Mode
The CPS transparent mode is invoked by the local command//transparent. Transparent mode
provides literal transparent transmission of printable ASCII characters from the CPS command
line, and will display received data up to CPI prompt or timeout. Transparent mode uses the
following features of CPS command mode:
• Recallable history buffer
• Invocable from script files
• Logging to printer and/or log file
• User-definable timeout for received data
Transparent mode differs from terminal mode in the following areas:
• The entire line rather than a character for each keystroke is transmitted.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
3-15
• A CR is sent at the end of each line (e.g., a standard Hayes modem disconnect sequence +++
cannot be sent with a trailing CR).
• Certain ASCII characters cannot be transmitted (e.g., ^C, ^H, ESC, DEL).
• The first character of a line cannot be a space or forward slash ’/’.
• Only one line of received data is displayed at a time. The sequence "(null)" is displayed if no
data is received before the timeout.
One possible use for transparent mode is remote node access via a dialing script. For example:
//transparent on
ATDT 555-1212
//transparent off
Using CPS in ST-LINK/+ Hybrid Networks
The CPS can be used in networks comprised of both LINK/+ and ST nodes (i.e., hybrid networks).
As stated earlier, the applications include:
• Issuing CPS commands to a remote ST node from a CPS connected to a LINK/2+ node
supervisory port
• Issuing LINK/2+ commands to a remote LINK/2+ node from a CPS connected to an ST node
CPI port(See Table 3-6.)
• Issuing LINK/2+ commands to a local or remote LINK/2+ node from a CPS connected to a
LINK/2+ supervisory port (See Table 3-6.)
CPS Communicating With Remote ST Node
via LINK/2+ Supervisory Port
CPS commands can be issued to a remote ST node from a CPS connected to the supervisory port
of a LINK/2+ node, Figure 3-5. The command is prefaced with ST instead of NODE. Only remote
CPS commands may be issued, however, and local CPS commands will be rejected by the
LINK/2+ node.
For example, to display the system status of remote ST node 100, enter the command:
st 100 dsp st sys
At the LINK/2+ node, the CPS operates in CPS mode and the CPS command is translated and
embedded in SP commands for forwarding to the remote ST node. The text string is passed
transparently through one or more LINK/+ nodes to the ST gateway node (contains an LGM
Module). The LGM Module extracts the command and passes it on to the Nodal Control Processor
(NCP) Module at the ST node. The NCP may process the command locally or pass the command
on to an NCP at another node.
3-16
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Table 3-6. LINK/2+ SP Commands From CPS in SP Mode
Command Category
Yes
Busy Command (BSY)
Center Command (CEN)
Clear Commands (CLR) (See Note 1)
ä
ä
ä
Clear Screen Command (CLS)
Connect Commands (CON)
Convert Commands(CNV)
Copy Command (COP)
Delete Commands (DEL)
ä
ä
ä
ä
Define Commands (DEF) (See Note 2)
Disconnect Commands (DSC)
Display Commands (DSP)
External Port (EP) Commands (to LINK/CSU)
Exit Command (X)
Help Command (HELP)
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
Home Command (HOME)
Insert Commands (INS)
Load Commands (LOA)
Loop Commands (LP)
Monitor Commands MON)
Remove Commands (RMV)
Reset Commands (RST)
Save Command (SAV)
Set Commands (SET)
Stop Command (STP)
Test Commands (TST)
Toggle Command (TGL)
Trace Commands (TRC)
? Command
@ Command
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
No
ä
ä
ä
NOTES:
1. The CLR PWD command cannot be issued.
2. The DEF CON and DEF DST commands can be issued.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
3-17
LINK/2+ NODE
ILC
MODULE
ST GATEWAY NODE
T1M/E1M
MODULE
NCL
MODULE
LGM
MODULE
NCP
MODULE
SUPERVISORY
PORT
CPS
Figure 3-5. CPS Commands to Remote ST Node Via Local LINK/2+ Node SP Port
CPS Communicating With Remote LINK/2+ Node
via ST Craft Port or Modem Port
Certain LINK/2+ SP commands (see Table 3-6) can be issued to a remote LINK/2+ node from a
CPS connected to the Craft port or Modem port of an ST node, Figure 3-6. The command is
prefaced with LI instead of NODE. Only remote LINK/2+ commands may be issued, however, and
local LINK/2+ commands will be rejected by the ST node.
For example, to display the system status of remote LINK/2+ node 200, enter the command:
li 200 dsp st sys
At the ST node, the CPS operates in SP mode and the LINK/2+ commands and responses are
transmitted literally to and from the LINK/2+ node respectively. The only CPS processing of these
commands will be to block any DEF commands (except DEF CON and DEF DST) and the CLR
PWD command, since they are interactive and are only available in terminal mode at a LINK/2+
node.
3-18
STCPSUG
7/31/97
LINK/2+ NODE
ILC
MODULE
ST GATEWAY NODE
T1M/E1M
MODULE
LGM
MODULE
NCL
MODULE
NCP
MODULE
CPI
PORT
CPS
Figure 3-6. LINK/2+ SP Commands to Remote LINK/2+ Node Via Local ST Node CPI Port
CPS Communicating With Local or Remote LINK/2+ Node via LINK/2+
Supervisory Port
Certain LINK/2+ SP commands (see Table 3-6) can be issued to a local or remote LINK/2+ node
from a CPS connected to the supervisory port of a LINK/2+ node, Figure 3-7. The remote
LINK/2+ command is prefaced with LI instead of NODE. Only LINK/2+ commands may be
issued, however, and ST commands will be rejected by the local or remote LINK/2+ node.
For example, to display the system status of the local LINK/2+ node, enter the command:
dsp st sys
To display the system status of the remote LINK/+ node, enter the command:
li xxxx dsp st sys
where xxxx = the remote node number
CPS operates in SP mode and the LINK/+ commands and responses are transmitted literally to and
from the LINK/2+ nodes respectively. The only CPS processing of these commands will be to
block any DEF commands (except DEF CON and DEF DST) and the CLR PWD command, since
they are interactive and are only available in terminal mode.
Also, when CPS is in terminal mode, certain LINK/2+ key commands can be issued to the local
LINK/2+ node, Table 3-7. Refer to the LINK/2+ Integrated Connectivity System User’s Guide for
a description of the terminal key commands.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
3-19
LINK/2+ NODE
ILC
MODULE
LINK/2+ NODE
ILC
MODULE
NCL
MODULE
NCL
MODULE
SUPERVISORY
PORT
CPS
Figure 3-7. LINK/2+ Commands to Local or Remote LINK/2+ Node Via CPS
Connected to Local LINK/2+ Node SP Port
Table 3-7. LINK/2+ Key Commands From CPS in Terminal Mode to Local LINK/2+ Node
Key Command
B Key
Backspace Key
Break Key
Control A Keys
Control B Keys
Control C Keys
Control D Keys
Control F Keys
Control H Keys
Control Q Keys
Control R Keys
Control S Keys
Control Z Keys
Delete Key
Escape Key
F Key
Return Key
Space Bar
3-20
Yes
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
ä
No
ä
STCPSUG
7/31/97
User Interface Compatibility
Table 3-8 lists the major functions of a LINK/ST hybrid network and indicates which functions are
compatible with the various user interfaces. If theDisplay box is checked in the table, the interface
can be used to issue display commands that display configuration, status, and statistical
information. If the Manage box is checked, the interface can be used to configure or reconfigure
the node to which the command is addressed.
Table 3-8. LINK/ST User Interface Compatibility
LINK/+ Supervisory
Port (SP)
Synchrony
Release 2.0 CPS
TIME/VIEW
Synchrony
Release 1.2 NMS
Function
Display
Manage
Display
Manage
Display
Manage
Display
Manage
LINK to LINK Channels
(No ST Nodes)
✓
✓
−
−
✓
✓
−
−
LINK to LINK Channels
(Via ST Nodes)
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
−
−
ST to ST Channels
−
✓
−
✓
✓
✓
−
−
✓
✓
✓
−
−
(Note 3)
(Note 3)
ST to LINK Channels
✓
(Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
LINK Routing Tables
(Note 4)
✓
✓
−
−
✓
✓
−
−
ST Gateway Node
Routing Tables
−
−
✓
✓
−
−
−
−
Alarms for LINK
✓
✓
✓
−
−
−
✓
✓
Alarms for ST
−
✓
−
−
−
✓
−
✓
ST Channel
Translation Tables
−
−
✓
✓
−
−
−
−
LINK Node
Management
✓
✓
−
−
✓
✓
−
−
ST Node Management
−
−
✓
✓
−
−
✓
(Note 5)
✓
(Note 6)
LINK Topology
−
−
✓
−
✓
✓
−
−
(Note 7)
ST Topology
−
−
✓
Softload
−
−
Database Convert
(Stand-alone)
−
−
STCPSUG
7/31/97
−
−
✓
✓
✓
−
✓
−
✓
✓
−
−
−
−
✓
✓
✓
(Note 8)
3-21
Table 3-8. LINK/ST User Interface Compatibility (Cont’d)
NOTES:
1. Release 2.1 CPS controls ST directly and manages LINK via the supervisory band pass-through. CPS does not
provide integrated end-to-end management. Channel translation tables can be manually managed using CPS.
2. Release 2.1 CPS can manage the ST end of the channel connection and the SP can manage the LINK end of
the channel connection.
3. Release 1.2 SNMS will display status and, from the ST end, connect/disconnect ST-to LINK/+ channels.
Release 1.2 SNMS will configure ST I/O ports, but not LINK/+ I/O ports or the channel translation table.
4. Refer to the TIME/VIEW user documentation for a definition of the Shadow Routes option. Routes to ST nodes
from a LINK/+ node must be manually configured via SP. TIME/VIEW will preserve the shadow routes that it
can see but not understand.
5. Release 2.1 CPS manages the channel translation tables via user entries.
6. Release 1.2 SNMS will recognize NCP-3 Module types, but will display a blank slot for LGM and DSM Modules.
7. A special setup is required for TIME/VIEW to recognize a LINK/+ node that resides on the far side of an ST
gateway node.
8. The database conversion utility will run on a UNIX workstation containing TIME/VIEW. TIME/VIEW, however,
cannot upload or download the ST database. The database file must be acquired by another method, such as
CPS or TFTP, and loaded onto the workstation from a floppy disk.
3-22
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Chapter
4
Typical Configuration Activities
The following procedures describe typical activities required to configure an ST node.
Procedure 4-1. Configuring System Profile Parameters............................................................. 4-4
Procedure 4-2. Configuring Node Management Parameters....................................................... 4-4
Procedure 4-3. Configuring Softload Parameters...................................................................... 4-5
Procedure 4-4. Configuring CPI Port Access Parameters.......................................................... 4-6
Procedure 4-5. Configuring IP Access Parameters.................................................................... 4-7
Procedure 4-6. Configuring Root Access.................................................................................. 4-8
Procedure 4-7. Configuring Node Access Parameters............................................................... 4-9
Procedure 4-8. Configuring Community Access Parameters...................................................... 4-9
Procedure 4-9. Configuring the Alarm Log..............................................................................4-10
Procedure 4-10. Configuring Trap Access Parameters.............................................................4-10
Procedure 4-11. Configuring CPI Communications Parameters................................................4-11
Procedure 4-12. Configuring Modem Communications Parameters..........................................4-11
Procedure 4-13. Configuring Clocking Parameters...................................................................4-12
Procedure 4-14. Configuring Channel Profile Parameters.........................................................4-13
Procedure 4-15. Configuring Voice Profile Parameters............................................................4-14
Procedure 4-16. Configuring Module Parameters.....................................................................4-14
Procedure 4-17. Configuring Synchronous Port Parameters - SDM Port to SDM Port.............4-16
to T1M or E1M Port.....................................................................................................4-19
Procedure 4-19. Configuring T1 Port Parameters....................................................................4-23
Procedure 4-20. Configuring E1 Port Parameters....................................................................4-24
Procedure 4-21. Configuring Bundle Parameters.....................................................................4-25
Procedure 4-22. Adding a Bundle............................................................................................4-26
Procedure 4-23. Configuring Internodal Link Parameters.........................................................4-27
Procedure 4-24. Configuring TDM Channel Parameters..........................................................4-28
Procedure 4-25. Configuring Frame Relay Parameters - T1M or E1M
NxDS0 Connections.....................................................................................................4-32
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-1
Procedure 4-26. Configuring Frame Relay Parameters - SDM Connections..............................4-36
Procedure 4-27. Configuring Frame Relay Parameters - SDM Encapsulation of
HDLC/SDLC ...............................................................................................................4-40
Procedure 4-28. Configuring Trunk group parameters - PBX to PBX at Different Nodes.........4-44
Procedure 4-29. Configuring Trunk group parameters - PBX to AD-10 at Different Nodes......4-47
Procedure 4-30. Configuring Trunk group parameters - AD-10 to AD-10
at Different Nodes.........................................................................................................4-53
Procedure 4-31. Configuring Trunk group parameters - PBX to AD-10 at Same Node.............4-57
Procedure 4-32. Configuring Trunk group parameters - AD-10 to AD-10 at Same Node..........4-63
Procedure 4-33. Configuring X.50 parameters - Connections Between X.50 Networks.............4-67
Procedure 4-34. Configuring X.50 parameters - Connections Between X.50 Network
and Subrate I/O Devices Local to ASM.........................................................................4-73
Procedure 4-35. Configuring X.50 parameters - Connections Between X.50 Network
and Subrate I/O Devices Remote to ASM......................................................................4-79
Between AD-10 and ST-Node.......................................................................................4-87
Between AD-10 Voice or TDM Mode Ports..................................................................4-95
Between AD-10 TDM Mode Data Ports and Other Devices.........................................4-102
Between AD-10 TDM Packet Mode Ports...................................................................4-107
Between AD-10 TDM Packet Mode Ports and Other Devices......................................4-112
Between AD-3/AD-7s Connected to Same RTM Module.............................................4-120
Between AD-3/AD-7s and Other CPE at the Same Node.............................................4-124
Between AD-3/AD-7s and AD-10 Access Devices at the Same Node (Local Drop)......4-128
Between AD-3/AD-7 and X.50 Network at the Same Node (Local Drop).....................4-133
Between AD-3/AD-7 and Frame Relay or HDLC at the Same Node (Local Drop).......4-139
Between AD-3/AD-7 Access Devices at Different Nodes.............................................4-146
Procedure 4-47. Configuring an LGM Datalink.....................................................................4-152
Procedure 4-48. Configuring Synchronous Data Connections to SDM Ports..........................4-157
4-2
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Procedure 4-49. Configuring Synchronous Data Connections to AD-10 Ports........................4-160
Procedure 4-50. Configuring Asynchronous/Synchronous Data Connections to
AD-3/AD-7 Ports .......................................................................................................4-165
Procedure 4-51. Configuring Analog Voice Connections........................................................4-169
Procedure 4-52. Configuring PBX Voice Connections...........................................................4-175
Procedure 4-53. Configuring PBX Networking Parameters - Central DSM Module................4-180
Procedure 4-54. Configuring PBX Networking Parameters - Local DSM Modules.................4-187
Procedure 4-55. Configuring PBX Networking Parameters - Remote/Local
DSM Modules............................................................................................................4-193
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-3
Configuring Node Parameters
Node configuration includes defining:
• System profile parameters
• Node management parameters
• Softload parameters
Procedure 4-1. Configuring System Profile Parameters
System profile parameters define network-level operations of an ST node. To configure system
profile parameters:
1.
Define the system profile for the node. Refer to the "Node Administration Configuration"
chapter in the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning
Manual for parameter descriptions.
Command:
set sys
2.
Verify the system profile configuration by displaying the system profile parameters.
Command:
dsp sys
3.
After configuring the system profile parameters, reset the node to cause all of the parameters
to take effect.
Command:
rst node
NOTE:
The rst node command resets all modules in the ST node. Both the
active (online) and redundant (offline) NCP Modules are reset, and
the NCP Module in slot 1:1 is forced online. For other 1:1
redundancy module pairs, the module in the odd-numbered slot will
become the online module. Service on all ports will be temporarily
interrupted.
Procedure 4-2. Configuring Node Management Parameters
Node management parameters provide descriptive information about an ST node. To configure
node management parameters:
1.
4-4
Define the node management parameters for the node. Refer to the "Node Administration
Configuration" chapter in the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Commands:
set sys
set shelf n
2.
Verify the node management configuration by displaying the node management parameters.
Commands:
dsp sys
dsp shelf n
3.
After configuring the node management parameters, reset the node to cause all of the
parameters to take effect.
Command:
rst node
NOTE:
interrupted.
Procedure 4-3. Configuring Softload Parameters
Softload parameters define the variables required for a software download. To configure softload
parameters: use the command.
1.
Define the software download parameters. Refer to the “Node Administration Configuration”
Command:
set sfload
2.
Verify that the softload parameter settings are correct.
Command:
dsp st sfload
NOTE:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
For detailed procedures on downloading operational software, see
the "Installing Operational Software” appendix in the Synchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Installation and Maintenance
Manual.
4-5
Configuring Access Parameters
Access parameter configuration includes defining:
• CPI port access
• Modem port access
• IP addressing
• IP access
• Root access
• Node access
• Community access
Procedure 4-4. Configuring CPI Port Access Parameters
CPI port access parameters define password protection and user access levels for a craft person
station connected to the CPI port of an ST node. To configure CPI port access parameters:
1.
Define the CPI port access for the node. Refer to the "Node Administration Configuration"
Command:
set sys
2.
Verify the CPI port access configuration by displaying the CPI port access parameters.
Command:
dsp sys
3.
After configuring the CPI port access parameters, reset the node to cause the parameters to
take effect.
Command:
rst node
NOTE:
4-6
interrupted.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Configuring Modem Port Access
If the SLIP IP address and SLIP mask parameters are both defined (not 0.0.0.0), then the modem
port will come up in the SLIP mode. Otherwise, the modem port will come up in the CPI mode. In
SLIP mode, the modem port access is subject to all of the IP access restrictions. In CPI mode, the
modem port is subject to the CPI password and CPI timeout parameters.
The Synchrony Network Management System (NMS) can connect to the modem port when the
port is in SLIP mode. The Craft Person Station (CPS) can connect to the modem port in either
SLIP mode or CPI mode. When the CPS connects in SLIP mode, the functionality is limited to the
//ping command and //cpi_mode command which toggles to CPI mode allowing full access.
The modem port access parameters are included in the IP access parameters. Refer to the "IP
Access Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Configuration Planning Manual for information on defining modem port access parameters.
Procedure 4-5. Configuring IP Access Parameters
The internet protocol (IP) is used by the Synchrony Network Management System (NMS) to
communicate with ST nodes. The operation of a Synchrony network under the internet protocol is
controlled by the IP access parameters. The internet protocol provides for data transfer over a
network, or a set of networks, using IP format addresses.
IP access parameters define the IP addressing scheme for the network. To configure IP access
parameters:
1.
Define the IP access parameters for the node. Refer to the "IP Access Configuration" chapter
in the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual
for parameter descriptions.
Command:
set ip prf
2.
Define the subnetwork ID for each entry in the subnet table.
Command:
set ip offline x
where x = entry in offline subnet table
3.
Verify the offline IP access configuration by displaying the IP access parameters.
Commands:
dsp ip prf
dsp ip offline x
where x = entry in offline subnet table
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-7
NOTE:
4.
The information displayed is not activated until the command rst ip is
issued. This causes the ip profile configuration to take effect and
copies the offline subnet table to the online subnet table for use by
the system.
Reset the IP profile to copy the offline subnet table to the online subnet table.
Command:
rst ip
5.
Verify the online IP access configuration by displaying the IP access parameters.
Commands:
dsp ip prf
dsp ip online x
where x = entry in online subnet table
Procedure 4-6. Configuring Root Access
The root access list designates up to 16 Synchrony Network Management System (NMS)
workstations that have access to the root node. Each workstation is identified by a root access
index (1-16). If the root access list is empty, no workstations will be able to access the root node.
To configure root access parameters:
1.
Define the root access for a Synchrony NMS workstation that is to have access to this root
node. Refer to the "Node Access Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions.
Command:
set nms x
where x = root access index number
2.
Repeat step 1 for each additional Synchrony NMS workstation (up to 16) that is to have
access to this root node.
3.
Verify the root access configuration for eachSynchrony NMS workstation by displaying the
root access parameters for that workstation.
Command:
dsp nms x
4-8
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Procedure 4-7. Configuring Node Access Parameters
Node access parameters control the security and partition configuration for every ST node and are
defined for each partition with access to the node. To configure node access parameters:
1.
Define the node access parameters for the partition. Refer to the "Node Access Configuration"
Command:
set node_list x
where x = partition ID
2.
Verify the node access configuration by displaying the node access parameters.
Command:
dsp node_list x
NOTE:
If this is the first time the IP profiles are being configured, reset the
node using the rst node command to cause the configuration to take
effect.
Procedure 4-8. Configuring Community Profile Parameters
A community profile is a set of parameters that define user access to the management information
base (MIB). The MIB contains five categories of information: security, resource configuration,
resource status, resource statistics, and alarm. Up to five different community entries can be
defined for each partition. Different access privileges (no access, read only, and read/write) can be
assigned on an object group basis for each community entry.
To configure community profile parameters:
1.
Define the community access parameters for each community entry number in the partition.
Refer to the "Node Access Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Command:
set cmnty x:y (when command is issued to a Release 2.0 node)
or
set cmnty_prf x:y (when command is issued to a Release 1.2 or lower node)
where x = partition ID and y = community number
2.
Verify the community access configuration by displaying the community access param
eters.
Command:
dsp cmnty x:y
or
dsp cmnty_prf x:y
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-9
Configuring Alarm and Trap Parameters
Alarm configuration parameters allow up to 32 alarm logs to be defined for tracking alarms. Alarm
logs can be individually accessed by aSynchrony Network Management System (NMS)
workstation or the Craft Person Station (CPS).
Trap messages are generated by an ST node and are sent toSynchrony NMS workstations to
signal changes in alarm status. The trap access parameters govern access to local node trap
information. Refer to Appendix B, "Alarm and Error Messages," for a description of conditions
that correspond to specific alarms.
Procedure 4-9. Configuring the Alarm Log
To configure an alarm log:
1.
Create an alarm log. Refer to the "Alarm and Trap Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony
ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter
descriptions.
Command:
add alm log x
where x = alarm log ID
2.
Define the configuration for the alarm log.
Command:
set alm log x
3.
Verify the configuration for the alarm log by displaying the parameters for that alarm log.
Command:
dsp alm log x
Procedure 4-10. Configuring Trap Access Parameters
Trap access parameters apply only to root nodes. The trap access list designates up to eight
Synchrony NMS workstations to receive trap messages from the root node. Each workstation is
identified by a trap index (1-8). The trap messages originate at the root node, or at a node that
includes the root node on its notification list (see "Alarm Log Parameters" above). To configure
trap access:
1.
Define the trap access parameters for a Synchrony NMS workstation trap subscriber. Refer to
the "Alarm and Trap Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions.
Command:
set trap x
4-10
STCPSUG
7/31/97
where x = index number of NMS workstation trap subscriber
2.
Verify the trap access configuration by displaying the trap access parameters.
Command:
dsp trap x
Configuring CPI and Modem Parameters
The Craft Person Interface (CPI) communications parameters control the connection between the
Craft Person Station (CPS) and the CPI port of the ST node. Qualified personnel use the CPS to
modify node configuration, set and clear loopbacks, and display status. Access to the CPI is denied
without a valid password.
The modem communications parameters identify the characteristics of the remote terminal device
connected to the modem port of the Nodal Control Processor (NCP). The modem port allows
remote access to the ST node and, when running in SLIP mode, is subject to all of the IP access
restrictions.
Procedure 4-11. Configuring CPI Communications Parameters
To configure the CPI communications parameters for the CPI port at a node:
1.
Define the communications parameters for the CPI port. Refer to the "CPI and Modem
Command:
set cpi
2.
Verify the CPI communications configuration by displaying the CPIcommunications
parameters.
Command:
dsp cpi
3.
After configuring the CPI communications parameters, reset the the CPI to cause the
Command:
rst cpi
Procedure 4-12. Configuring Modem Communications Parameters
To configure the communications parameters for the modem interface port at a node:
1.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Define the parameters for the modem port. Refer to the "CPI and Modem Configuration"
4-11
Command:
set mdm
2.
Verify the configuration for the modem port by displaying the modem communications
parameters.
Command:
dsp mdm
3.
After configuring the modem port communications parameters, reset the modem interface
characteristics to cause the parameters to take effect.
Command:
rst mdm
Configuring Clocking Parameters
Clocking configuration defines the clock fallback list and clocking operations of an ST node. The
clock fallback list designates up to eight prioritized clock sources that a node can use for timing. If
one clock source fails, the node switches to the highest priority valid clock source on the list.
Fallback clock selection must be made carefully to avoid improper clocking rings.
NOTE:
Clock mode and priority, master clock list, and clock switch
parameters are configured as part of the system profile parameters
using the set sys command.
Procedure 4-13. Configuring Clocking Parameters
To configure the clocking parameters:
1.
Define the first entry on the clock fallback list. Refer to the "Clocking Configuration" chapter
Command:
set clk fbk x
where x = clock fallback list index number
2.
Repeat step 1 to define each additional clock fallback entry.
3.
Verify the configuration for each clock fallback entry.
Command:
dsp clk fbk x
4.
Verify the configuration for the clock mode and priority
Command:
dsp clk mstr
4-12
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Configuring Channel Profile Parameters
A channel profile is a set of parameters that control the routing of channel connections throughout
the network. Up to 255 channel profiles can be defined for each ST node. Each channel profile is
identified by a profile number which must be unique across the network. A single profile can be
assigned to more than one channel.
Procedure 4-14. Configuring Channel Profile Parameters
To configure channel profile parameters:
1.
Define parameters for the first channel profile. Refer to the "Channel Profile Configuration"
Command:
set ch prf x
where x = channel profile index number
2.
Repeat step 1 for each channel profile
3.
Verify each channel profile configuration
Command:
dsp ch prf x
Configuring Voice Profile Parameters
A voice profile consists of two groups of parameters -network-level and node-level parameters.
The voice profile parameters control the following types of voice connections:
• B-channel voice connections between Private Branch Exchanges (PBXs)
• Point-to-point voice connections that require compression using an Applications Server Module
(ASM)
• Voice connections between a LINK/+ node and an ST node via a LINK Gateway Module
(LGM)
Up to 255 voice profiles can be defined for each ST node. Each voice profile is identified by a
profile number which must be unique across the network. A single profile can be assigned to more
than one voice connection.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-13
Procedure 4-15. Configuring Voice Profile Parameters
To configure voice profile parameters:
1.
Define network level parameters for the first voice profile. Refer to the "Voice Profile
NOTE:
For a specific index entry, the network level voice profile parameter
values should be the same for all nodes in the network.
Command:
set voice prf net x
where x = network level voice profile index entry
2.
Define node level parameters for the first voice profile. Refer to the "Voice Profile
NOTE:
For a specific index entry, the node level voice profile parameter
values can be different for each node in the network.
Command:
set voice prf node x
where x = voice profile index number used in step 1
3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each voice profile
4.
Verify each voice profile configuration
Commands:
dsp voice prf net x
dsp voice prf node x
Configuring Module Parameters
Module configuration defines the operation of the modules in an ST node. Both modules and ports
must pass diagnostic tests to operate in online or standby status. Some module parameters are
basic to all module types, while other parameters are module specific, Table 4-1.
Procedure 4-16. Configuring Module Parameters
To configure the basic parameters for a module in a specified shelf and slot:
1.
4-14
Define the parameters for the module specified. Refer to the "Module Configuration" chapter
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command
set module n:s
where n = the shelf number and s = the slot number in that shelf
2.
Verify the configuration by displaying themodule parameters.
Command:
dsp module n:s
3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each module installed at the node.
To configure the module specific parameters for a module in a specified shelf and slot, refer to
Table 4-1.
Table 4-1. Configuring Specific Module Type- Parameters
To Configure:
4.
Configuration Command
Verification Command
ASM Module specific parameters
set asm module n:s
dsp asm module n:s
DSM Module specific parameters
set dsm module n:s
dsp dsm module n:s
FSM Module specific parameters
set fsm16 module n:s
set fsm64 module n:s
dsp fsm16 module n:s
dsp fsm64 module n:s
LGM Module specific parameters
set lgm module n:s
dsp lgm module n:s
SGM/AG Module specific
parameters
set ag module n:s
dsp ag module n:s
After configuring the module parameters, reset the module to cause the parameters to take
effect.
Command:
rst module n:s
NOTE:
For I/O and server modules, this command activates any
configuration changes made to the module and reloads the module
software from the NCP. In addition, the NCP, SDM, RTM, SGM,
FSM, and DSM Modules also perform a startup self test.
When this command is issued to the online (active) NCP, the node
will be reset. If the active NCP is part of a redundant pair,
redundancy will toggle.
When this command is issued to the offline NCP, redundancy will not
toggle. The offline module will load any configuration changes to its
database and reload the operational software, but will remain the
offline module.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-15
Configuring Synchronous Port Parameters
The Synchronous Data Module (SDM) provides four or eight port interfaces to user devices. The
SDM-8E and SDM-4 Modules also provide interfaces to internodal links (INLs). The synchronous
port parameters define the operation of each of the ports on an SDM Module.
The following basic applications of the SDM are described:
• Data transmission between local and remote synchronous data ports
• Data transmission between synchronous data ports and a remote T1/E1 port
Applications and configuration summaries are shown in Figures 4-1 and 4-2. It is assumed that the
required INLs, channel profiles, and modules have been properly configured.
to SDM Port
To configure connections between synchronous data ports (refer to Figure -41):
1.
Configure the synchronous ports at both ends of each connection. Refer to the "Synchronous
Port Configuration" chapter in the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
where n:s:p = physical port on SDM Module
2.
Verify the configuration for each synchronous port by displaying the synchronous port
parameters.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
3.
For a newly configured port, after configuring the synchronous port parameters, logically
insert the port to cause all of the parameters to take effect.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
If you are reconfiguring an already configured port, reset the port to cause the changed
Command:
rst port n:s:p
4-16
STCPSUG
7/31/97
NODE Y
NODE X
SDM
NODE Y
ST
NETWORK
B
SDM
INLs
INLs
T1M/E1M
T1M/E1M
SDM
A
SUBRATE
DATA
SGM
ST
NETWORK
NODE X
Nx56 kbps
Nx64 kbps
B
T1M/E1M
INLs
INLs
SGM
SDM
T1M/E1M
A
SUBRATE
DATA
Nx56 kbps
Nx64kbps
ONE OR MORE SUBRATE DATA CHANNELS
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
SUBRATE AGGREGATE FORMAT (SAF)
DATA IN NxDS0 CHANNELS
CONFIGURATION SUMMARY
1. CONFIGURE SDM PORTS AT A AND B .
2. CONFIGURE TDM CHANNEL CONNECTIONS A TO B AT NODE X.
3. CONFIGURE TDM CHANNEL CONNECTIONS B TO A AT NODE Y.
NOTE: ROUTING OF CHANNELS BETWEEN A AND B IS DEPENDENT
ON THE CHANNEL PROFILE ASSIGNED TO EACH TDM CHANNEL CONNECTION.
FOR SUBRATE DATA, THE CONNECTIONS THROUGH THE SGM ARE MADE INTERNALLY.
Figure 4-1. Sample Application: Local to Remote Synchronous Port
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-17
NOTE:
4.
The rst port command will temporarily interrupt service on the port if
the port is currently in use. If only nonintrusive parameters have
been changed, the update port command can be used to implement
the new configuration. The update port command does not disrupt
port operations.
Determine the condition of the port by displaying the port status information.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
NOTE:
5.
If the port status is not active, the synchronous channel will not be
connected
Configure reciprocal TDM channel connections between each SDM Module port. Refer to the
"TDM Configuration" chapter in the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Command:
set ch tdm n:s:p
where n:s:p = address of TDM channel associated with the SDM Module port
NOTE:
Routing of channels between local and remote devices is dependent
on the channel profile assigned to each TDM connection.
An SGM module is required to process remote subrate channels.
Connections through the SGM module are made automatically.
6.
Verify each TDM channel configuration by displaying the TDM channel parameters.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
7.
For a newly configured TDM channel, the parameters will take effect upon connection of the
channel. Connect the TDM channel.
Command:
con ch n:s:p
If you are reconfiguring an existing TDM channel, reset the channel to cause the changed
Command:
rst ch n:s:p
NOTE:
8.
The rst ch command will temporarily interrupt service on the port.
Verify the channel connections by displaying the channel status.
Command:
dsp st ch n:s:p
4-18
STCPSUG
7/31/97
to T1M or E1M Port
To configure connections between local synchronous data ports and a remote T1/E1 port(refer to
Figure 4-2):
1.
Configure the synchronous ports on the local SDM Module. Refer to the "Synchronous Port
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
2.
Verify the configuration for each synchronous port by displaying the synchronous port
parameters.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
ST
NETWORK
B
T1M/E1M
INLs
INLs
T1M/E1M
SDM
A
Nx56 kbps
Nx64 kbps
NODE Y
T1M/E1M
NODE X
CHANNEL
BANK
DATA IN NxDS0 CHANNELS
1. CONFIGURE SDM PORTS AT A .
2. CONFIGURE T1/E1 PORT AT B .
3. CONFIGURE T1/E1 BUNDLES AT B .
4. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL CONNECTIONS BETWEEN EACH T1/E1 PORT BUNDLE B
AND THE CORRESPONDING SDM PORT A (i.e., A TO B AND B TO A ).
NOTE: ROUTING OF CHANNELS BETWEEN A AND B IS DEPENDENT
ON THE CHANNEL PROFILE ASSIGNED TO EACH TDM CHANNEL CONNECTION.
Figure 4-2. Sample Application: Local Synchronous Port to Remote T1/E1
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-19
3.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
4.
port operations.
Determine the condition of the port by displaying the port status inf
ormation.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
NOTE:
5.
connected
Configure the T1M or E1M port at the remote node. The bundles defined as part of T1/E1
port configuration should correspond to any channels originating at the synchronous ports that
are to be connected through the T1/E1 port. Refer to the "T1 Port Configuration" chapter or
“E1 Port Configuration” chapter in the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Commands:
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
where n:s:p = physical port on T1M or E1M Module
6.
Verify the configuration of the T1M or E1M port by displaying the port parameters.
Commands:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
7.
For a newly configured T1M or E1M port, after configuring the port parameters, logically
Command:
ins port n:s:p
4-20
STCPSUG
7/31/97
If you are reconfiguring an already configured T1M or E1M port, reset the port to cause the
changed parameters to take effect.
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
8.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
NOTE:
9.
connected
Configure the T1 or E1 bundles at the remote node. Refer to the "Bundle Configuration"
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
where b = bundle on physical port n:s:p of T1M or E1M Module
10. Verify the bundle configuration by displaying the bundle parameters.
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
11. For a newly configured bundle, after configuring the bundle parameters, logically insert the
bundle to cause all of the parameters to take effect.
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
If you are reconfiguring an existing T1M or E1M bundle, reset the bundle to cause the
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
NOTE:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
The rst bdl command will temporarily interrupt service on the port if
been changed, the update bdl command can be used to implement the
new configuration. The update bdl command does not disrupt port
operations.
4-21
12. Determine the status of the bundle by displaying the bundle status information.
Command:
dsp st bdl n:s:p:b
13. Configure reciprocal TDM channel connections between each local synchronous port and
remote bundle. Refer to the "TDM Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Command for SDM Module:
set ch tdm n:s:p
where n:s:p = channel associated with SDM Module port
Command for T1M or E1M Module:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e
where n:s:p:e = channel associated with T1M or E1M Module bundle
NOTE:
Routing of channels between local and remote devices is dependent
on the channel profile assigned to each TDM connection.
14. Verify the TDM channel channel configuration by displaying the channel parameters.
Command for SDM Module:
dspt ch tdm n:s:p
Command for T1M or E1M Module:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
15. For a newly configured TDM channel, the parameters will takeeffect upon connection of the
TDM channel. Connect the TDM channel.
Command:
con ch n:s:p
or
con ch n:s:p:e
Command:
rst ch n:s:p
or
rst ch n:s:p:e
NOTE:
16. Determine the condition of the TDM channel by displaying the channel status information.
Command:
4-22
STCPSUG
7/31/97
dsp st ch n:s:p
or
dsp st ch n:s:p:e
Configuring T1 Port Parameters
The T1 Module (T1M) provides four port interfaces to user devices or internodal links (INLs). The
T1M port parameters define the operation of each of the four ports.
Procedure 4-19. Configuring T1 Port Parameters
To configure parameters for a T1 port:
1.
Define the parameters for the T1 port. Refer to the "T1 Port Configuration" chapter in the
Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for
parameter descriptions.
Command:
set t1m port n:s:p
where n:s:p = physical port on T1M Module
2.
Verify the port configuration by displaying the port parameters.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
3.
For a newly configured port, after configuring the T1 port parameters, logically insert the port
to cause all of the parameters to take effect.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
If you are reconfiguring an already configured port, reset the port to cause all of the
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
4.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-23
Configuring E1 Port Parameters
The E1 Module (E1M) provides two or four port interfaces to user devices or internodal links
(INLs). The E1M port parameters define the operation of each of the four ports.
Procedure 4-20. Configuring E1 Port Parameters
To configure parameters for an E1 port:
1.
Define the parameters for the E1 port. Refer to the "E1 Port Configuration" chapter in the
Command:
set e1m port n:s:p
where n:s:p = physical port on E1M Module
2.
Command:
dsp e1m port n:s:p
3.
For a newly configured port, after configuring the E1 port parameters, logically insert the port
Command:
ins port n:s:p
If you are reconfiguring an already configured port, reset the port to cause all of the
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
4.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
4-24
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Configuring Bundle Parameters
A bundle is a logical grouping of a defined number of DS0s used as an endpoint of an NxDS0
TDM channel. The bundle map defines how the DS0s are grouped.
Procedure 4-21. Configuring Bundle Parameters
To configure bundle parameters for a T1 or E1 port:
1.
Define the T1 or E1 bundle(s). Refer to the "Bundle Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony
descriptions.
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
where b = bundle on physical port n:s:p of T1M or E1M Module.
2.
Verify the bundle configuration by displaying the bundle parameters.
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
3.
For a newly configured bundle, after configuring the bundle parameters, logically insert the
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
If you are reconfiguring an already configured bundle, reset the bundle to cause the changed
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
NOTE:
4.
The rst bdl command will temporarily interrupt service on the
bundle. If only nonintrusive parameters have been changed, the
update bdl command can be used to implement the new
configuration. The update bundle command does not disrupt port
operations.
Determine the condition of the bundle by displaying the bundle status information.
Command:
dsp st bdl n:s:p:b
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-25
Adding a Bundle to a T1 or E1 Port
A bundle may be added to a T1 or E1 port by deleting an existing bundle and/or using unassigned
DS0 timeslots.
Procedure 4-22. Adding a Bundle
To add a bundle to a T1 or E1 port:
1.
If existing bundle assignments are to be used for the new bundle, remove that bundle from the
port.
Command:
rmv bdl n:s:p:b
where b = previously assigned bundle on physical portn:s:p of T1M or E1M.
2.
Set the new bundle map for the T1 or E1 port. This will delete the old bundle and create the
new one.
Command:
set t1m port n:s:p bdl_map
or
set e1m port n:s:p bdl_map
3.
Define the T1 or E1 bundle. Refer to the "Bundle Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony
descriptions.
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
where b = bundle on physical port n:s:p of T1M or E1M Module.
4.
Verify the bundle configuration.
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
5.
Insert the new bundle. This will cause the bundle configuration to take effect.
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
6.
Command:
dsp st bdl n:s:p:b
4-26
STCPSUG
7/31/97
7.
Verify the new bundle map.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p bdl_map
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p bdl_map
Configuring Internodal Link Parameters
T1/E1 internodal links (INLs) are defined as T1/E1 bundles and are connected through a T1
Module (T1M) or an E1 Module (E1M). Synchronous INLs are connected through a Synchronous
Data Module (SDM-8E or SDM-4).
Procedure 4-23. Configuring Internodal Link Parameters
To configure INL parameters:
1.
Define the INL parameters. Refer to the "Internodal Link Configuration" chapter in the
Command:
set inl x
where x= INL number
2.
Verify the INL configuration by displaying the INL parameters.
Command:
dsp inl x
3.
For a newly configured INL, after defining the INL parameters, logically insert the INL to
cause all of the parameters to take effect.
Command:
ins inl x
If you are reconfiguring an already an existing INL, reset the INL to cause the changed
Command:
rst inl x
NOTE:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
The rst inl command will temporarily interrupt service on internodal
link that is currently in use. If only nonintrusive parameters have
been changed, the update inl command can be used to implement the
new configuration. The update inl command does not disrupt port
operations.
4-27
4.
Determine the condition of the INL by displaying the INL status information.
Command:
dsp st inl x
Configuring TDM Channel Parameters
Time division multiplexed (TDM) channels carry constant bit rate data from NxDS0, voice, and
subrate data sources. The TDM channel parameters define the characteristics of TDM channels in
the network.
Procedure 4-24. Configuring TDM Channel Parameters
To configure TDM channel parameters:
1.
Define the TDM channel parameters. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in
the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for
Command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e (for a channel associated with a T1M or E1M Module physical port)
or
set ch tdm n:s:p (for a channel associated with an SDM Module physical port)
or
set ch tdm t:g:p:e (for a channel associated with an element at a server module virtual port)
or
set ch tdm t:g:p (for a channel associated with a server module virtual port)
2.
Verify the TDM channel configuration by displaying the TDM channel parameters.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
or
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
or
dsp ch tdm t:g:p:e
or
dsp ch tdm t:g:p
3.
4-28
For a newly configured TDM channel, the parameters will take effectupon connection of the
TDM channel. Connect the TDM channel.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
con ch n:s:p:e
or
con ch n:s:p
or
con ch tdm t:g:p:e
NOTE:
4.
When connecting a TDM channel between a physical port and a
virtual port, if the channel address at the virtual port end is at the
port level (t:g:p), always issue the connect command to the physical
port end of the channel. For example, when connecting an LGM
datalink between a T1M Module physical port and an LGM Module
virtual port, issue the connect command to the T1M Module port.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:e
or
rst ch n:s:p
or
rst ch tdm t:g:p:e
NOTE:
5.
Verify the channel connections by displaying the channel status.
Command:
dsp st ch n:s:p:e
or
dsp st ch n:s:p
or
dsp st ch tdm t:g:p:e
Configuring Frame Relay Parameters
Frame relay is an industry-standard, packet-multiplexing protocol supported by ST networks. The
ST packet subnetwork provides for efficient handling and transport of frame relay, high-level data
link control (HDLC), or synchronous data link control (SDLC) data. Frame relay employs variable
length frames, using only 2 bytes for header information, and provides users with variable
bandwidth capabilities ideal for bursty traffic.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-29
Point-to-Point Frame Relay and HDLC
Access channels carry frames destined for service. An access channel can originate from T1/E1
ports, synchronous data ports, or server virtual ports (e.g., ASM or SGM/AG). A virtual frame
server port is configured for each access channel and serves as the interface to the ST packet
subnetwork. The PVCs defined correspond to frame relay channels in the ST network. The end
points of a frame relay channel are identified by port and DLCI.
DLCIs have local significance only and can be reused at each frame server port. Figure 4-3
illustrates the configuration of frame relay channels at the frame server ports.
Unlike frame relay support, where multiple frame relay channels can be configured at each port, a
single frame relay channel is configured at each port for each HDLC access channel. Figure 4-4
illustrates the configuration of frame relay channels for a typical HDLC/SDLC application.
Typical point-to-point applications include:
• NxDS0 frame relay using T1M or E1M Modules
• Frame relay using SDM Modules
• Frame relay encapsulation of HDLC/SDLC using SDM Modules
These applications and configuration summaries are shown in Figures 4-5, 4-6, and 4-7. It is
assumed that the required INLs, channel profiles, and modules have been properly configured.
Refer to the "Configuring Internodal Link Parameters," "Configuring Channel Profile Parameters,"
or "Configuring Module Parameters" procedures for details.
The FSM and SGM modules shown in the figures each represent one module from their respective
server redundancy groups. Allocation of FSM resources depends (in part) on the partition
assignment of each FSM port (refer to the "Module Configuration" chapter in the Synchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for details). Although not
shown, an FSM is also required at bypass nodes.
As stated above, an access channel carrying frames destined for the FSM can originate from T1/E1
ports, synchronous data ports, or server virtual ports. For simplicity, the examples that follow
illustrate access channels originating from I/O ports only. If the application requires SGM/AG,
RTM, or ASM service prior to transport across the packet subnetwork, the appropriate server
ports, channels, and TDM connections must be configured to transport the data through the
intermediate server. Refer to the application-specific chapter in the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for additional information.
4-30
STCPSUG
7/31/97
ST
NETWORK
SDM PORT OR
T1/E1 BUNDLE
DLCIX1
DLCIX2
FRAME SERVER Y
VIRTUAL PORT 2
DLCIX1
DLCIX2
SDM PORT OR
T1/E1 BUNDLE
ACCESS CHANNEL
FRAME
RELAY
ACCESS
DEVICE
FRAME SERVER X
VIRTUAL PORT 1
PACKET
SUBNETWORK
ACCESS CHANNEL
DLCIY1
DLCIY2
DLCIY2
DLCIY1
FRAME
RELAY
ACCESS
DEVICE
FRAME RELAY CHANNELS DEFINED AT
FRAME SERVER X VIRTUAL PORT 1
FRAME RELAY CHANNELS DEFINED AT
FRAME SERVER Y VIRTUAL PORT 2
PORT 1, DLCIX1
PORT 2, DLCIY1
PORT 2, DLCIY1
PORT 1, DLCIX1
PORT 1, DLCIX2
PORT 2, DLCIY2
PORT 2, DLCIY2
PORT 1, DLCIX2
Figure 4-3. Frame Relay Support
ST
NETWORK
FRAME RELAY CHANNEL DEFINED AT
FRAME SERVER X VIRTUAL PORT 1
PORT 1, DLCI (1)
PORT 2, DLCI (1)
SDM PORT
HDLC
ACCESS
CHANNEL
FRAME SERVER Y
VIRTUAL PORT 2
HDLC
CPE
SDM PORT
ACCESS
CHANNEL
FRAME SERVER X
VIRTUAL PORT 1
PACKET
SUBNETWORK
HDLC
HDLC
CPE
FRAME RELAY CHANNEL DEFINED AT
FRAME SERVER Y VIRTUAL PORT 2
PORT 2, DLCI (1)
PORT 1, DLCI (1)
Figure 4-4. HDLC/SDLC Support
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-31
Procedure 4-25. Configuring Frame Relay Parameters - T1M or E1M
NxDS0 Connections
NOTE:
B
C
D
T1M/E1M
A
FSM
FRAME
RELAY
ACCESS
DEVICE
ST
PACKET
SUBNETWORK
FSM
Configure T1/E1 ports to provide an interface to the external frame relay devices,Figure 4-5.
Each bundle defined as part of T1/E1 port configuration should correspond to a frame relay
access channel. If the entire T1/E1 constitutes the access channel, a single bundle is
configured.
T1M/E1M
1.
The I/O module (T1M or E1M) and the FSM do not have to be in the
same node. The TDM connections between the synchronous port
carrying the access channel and the frame server virtual port can
span nodes.
FRAME
RELAY
ACCESS
DEVICE
NxDS0 ACCESS CHANNEL(S)
PVC = PORT AT B , DLCIB
PORT AT C , DLCIC
PVC = PORT AT C , DLCIC
PORT AT B , DLCIB
1. CONFIGURE T1/E1 PORTS AT A AND D .
2. DEFINE BUNDLES FOR EACH ACCESS CHANNEL AT THE T1/E1 PORTS.
3. CONFIGURE A FRAME SERVER VIRTUAL PORT AT B AND C FOR EACH ACCESS CHANNEL.
4. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN EACH T1/E1 BUNDLE AND
THE CORRESPONDING FRAME SERVER VIRTUAL PORT (e.g., A TO B AND B TO A ).
5. CONFIGURE A FRAME RELAY CHANNEL FOR EACH REQUIRED PVC AT THE VIRTUAL PORTS
(MORE CONNECTIONS CAN BE DEFINED AT EACH VIRTUAL PORT THAN SHOWN).
NOTE: THE FSM DOES NOT HAVE TO BE IN THE SAME NODE AS THE T1/E1 PORT CARRYING THE ACCESS CHANNEL.
THE TDM CONNECTION BETWEEN A T1/E1 BUNDLE AND FRAME SERVER VIRTUAL PORT CAN SPAN NODES.
Figure 4-5. T1M or E1M NxDS0 Frame Relay
4-32
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Commands:
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
where n:s:p = physical port on T1M or E1M Module
Refer to the "T1 Port Configuration" or "E1 Port Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter
descriptions.
2.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
3.
For a newly configured port, after configuring the T1M or E1M port parameters, logically
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
4.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
5.
Configure the T1 or E1 bundle(s).
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
Refer to the "Bundle Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-33
6.
Verify the bundle configuration by displaying the bundle para
meters.
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
7.
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
If you are reconfiguring an existing bundle, reset the bundle to cause the changed parameters
to take effect.
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
NOTE:
8.
new configuration. The update bundle command does not disrupt
port operations.
Command:
dsp st bdl n:s:p:b
9.
Configure a frame server virtual port for each access channel.
Command:
set fsm port 128:g:p
where 128:g:p = virtual port on FSM Module
See "Frame Server Port Parameters" in the "Packet Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony
descriptions.
10. Verify the port configuration by displaying the port parameters.
Command:
dsp fsm port 128:g:p
NOTE:
The frame server port parameters will take effect upon connection of
the access channel.
11. Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between each T1/E1 bundle and the
corresponding frame server virtual port. This connection is defined to transport the frame
relay data to/from the FSM module.
4-34
STCPSUG
7/31/97
To define the TDM channel connection from the T1/E1 bundle to the frame server virtual
port, use the command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e
where e = channel associated with bundle on physical portn:s:p of T1M or E1M Module
To define the TDM channel connection from the frame server virtual port to the T1/E1
bundle, use the command:
set ch tdm 128:g:p
where 128:g:p = frame server virtual port on FSM Module
Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
12. Verify the TDM channel configuration by displaying the channel parameters.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:b for T1/E1 bundle or dsp ch tdm 128:g:p for frame server virtual port
13. Connect the TDM channels.
Command:
con ch n:s:p:b
NOTE:
The TDM channel parameters will take effect upon connection of the
TDM channel.
14. Configure a frame relay channel for each incoming DLCI at each frame server port.
Command:
set ch fr 128:g:p:e
where 128:g:p = virtual port on FSM Module and e = DLCI.
See "Frame Relay Channel Parameters" in the "Packet Configuration" chapter of the
15. Verify the frame relay channel configuration by displaying the channel parameters.
Command:
dsp ch fr 128:g:p:b
16. For a newly configured frame relay channel, the parameters will take effect upon connection
of the channel. Connect the frame relay channels.
Command:
con ch 128:g:p:e
17. Determine the condition of the frame relay hc annel by displaying the channel status
information.
Command:
dsp st ch 128:g:p:e
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-35
Procedure 4-26. Configuring Frame Relay Parameters - SDM
Connections
NOTES: The I/O module (SDM) and the Frame Server Module (FSM) do not
have to be in the same node (remote FSM). The TDM connections
between the synchronous port carrying the access channel and the
frame server virtual port can span nodes.
For remote subrate services, the TDM connection can span nodes
only if a Subrate Groomer Module (SGM) is located in the same node
as the synchronous port providing the external interface and in the
same node as the FSM providing remote service. SGM connections
are made automatically.
SGM Modules are not required for local subrate connections.
1.
Configure synchronous data ports to provide an interface to the external frame relay devices,
Figure 4-6. Each SDM synchronous data port corresponds to a frame relay access channel.
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
Refer to the "Synchronous Port Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
2.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
3.
For a newly configured port, after configuring the port parameters, logically insert the port to
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
4-36
been changed, the update port n:s:p command can be used to
implement the new configuration. The update port command does not
disrupt port operations.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
FSM
C
D
SDM
B
FSM
A
SDM
FRAME
RELAY
ACCESS
DEVICE
ST
PACKET
SUBNETWORK
FRAME
RELAY
ACCESS
DEVICE
A. SUPERRATE
C
D
SDM
B
FSM
A
SDM
FRAME
RELAY
ACCESS
DEVICE
ST
PACKET
SUBNETWORK
SUBRATE
FRAME RELAY
FSM
SUBRATE
FRAME RELAY
FRAME
RELAY
ACCESS
DEVICE
B. SUBRATE WITH COLLOCATED (LOCAL) FSM
SUBRATE CHANNEL
NxDS0 ACCESS CHANNEL(S)
PORT AT C , DLCIC
PORT AT B , DLCIB
1. CONFIGURE SDM PORTS AT A AND D .
3. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN EACH SDM PORT AND
NOTE: THE FSM DOES NOT HAVE TO BE IN THE SAME NODE AS THE SDM PORT CARRYING THE
ACCESS CHANNEL. THE TDM CONNECTION BETWEEN AN SDM PORT AND FRAME SERVER
VIRTUAL PORT CAN SPAN NODES.
Figure 4-6. SDM Frame Relay (Sheet 1 of 2)
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-37
C
D
SDM
FSM
B
NODE Z
FRAME
RELAY
ACCESS
DEVICE
SGM
SGM
INL
ST
PACKET
SUBNETWORK
SUBRATE
FRAME RELAY
FSM
NODE Y
T1M/E1M
A
SDM
FRAME
RELAY
ACCESS
DEVICE
NODE X
T1M/E1M
SUBRATE
FRAME RELAY
C. SUBRATE WITH REMOTE FSM
SUBRATE CHANNEL
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
SUBRATE AGGREGATE FORMAT (SAF)
PORT AT C , DLCIC
PORT AT B , DLCIB
1. CONFIGURE SDM PORTS AT A AND D .
3. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN EACH SDM PORT AND
NOTE: FOR REMOTE SERVICES, AN SGM IS REQUIRED AT NODE X AND NODE Y. CONNECTIONS
THROUGH THE SGMs ARE AUTOMATIC, NOT USER SPECIFIED.
Figure 4-6. SDM Frame Relay (Sheet 2)
4-38
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
5.
Configure a frame server virtual port for each access channel.
Command:
descriptions.
6.
Command:
NOTE:
7.
the access channel.
Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between each synchronous data port and the
relay data to/from the FSM Module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in
To define the connection from the synchronous data port to the frame server virtual port, use
the command:
set ch tdm n:s:p
To define the connection from the frame server virtual port to the synchronous data port use
the command:
set ch tdm 128:g:p:e
where 128:g:p = frame server virtual port on FSM Module and e = TDM bundle
8.
Verify the TDM channel configuration by displaying the channel parameters.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p for SDM port or dsp ch tdm 128:g:p for frame server virtual port.
9.
Connect the TDM channels.
Command:
con ch n:s:p
NOTE:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
TDM channel.
4-39
10. Configure a frame relay channel for each incoming DLCI at each frame server port.
Command:
set ch fr 128:g:p:e
where 128:g:p = virtual port on FSM Module and e = DLCI
Command:
dsp ch fr 128:g:p:e
12. Connect the frame relay channels.
Command:
con ch 128:g:p:e
NOTE:
The frame relay channel parameters will take effect upon connection
of the frame relay channel.
Procedure 4-27. Configuring Frame Relay Parameters - SDM
Encapsulation of HDLC/SDLC
NOTE:
1.
For subrate HDLC/SDLC connections, the TDM connection can span
nodes only if a Subrate Groomer Module (SGM) is located in the
same node as the synchronous port providing the external interface,
and in the same node as the FSM providing remote service. SGM
connections are performed automatically by the ST-1000 or ST-20.
SGM Modules are not required for local subrate connections.
Configure synchronous data ports to provide an interface to HDLC/SDLC devices(either
subrate or superrate), Figure 4-7.
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
2.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
4-40
STCPSUG
7/31/97
C
D
SDM
B
FSM
A
FSM
HDLC
CPE
SDM
ST
PACKET
SUBNETWORK
HDLC
CPE
NxDS0 ACCESS CHANNEL
PVC = PORT AT B , DLCI (1)
AND
PORT AT C , DLCI (1)
PORT AT C , DLCI (1)
PORT AT B , DLCI (1)
1. CONFIGURE SYNCHRONOUS PORTS AT A AND
D FOR EACH HDLC ACCESS CHANNEL.
3. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN EACH SYNCHRONOUS PORT AND
4. CONFIGURE A SINGLE FRAME RELAY CHANNEL AT EACH VIRTUAL PORT (USE DLCI=1 FOR HDLC TRAFFIC).
NOTE: THE FSM DOES NOT HAVE TO BE IN THE SAME NODE AS THE SYNCHRONOUS PORT CARRYING THE
ACCESS CHANNEL. THE TDM CONNECTION BETWEEN A SYNCHRONOUS PORT AND FRAME SERVER
VIRTUAL PORT CAN SPAN NODES.
FOR SUBRATE ACCESS CHANNELS, HOWEVER, THE TDM CONNECTION CAN SPAN NODES ONLY IF AN SGM
IS LOCATED IN THE SAME NODE AS THE SYNCHRONOUS PORT PROVIDING THE EXTERNAL INTERFACE,
AND IN THE SAME NODE AS THE FSM PROVIDING REMOTE SERVICE.
Figure 4-7. SDM HDLC/SDLC Configuration
3.
Command;
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-41
NOTE:
4.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
5.
Configure a frame server virtual port for each HDLC access channel.
Command:
descriptions.
6.
Command:
NOTE:
7.
the access channel.
Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between each synchronous port and the
corresponding frame server virtual port. This connection is defined to transport the HDLC
data to/from the FSM Module.
To define the connection from the synchronous data port to the frame server virtual portuse
the command:
set ch tdm n:s:p
the command:
set ch tdm 128:g:p
Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
8.
Verify the TDM channel configuration by displaying the channel parameters.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p for SDM port or dsp ch tdm 128:g:p for frame server virtual port
4-42
STCPSUG
7/31/97
9.
channel. Connect the TDM channels.
Command:
con ch n:s:p
Command:
rst ch n:s:p
NOTE:
The rst ch command will temporarily interrupt sevice on the port.
10. Configure a single frame relay channel at each virtual port.The DLCI must be specified as 1
for HDLC/SDLC.
Command:
set ch fr 128:g:p:e
where 128:g:p = virtual port on FSM Module and e = 1
Command:
dsp ch fr 128:g:p:1
12. Connect the frame relay channels.
Command:
con ch 128:g:p:1
NOTE:
The frame relay channel parameters will take effect upon connection
of the frame relay channel.
Configuring Trunk Group Parameters
Trunk Group configuration assumes that the required internodal links, channel profiles, and
modules have been properly configured. Refer to the "Configuring Internodal Link Parameters",
"Configuring Channel Profile Parameters", or "Configuring Module Parameters" procedures for
details.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-43
ASM Voice Channels
Each of the ASM and SGM modules shown in Figures 4-8 to 4-12 represents one module from its
respective server redundancy group. Allocation of ASM resources depends (in part) on the
partition assignment of each ASM data processing engine (refer to the "Module Configuration"
Manual for details).
Procedure 4-28. Configuring Trunk Group Parameters - PBX to PBX at
Different Nodes
To configure trunk groups between digital PBXs at different nodes (Figure 4-8):
1.
At both nodes, configure the T1/E1 ports to provide an interface to the digital PBXs. Each
bundle defined as part of T1/E1 port configuration corresponds to a single PCM DS0 to be
compressed. Refer to the "T1 Port Configuration" or "E1 Port Configuration" chapter in the
Command:
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
where n:s:p = port on T1M or E1M Module associated with PBX trunk
2.
Verify the configuration of each T1M or E1M port by displaying the port parameters.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
3.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
4-44
STCPSUG
7/31/97
T1/E1
PCM DS0s
T1/E1
PCM DS0s
INL
SGM
SGM
ASM VOICE TRUNK GROUP
ASM
C
B
ASM
PBX
ST
NETWORK
D
T1M/E1M
INL
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
T1M/E1M
PBX
A
NODE 2
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
NODE 1
ONE OR MORE PCM DS0s
1. CONFIGURE T1/E1 PORTS AT A AND D .
COMPRESSED VOICE CHANNELS IN
SUBRATE AGGREGATE FORMAT
2. DEFINE BUNDLES FOR EACH PCM DS0 AT T1/E1 PORTS AT A AND D .
3. CONFIGURE ASM VOICE TRUNK GROUPS AT B AND C .
4. CONFIGURE TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS FROM EACH PCM DS0 TO
ASSOCIATED ASM VOICE TRUNK GROUP (e.g., A TO B ) .
Figure 4-8. PBX to PBX Trunk Group Configuration (Different Nodes)
NOTE:
4.
Determine the status of the port by displaying the port status information.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
5.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
At both nodes, configure the DS0 PCM bundles. Refer to the "Bundle Configuration" chapter
4-45
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
6.
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
7.
For newly configured bundles, after configuring the bundle parameters, logically insert the
Command
ins bdl n:s:p:b
to take effect.
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
NOTE:
8.
port operations.
At both nodes, configure the trunk group. See "ASM Voice Trunk Group Parameters" in the
"Trunk Group Configuration" chapter of the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
NOTE:
An SGM must always be located in the same node as an ASM that
provides compression/decompression service.
Command:
set voice trunk 180:g:p
where 180:g:p = virtual port on ASM Module associated with this trunk group
9.
Verify trunk group configuration by displaying trunk group parameters.
Command:
dsp voice trunk 180:g:p
10. At both nodes, configure the TDM channel definitions from the PCM DS0s to the associated
ASM voice trunk group. These connections are defined to transport the PCM DS0s to the
ASM module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter
descriptions.
4-46
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:b
where n:s:p:b = PCM DS0 (bundle)
11. Verify each TDM channel configuration by displaying the TDM channel parameters.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:b
NOTE:
When bandwidth contention is used (as in trunk groups), a channel
connection request is initiated by an off-hook condition at the calling
phone. If a DS0 is available, the channel will automatically be
connected and the TDM channel parameters will take effect.
12. While the voice channel is connected, confirm that voice port is operating normally with the
new configuration.
Command:
dsp st voice port n:s:p:b
where b = bundle at T1M or E1M port n:s:p associated with ASM Module virtual port
at Different Nodes
To configure trunk groups between a digital PBX at the source node and an AD-10 at the
destination node (refer to Figure 4-9):
1.
At node 1, configure the T1/E1 port to provide an interface to the digital PBX. Each bundle
defined as part of T1/E1 port configuration corresponds to a single PCM DS0 to be
compressed. Refer to the "T1 Port Configuration" or "E1 Port Configuration" chapter in the
Command:
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
2.
Verify the T1M or E1M port configuration by displaying the port parameters.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-47
AD-10
AGGREGATE
T1/E1
PCM DS0s
ST
NETWORK
E AD-10
C
SGM
SGM/AG
B
ASM
SDM
INL
INL
D
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
T1M/E1M
PBX
A
NODE 2
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
NODE 1
AD-10 TRUNK GROUP
1. CONFIGURE T1/E1 PORT AT A .
COMPRESSED VOICE CHANNELS
IN AD-10 AGGREGATE FORMAT
2. CONFIGURE DS0 PCM BUNDLES AT A .
3. CONFIGURE ASM VOICE TRUNK GROUP B .
4. CONFIGURE TDM CHANNELS FROM DS0 PCMs A TO
ASSOCIATED ASM VOICE TRUNK GROUP B .
5. CONFIGURE SDM PORT AT D .
6. CONFIGURE SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT C AND CORRESPONDING AD-10 NETWORK PORT E .
7. CONFIGURE TDM CHANNELS FROM SDM PORT D TO SGM/AG PORT C .
8. CONFIGURE SGM/AG VOICE PORT C AND AD-10 VOICE PORT E .
9. CONFIGURE AD-10 TRUNK GROUP AT C .
10. CONFIGURE SUBRATE TDM CHANNELS FROM SGM/AG VOICE PORTS TO
CORRESPONDING AD-10 TRUNK GROUP C .
Figure 4-9. PBX to AD-10 Trunk Group Configuration (Different Nodes)
4-48
STCPSUG
7/31/97
3.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
If you are reconfiguring an existing T1M or E1M port, reset the port to cause all of the
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
4.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
5.
At node 1, configure the DS0 PCM bundles. Refer to the "Bundle Configuration" chapter in
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
where b = bundle on physical port n:s:p of T1m or E1M Module
6.
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
7.
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
to take effect.
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-49
NOTE:
8.
port operations.
At node 1, configure the ASM voice trunk group. See the “ASM Voice Trunk Group
Parameters” in the "Trunk Group Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
NOTE:
An SGM must always be located in the same node as an ASM that
provides compression/decompression service.
Command:
9.
Verify the trunk group configuration by displaying trunk group parameters.
Command:
10. At node 1, configure the TDM channels from the DS0 PCMs to the associated ASM voice
trunk group. This connection is defined to transport the PCM DS0s to the ASM module.
Command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:b
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:b
NOTE:
12. At node 2, configure the SDM port to provide an interface to the AD-10 access device. Refer
to the "Synchronous Port Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
where n:s:p = port on SDM Module associated with AD-10 aggregate
4-50
STCPSUG
7/31/97
13. Verify the SDM port configuration by displaying the port parameters.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
14. For a newly configured port, after configuring the synchronous port parameters, logically
Command:
ins port n:s:p
If you are reconfiguring an existing SDM port, reset the port to cause the changed parameters
to take effect.
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
port operations.
15. Determing the condition of the port by displaying the port status information.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
16. At node 2, configure the SGM/AG virtual port and corresponding AD-10 networkport for the
AD-10 aggregate. Refer to the "AD-10 Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for SGM/AG virtual port
parameter descriptions. Also, see theSynchrony AD-10 User’s Guide for information on
configuring the AD-10 network port.
Command:
set ag port 129:g:p
where 129:g:p = virtual port on SGM Module associated with AD-10 access device
17. Verify the SGM/AG virtual port configuration by displaying the parameters.
Command:
dsp ag port 129:g:p
NOTE:
The SGM/AG virtual port parameters will take effect upon connection
of the TDM channel.
18. At node 2, configure reciprocal TDM channels between the SGM/AG virtual port and the
SDM port. This connection is defined to transport the AD-10 aggregate between the SDM
Module and the SGM Module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in the
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-51
Commands:
set ch tdm n:s:p
set ch tdm 129:g:p
where n:s:p = SDM Module port connected to AD-10 and129:g:p = associated SGM
Module virtual port
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
dsp ch tdm 129:g:p
Command:
con ch n:s:p
NOTES: The TDM channel parameters will take effect upon connection of the
TDM channel.
The con ch command is issued to the physical port end of the channel
connection.
21. At node 2, configure the SGM/AG and AD-10 voice ports. Referto the "AD-10
Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions on SGM/AG voice ports. Also,
see the Synchrony AD-10 User’s Guide for information on configuring AD-10 voice ports.
Commands:
set ag voice 129:g:p:e
set ad10 voice 129:g:p:e
where 129:g:p = virtual port on SGM Module and e = network element assigned to the voice
port
22. Verify the SGM/AG and AD-10 voice port configuration by displaying the parameters.
Commands:
dsp ag voice 129:g:p:e
dsp ad10 voice 129:g:p:e
23. At node 2, configure the AD-10 trunk group. See "AD-10 Trunk Group Parameters" in the
Command:
set ag trunk 181:g:p
where 181:g:p = virtual port on SGM Module associated with this trunk group
4-52
STCPSUG
7/31/97
24. Verify trunk group configuration by displaying AD-10 trunk group parameters.
Command:
dsp ag trunk 181:g:p
25. At node 2, configure the subrate TDM channels from the SGM/AG voice ports to the
associated AD-10 trunk group. This connection is defined to transport the AD-10 voice to the
AD-10 trunk group. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter
descriptions.
Command:
where 129:g:p:e = subrate TDM channel associated with the SGM/AG voice port
Command:
dsp ch tdm 129:g:p:e
NOTE:
phone. If an AD-10 voice channel is available, the channel will
automatically be connected and the TDM channel parameters will
take effect.
27. At node 1, while the voice channel is connected, confirm that voice port is operating normally
with the new configuration.
Command:
dsp st ch n:s:p:b
where b = bundle at T1M or E1M port n:s:p associated with the ASM Module virtual port
at Different Nodes
To configure trunk groups between AD-10s at different nodes (refer to Figure 4-10):
1.
At both nodes, configure the SDM port to provide an interface to the AD-10 access device.
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-53
AD-10
AGGREGATE
AD-10
AGGREGATE
NODE 2
ST
NETWORK
SGM/AG
C
AD-10 TRUNK GROUP
1. CONFIGURE SDM PORTS AT B AND E .
2. CONFIGURE SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORTS AT C AND D , AND
CORRESPONDING AD-10 NETWORK PORTS AT A AND F .
SDM
INL
INL
E
F
AD-10
D
SGM/AG
A
SDM
AD-10
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
B
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
NODE 1
AD-10 TRUNK GROUP
3. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNELS BETWEEN B AND C , AND BETWEEN D AND E .
4. CONFIGURE SGM/AG VOICE PORTS AT C AND D , AND AD-10 VOICE PORTS AT A AND F .
5. CONFIGURE AD-10 TRUNK GROUPS AT C AND D .
CORRESPONDING AD-10 TRUNK GROUPS AT C AND D .
Figure 4-10. AD-10 to AD-10 Trunk Group Configuration (Different Nodes)
2.
Verify each SDM port configuration by displaying the port parameters.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
3.
For a newly configured port, after configuring the synchronous port parameters, logicall insert
the port to cause all of the port parameters to take effect.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
to take effect.
4-54
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
4.
port operations.
Determing the condition of the port by displaying the port status information.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
5.
At both nodes, configure the SGM/AG virtual port and corresponding AD-10 network port
for the AD-10 aggregate. Refer to the "AD-10 Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter
descriptions.
Command:
set ag port 129:g:p
where 129:g:p = virtual port on SGM Module associated with AD-10 Access Device
NOTE:
6.
Refer to the AD-10 User’s Guide for information on configuring the
AD-10 network port.
Verify each SGM/AG virtual port configuration by displaying the parameters.
Command:
dsp ag port 129:g:p
NOTE:
7.
of the TDM channel.
At each node, configure reciprocal TDM channels between the SGM/AG virtual port and the
SDM port. This connection is defined to transport the AD-10 aggregate between the SDM
Module and the SGM Module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in the
Commands:
set ch tdm n:s:p
set ch tdm 129:g:p
Module virtual port
8.
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
dsp ch tdm 129:g:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-55
9.
Command:
con ch n:s:p
TDM channel.
connection.
10. At both nodes, configure the SGM/AG and AD-10 voice ports. Refer to the "AD-10
Commands:
port
Commands:
12. At both nodes, configure the AD-10 trunk groups. See "AD-10 Trunk Group Parameters" in
the "Trunk Group Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Command:
where 181:g:p = virtual port on SGM Module associated with trunk group
Command:
14. At both nodes, configure the subrate TDM channels from the SGM/AG voice ports to the
associated AD-10 trunk group. This connection is defined to transport the AD-10 voice to the
AD-10 trunk group. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter
descriptions.
Command:
where 129:g:p:e = subrate TDM channel associated with the SGM/AG voice port
4-56
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
NOTE:
take effect.
at Same Node
To configure trunk groups between a digital PBX and an AD-10 at the same node (refer to Figure
4-11):
1.
At the T1M or E1M, configure the T1/E1 port to provide an interface to the digital PBX.
Each bundle defined as part of T1/E1 port configuration corresponds to a single PCM DS0 to
be compressed. Refer to the "T1 Port Configuration" or "E1 Port Configuration" chapter in
Command:
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
2.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
3.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
If you are reconfiguring an existing T1M or E1M port, reset the port to cause all of the
Command:
rst port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-57
AD-10
AGGREGATE
T1/E1
PCM DS0s
SDM
C
ASM VOICE TRUNK
GROUP
E AD-10
SGM/AG
T1M/E1M
D
B
ASM
PBX
A
AD-10 TRUNK
GROUP
1. CONFIGURE T1/E1 PORT AT A .
2. CONFIGURE DS0 PCM BUNDLES AT A .
3. CONFIGURE ASM VOICE TRUNK GROUP B .
4. CONFIGURE TDM CHANNELS FROM THE DS0 PCMs TO ASSOCIATED ASM VOICE TRUNK GROUP B .
6. CONFIGURE SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT C AND THE CORRESPONDING AD-10 NETWORK PORT E .
7. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNELS BETWEEN SDM PORT D AND SGM/AG PORT C .
8. CONFIGURE SGM/AG VOICE PORT C AND AD-10 VOICE PORT E .
9. CONFIGURE AD-10 TRUNK GROUP C .
CORRESPONDING AD-10 TRUNK GROUP C .
Figure 4-11. PBX to AD-10 Trunk Group Configuration (Same Node)
4-58
STCPSUG
7/31/97
NOTE:
4.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
5.
At the T1M or E1M, configure the DS0 PCM bundles. Refer to the "Bundle Configuration"
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
6.
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
7.
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
to take effect.
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
NOTE:
8.
port operations.
Configure the ASM voice trunk group. See "ASM Voice Trunk Group Parameters" in the
Command:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-59
9.
Verify the trunk group configuration by displaying trunk group parameters.
Command:
10. At the T1M or E1M port, configure the TDM channels from the DS0 PCMs to the associated
ASM voice trunk group. This connection is defined to transport the PCM DS0s to the ASM
Module. Refer to the “TDM Channel Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions.
Command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:b
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:b
NOTE:
12. At the SDM, configure the SDM port to providean interface to the AD-10 access device.
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
13. Verify the SDM port configuration by displaying the port parameters.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
14. For a newly configured port, after configuring the synchronous port parameters, logically
Command:
ins port n:s:p
to take effect.
Command:
rst port n:s:p
4-60
STCPSUG
7/31/97
NOTE:
port operations.
15. Determing the condition of the port by displaying the port status information.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
16. At the SGM/AG, configure the virtual port and corresponding AD-10 network port for the
AD-10 aggregate. Refer to the "AD-10 Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions.
Also, see the Synchrony AD-10 User’s Guide for information on configuring the AD-10
network port.
Command:
set ag port 129:g:p
Commands:
dsp ag port 129:g:p
NOTE:
of the TDM channel.
18. Configure reciprocal TDM channels between the SGM/AG virtual port and the SDM port.
This connection is defined to transport the AD-10 aggregate between the SDM Module and
the SGM Module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter
descriptions.
Commands:
set ch tdm n:s:p
set ch tdm 129:g:p
Module virtual port
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
dsp ch tdm 129:g:p
Command:
con ch n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-61
TDM channel.
connection.
21. At the SGM/AG, configure the SGM/AG and AD-10 voice ports. Refer to the "AD-10
Commands:
port
Commands:
23. Configure the AD-10 trunk group. See "AD-10 Trunk Group Parameters" in the "Trunk
Group Configuration" chapter of the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Command:
where 181:g:p = virtual port on SGM Module associated with this trunk group
24. Verify the AD-10 trunk group configuration by displaying AD-10 trunk group parameters.
Command:
25. Configure the subrate TDM channels from the SGM/AG voice ports to the associated AD-10
trunk group. This connection is defined to transport the AD-10 voice to the AD-10 trunk
group. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration " chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter decriptions.
Command:
where 129:g:p:e = subrate TDM channel associated with SGM/AG voice port
Command:
4-62
STCPSUG
7/31/97
NOTE:
take effect.
27. While the voice channel is connected, confirm that voice port is operating normally with the
new configuration.
Command:
dsp st voice port n:s:p:b
where b = bundle at T1M or E1M port n:s:p associated with the ASM Module virtual port
at Same Node
To configure trunk groups between AD-10s at the same node (refer to Figure 4-12):
1.
At the SDM(s), configure both SDM ports to provide an interface to the AD-10 access
devices. Refer to the "Synchronous Port Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter
descriptions.
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
2.
Verify the SDM port configuration by displaying the port parameters.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
3.
For a newly configured port, after configuring the synchronous port parameters, logicall insert
the port to cause all of the port parameters to take effect.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
to take effect.
Command:
rst port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-63
AD-10
AGGREGATE
AD-10
AGGREGATE
E
B
AD-10
F
SDM
A
AD-10
D
C
SGM/AG
AD-10 TRUNK
GROUP
AD-10 TRUNK
GROUP
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN AD-10
AGGREGATE FORMAT
1. CONFIGURE SDM PORTS AT B AND E .
2. CONFIGURE SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORTS AT C AND D AND CORRESPONDING AD-10
NETWORK PORTS AT A AND F .
3. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNELS BETWEEN B AND C , AND BETWEEN D AND E .
4. CONFIGURE SGM/AG VOICE PORTS AT C AND D AND CORRESPONDING AD-10
VOICE PORTS AT A AND F .
5. CONFIGURE AD-10 TRUNK GROUPS AT C AND D .
CORRESPONDING AD-10 TRUNK GROUPS AT C AND D .
Figure 4-12. AD-10 to AD-10 Trunk Group Configuration (Same Node)
NOTE:
4.
port operations.
Determing the condition of the port by displaying the port status information.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
4-64
STCPSUG
7/31/97
5.
At the SGM/AG Modules, configure both SGM/AG virtual ports and corresponding AD-10
network ports for the AD-10 aggregate. Refer to the "AD-10 Configuration" chapter in the
Command:
set ag port 129:g:p
where 129:g:p = virtual port on SGM Module associated with AD-10 Access Device
6.
Verify the SGM/AG virtual port configuration by displaying the parameters.
Command:
dsp ag port 129:g:p
NOTE:
7.
of the TDM channel.
For both trunk groups, configure reciprocal TDM channels between the SGM/AG virtual port
and the SDM port. This connection is defined to transport the AD-10 aggregate between the
SDM Module and the SGM Module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in
Commands:
set ch tdm n:s:p
set ch tdm 129:g:p
Module virtual port
8.
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
dsp ch tdm 129:g:p
9.
Command:
con ch n:s:p
TDM channel.
connection.
10. At the SGM/AG, configure both pairs of SGM/AG and AD-10 voice ports. Refer to the "AD10 Configuration" chapter in the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions on SGM/AG voice ports. See the
Synchrony AD-10 User's Guide for information on configuring AD-10 voice ports.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-65
Commands:
port
12. Configure both AD-10 trunk groups. See "AD-10 Trunk Group Parameters" in the "Trunk
Group Configuration" chapter of the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Command:
where 181:g:p = virtual port on SGM Module associated with trunk group
Command:
14. At the SGM/AG Modules, configure subrate TDM channels from the SGM/AG voice ports to
the associated AD-10 trunk groups. This connection is defined to transport the AD-10 voice
to the AD-10 trunk group. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in the
Command:
where 129:g:p:e = subrate TDM channel associated with SGM/AG voice port
15. Verify the TDM channel configuration by displaying the TDM channel parameters.
Command:
NOTE:
4-66
take effect.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Configuring X.50 Parameters
Individual applications and configuration summaries are shown in Figures 4-13, 4-14, and 4-15. It
is assumed that the required INLs, channel profiles, and modules have been properly configured.
Refer to the "Configuring Internodal Link Parameters", "Configuring Channel Profile Parameters",
or "Configuring Module Parameters" procedures for details.
Each of the ASM and SGM modules shown in the figures represent one module from its respective
server redundancy group. Allocation of ASM resources depends (in part) on the partition
assignment of each ASM data processing engine (DPE). Refer to the "Module Configuration"
Manual for details.
NOTE:
The X.50 aggregate framing bit (F-bit) does not have to come in on
any particular bit position. Byte alignment is not required.
Procedure 4-33. Configuring X.50 Parameters - Connections Between
X.50 Networks
To configure connections between X.50 networks (refer to Figure 4-13):
1.
Configure T1 or E1 port to provide an interface to the external X.50 networks. The bundles
defined as part of T1/E1 port configuration should correspond to the X.50 aggregates to be
carried on each T1/E1 link. Alternately, the external interfaces can be provided by 64-kbps
SDM ports. Refer to the "T1 Port Configuration," "E1 Port Configuration," or "Synchronous
Port Configuration" chapter of the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Command:
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
or
set sdm port n:s:p
where n:s:p = port on T1M, E1M, or SDM Module associated with X.50 network
2.
Verify the configuration of the T1M, E1M, or SDM port by displaying the port parameters.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
or
dsp sdm port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-67
X.50 AGGREGATES
(DS0s)
INL
INL
ST
NETWORK
DD
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
X.50
NETWORK
C
SGM
ASM
SGM
B
ASM
X.50
NETWORK
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
A
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
X.50 AGGREGATES
(DS0s)
ONE OR MORE X.50 AGGREGATES
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
1. CONFIGURE T1M, E1M, OR SDM PORTS AT A AND D .
2. FOR T1/E1 PORTS, DEFINE BUNDLES FOR EACH X.50 AGGREGATE.
3. CONFIGURE X.50 VIRTUAL PORTS AT B AND C FOR EACH X.50 AGGREGATE.
4. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN EACH T1M/E1M BUNDLE OR
SDM PORT AND THE CORRESPONDING X.50 VIRTUAL PORT (e.g., A TO B AND B TO A ).
5. CONFIGURE AN X.50 CIRCUIT FOR EACH SUBRATE CHANNEL TO DEFINE THE COMPONENTS OF
THE X.50 AGGREGATE AT EACH X.50 VIRTUAL PORT.
6. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN SOURCE AND DESTINATION
X.50 CIRCUITS (i.e., B TO C AND C TO B ).
NOTE: THE ASM DOES NOT HAVE TO BE IN THE SAME NODE AS THE T1M, E1M, OR SDM PORT
CARRYING THE X.50 AGGREGATES. THE TDM CONNECTION BETWEEN AN X.50 AGGREGATE
I/O PORT AND X.50 VIRTUAL PORT CAN SPAN NODES.
Figure 4-13. X.50 Network to X.50 Network
4-68
STCPSUG
7/31/97
3.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
If you are reconfiguring an already configured T1M, E1M, or SDM port, reset the port to
cause the changed parameters to take effect.
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
4.
port operations.
Determine the condition of the port by displaying th
e port status information.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
5.
If a T1 or E1 port is used, configure the bundles carrying the X.50 aggregates. Refer to the
"Bundle Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
where b = bundle on physical port n:s:p of the T1M or E1M Module
6.
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
7.
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
to take effect.
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-69
NOTE:
8.
the port is currently in used. If only nonintrusive parameters have
port operations.
Configure an X.50 virtual port for each X.50 aggregate. See "X.50 Port Parameters" in the
"X.50 Configuration" chapter of the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Command:
set x50 port 130:g:p
where 130:g:p = virtual port on ASM Module associated with X.50 aggregate
9.
Verify the X.50 port configuration by displaying the X.50 port parameters
Command:
dsp x.50 port 130:g:p
NOTE:
The X.50 virtual port parameters will take effect upon connection of
the TDM channel.
10. Configure reciprocal TDM channel connections between each bundle (or SDM port if
synchronous ports provide the external interface) and the corresponding X.50 virtual ports.
This connection is defined to transport the X.50 aggregates to/from the ASM module. Refer to
the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
NOTE:
The I/O module and the ASM do not have to be in the same node. The
TDM connections between the T1/E1 bundle (or 64-kbps synchronous
port) carrying the X.50 aggregates and the X.50 virtual port can
span nodes. However, an SGM must be in the same node as the ASM.
To define the connection from the T1M or E1M bundle (or SDM port) to the X.50 virtual
set ch tdm n:s:p:e
where n:s:p:e = channel associated with bundle on TIM or EIM port
or
set ch tdm n:s:p
where n:s:p = SDM Module port
To define the connection from the X.50 virtual port to the T1M or E1M bundle (or SDM
Module synchronous data port) use the command:
set ch tdm 130:g:p
where 130:g:p = X.50 virtual port
4-70
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
or
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
or
dsp ch tdm 130:g:p
12. For a newly configured TDM channel, the parameters will take effect upon connection of the
Command:
con ch n:s:p:e (for T1M or E1M Module)
or
con ch n:s:p (for SDM Module)
NOTE:
The con ch command is issued to the physical port end of a channel
connection.
If you are reconfiguring an existing TDM channel, reset the TDM channel to cause the
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:e
or
rst ch n:s:p
NOTE:
The rst ch command causes the channel to first be disconnected (if
previously connected) and then connected. Upon connection, the new
configuration will take effect. The rst ch command is issued to the
physical port end of a channel connection. Issuing this command to
the virtual port end will cause the channel to disconnect (if
previously connected), but not connect.
13. Configure an X.50 circuit for each subrate channel in the X.50 aggregates. The X.50 circuit
parameters provide the information required for the ASM to multiplex/demultiplex the X.50
aggregates. See "X.50 Circuit Parameters" in the "X.50 Configuration" chapter of the
Command:
set X50 ckt 130:g:p:e
where e = X.50 subrate channel associated with virtual port 130:g:p on ASM Module
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-71
14. Verify X.50 circuit configuration by displaying X.50 circuit parameters.
Command:
dsp X.50 ckt 130:g:p:e
15. For a newly configured X.50 circuit, after configuring the circuit, logically insert the X.50
circuit to cause all of the parameters to take effect.
Command:
ins x50 ckt 130:g:p:e
If you are reconfiguring an existing X.50 circuit, reset the circuit to cause the changed
Command:
rst x50 ckt 130:g:p:e
NOTE:
The rst x50 ckt command will temporarily interrupt service on the
X.50 channel.
16. Configure reciprocal TDM channel connections between the local and remote X.50 circuits.
Channel routing across the network depends (in part) on the channel profile assignment of
these TDM connections. The connections through the SGMs and INLs are made internally.
Refer to the “TDM Channel Configuration” chapter of the SynchronyST-1000/ST-20
Command:
where 130:g:p:e = X.50 circuit associated ASM Module
Command:
Command:
con ch 130:g:p:e
Command:
rst ch 130:g:p:e
NOTE:
4-72
configuration will take effect. The rst ch command only needs to be
issued to one end of the channel connection.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
X.50 Network and Subrate I/O Devices Local to ASM
To configure connections between an X.50 network and subrate I/O devices local to the ASM
(refer to Figure 4-14):
1.
Configure T1 or E1 port to provide an interface to the external X.50 network. The bundles
defined as part of T1/E1 configuration should correspond to the X.50 aggregates to be
carried on the T1/E1 link. Alternately, the external interface can be provided by 64-kbps
SDM ports. Refer to the "T1 Port Configuration," "E1 Port Configuration," or "Synchronous
Port Configuration" chapter in the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Command:
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
or
set sdm port n:s:p
2.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
or
dsp sdm port n:s:p
3.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
port operations.
4-73
C
SDM
X.50
NETWORK
SUBRATE
SYNCHRONOUS
DATA
B
ASM
X.50 AGGREGATES
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
A
1. CONFIGURE T1M, E1M, OR SDM PORT AT A .
2. FOR T1/E1 PORT, DEFINE A BUNDLE FOR EACH X.50 AGGREGATE.
3. CONFIGURE AN X.50 VIRTUAL PORT AT B FOR EACH X.50 AGGREGATE.
4. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN EACH T1M/E1M BUNDLE OR SDM
PORT AND THE CORRESPONDING X.50 VIRTUAL PORT (i.e., A TO B AND B TO A ).
6. CONFIGURE SYNCHRONOUS DATA PORTS AT C .
7. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN THE SYNCHRONOUS DATA PORTS
AND CORRESPONDING X.50 CIRCUITS (i.e., B TO C AND C TO B ).
Figure 4-14. X.50 Network to Subrate I/O Device Local to the ASM
4-74
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
5.
If a T1 or E1 port is used, configure the bundles carrying the X.50 aggregate. Refer to the
"Bundle Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
6.
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
7.
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
If you are reconfiguring an existing bundle, reset the bundle to cause the changed paramet
ers
to take effect.
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
NOTE:
8.
port operations.
Command:
9.
Command:
dsp x50 port 130:g:p
NOTE:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
the TDM channel.
4-75
10.
Configure reciprocal TDM channel connections between each bundle (or SDM port if
synchronous ports provide the interface to the X.50 network) and the corresponding X.50
virtual ports. This connection is defined to transport the X.50 aggregates to/from the ASM
module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions.
NOTE:
The I/O module and the ASM do not have to be in the same node. The
TDM connections between the T1/E1 bundle (or 64-kbps synchronous
set ch tdm n:s:p:e
where n:s:p:e = channel associated with bundle on TIM or EIM port
or
set ch tdm n:s:p
where n:s:p = channel associated with port on SDM Module
set ch tdm 130:g:p
where 130:g:p = X.50 virtual port
11.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
or
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
or
dsp ch tdm 130:g:p
Command:
or
NOTE:
connection.
If you are reconfiguring an existing TDM channel, resetthe TDM channel to cause the
4-76
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:e
or
rst ch n:s:p
NOTE:
13.
Configure an X.50 circuit for each subrate channel in the X.50 aggregates. The X.50 circuit
prameters provide the information required for the ASM to demultiplex/multiplex the X.50
Command:
14. Verify the X.50 circuit configuration by displaying X.50 circuit parameters.
Command:
dsp X50 cktt 130:g:p:e
Command:
Command:
NOTE:
16.
X.50 channel.
Configure the local synchronous I/O ports on the SDM Module(s) for each subrate channel.
Refer to the " Synchronous Port Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
where n:s:p is physical port on SDM Module
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-77
17.
Verify the configuration of each SDM port by displaying the SDM port parameters.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
18. For a newly configured port, after configuring the synchronous port, logically inser
t the port
Command:
ins port n:s:p
to take effect.
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
19.
port operations.
Configure reciprocal TDM channel connections between the X.50 circuits and the local
synchronous I/O ports. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony
descriptions.
NOTE:
Subrate Groomer Module (SGM) services are not required when the
SDM to ASM transfer is in the same node.
To define the connection from the SDM port to the X.50 circuit, use the command:
set ch tdm n:s:p
To define the connection from the X.50 circuit to the SDM port, use the command:
where 130:g:p:e = X.50 circuit associated with X.50 virtual port on the ASM Module
20.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
or
4-78
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
con ch n:s:p
or
con ch 130:g:p:e
Command:
rst ch n:s:p
or
rst ch 130:g:p:e
NOTE:
X.50 Network and Subrate I/O Devices Remote to ASM
To configure connections between an X.50 network and subrate I/O devices remote to the ASM
(refer to Figure 4-15):
1.
Configure T1 or E1 port to provide an interface to the external X.50 network. The bundles
defined as part of T1/E1 configuration should correspond to the X.50 aggregates to be carried
on the T1/E1 link. Alternately, the external interface can be provided by 64 kbps SDM ports.
Refer to the "T1 Port Configuration," "E1 Port Configuration," or "Synchronous Port
Command:
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
or
set sdm port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-79
INLs
ST
NETWORK
C
SDM
INLs
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
X.50
NETWORK
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
A
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
X.50 AGGREGATES
(DS0s)
SUBRATE
SYNCHRONOUS
DATA
SGM
SGM
ASM
B
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
1. CONFIGURE T1M, E1M, OR SDM PORT AT A .
2. FOR T1/E1 PORT, DEFINE A BUNDLE FOR EACH X.50 AGGREGATE.
3. CONFIGURE AN X.50 VIRTUAL PORT AT B FOR EACH X.50 AGGREGATE
4. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN EACH T1M/E1M BUNDLE OR
SDM PORT AND THE CORRESPONDING X.50 VIRTUAL PORT (i.e., A TO B AND B TO A ).
7. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN THE SYNCHRONOUS DATA PORTS
AND CORRESPONDING X.50 CIRCUITS (i.e., C TO B AND B TO C ).
Figure 4-15. X.50 Network to Subrate I/O Device Remote to the ASM
4-80
STCPSUG
7/31/97
2.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
or
dsp sdm port n:s:p
3.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
4.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
5.
If a T1 or E1 port is used, configure the bundles carrying the X.50 aggregate. Refer to the
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
6.
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
7.
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-81
to take effect.
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
NOTE:
8.
port operations.
Command:
9.
Command:
NOTE:
the TDM channel.
10. Configure reciprocal TDM channel connections between each bundle (or SDM port if
synchronous ports provide the interface to the X.50 network) and the corresponding X.50
virtual ports. This connection is defined to transport the X.50 aggregates to/from the ASM
module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
NOTE:
The I/O Module and the ASM do not have to be in the same node. The
TDM connections between the T1/E1 bundle (or 64 kbps synchronous
set ch tdm n:s:p:e
where n:s:p:e = channel associated with bundle on T1M or E1M port
or
set ch tdm n:s:p
4-82
STCPSUG
7/31/97
set ch tdm 130:g:p
where 130:g:p = X.50 virtual circuit
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
or
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
or
dsp ch tdm 130:g:p
Command:
or
NOTE:
connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:e
or
rst ch n:s:p
NOTE:
13. Configure an X.50 circuit for each subrate channel in the X.50 aggregates. The X.50 circuit
parameters provide the information required for the ASM to multiplex/demultiplex the X.50
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-83
Command:
14. Verify X.50 circuit configuration by displaying X.50 circuit parameters.
Command:
dsp X50 circuit 130:g:p:e
Command:
Command:
NOTE:
16.
X.50 channel.
Configure the remote synchronous I/O ports for each subrate channel. Refer to the "
Synchronous Port Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
17.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
18. For a newly configured port, after configuring the synchronous port, logically insert the port
Command:
ins port n:s:p
to take effect.
Command:
rst port n:s:p
4-84
STCPSUG
7/31/97
NOTE:
port operations.
19. Configure reciprocal TDM channel connections between the X.50 circuits and the remote
synchronous I/O ports. Channel routing across the network depends (in part) on the channel
profile assignment of these TDM connections. The connections through the SGMs and INLs
are made internally.
NOTE:
Subrate Groomer Module (SGM) services are required when the
SDM to ASM transfer spans nodes. An SGM must be in the node at
each end of the connection.
To define the connection from the SDM port to the X.50 circuit, use the command:
set ch tdm n:s:p
To define the connection from the X.50 circuit to the SDM port, use the command:
where 130:g:p:e = X.50 circuit associated with X.50 virtual port on the ASM Module
20.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
or
Command:
con ch n:s:p
or
con ch 130:g:p:e
Command:
rst ch n:s:p
or
rst ch 130:g:p:e
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-85
NOTE:
Configuring Access Device Parameters
The AD-10 access device dynamically mixes subrate data and voice channels to create a single
19.2, 56, 64, or 128 kbps aggregate data stream.
The AD-3 and AD-7 access devices multiplex up to two (AD-3) or six (AD-7) data channels
(asynchronous/synchronous) onto a 160 kbps aggregate that consists of two ISDN 64-kbps B
channels for the I/O aggregate, a 16-kbps D channel for supervisory control, and a 16-kbps D
channel for sync and overhead.
AD-10 Applications
Typical AD-10 applications include:
• Data transmission between AD-10 access devices
• Data transmission between AD-10 access devices and other subrate I/O devices
Figure 4-16 illustrates some possible AD-10 applications. For example, subrate channels forming
the AD-10 aggregates carried on the T1/E1 shown at Node X can be independently routed to the
SDM I/O ports at either node, or can be multiplexed into AD-10 aggregate format for termination
at the AD-10 at Node Y.
Sample applications and configuration summaries are shown in Figures 4-17 to 4-21. It is assumed
that the required INLs, channel profiles, and modules have been properly configured. Refer to the
"Configuring Internodal Link Parameters", "Configuring Channel Profile Parameters", or
"Configuring Module Parameters" procedures for additional information.
The server modules shown each represent one module from their respective redundancy groups.
Allocation of server resources depends (in part) on the partition assignment of each server virtual
port. Refer to the "Module Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Management Configuration Planning Manual for details.
AD-10 Configuration
When configuring an AD-10 user port, certain parameters are relevant to the ST (the SGM/AG
port to which the AD-10 is connected) and other parameters are relevant to the AD-10 access
device. Those parameters associated with the SGM Module are configured using theset ag
command and those parameters associated with the AD-10 access device are configured using the
set ad10 command.
4-86
STCPSUG
7/31/97
T1/E1
AD-10 AGGREGATES
(DS0s)
NODE X
INL
AD-10
SGM/AG
PACKET
SUBNET
SDM
ST
NETWORK
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
INL
SGM/AG
AD-10
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
CHANNEL
BANK
T1M/E1M
AD-10
NODE Y
DTE
SDM
FSM
FSM
SDM
HDLC
DEVICE
DTE
HDLC
DEVICE
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
ONE OR MORE AD-10 AGGREGATES
SUBRATE VOICE OR TDM MODE CHANNEL
PACKET BAND FROM AD-10
ONE OR MORE PACKET CHANNELS
Figure 4-16. AD-10 Applications
For example, to configure an AD-10 data port, the parameters relevant to the ST are defined using
the set ag data command and the parameters relevant to the AD-10 are defined using theset ad10
data command.
Procedure 4-36. Configuring AD-10 Access Device Parameters Connections Between AD-10 and ST Node
To configure connections between an AD-10 access device and an ST node (Figure 4-17):
1.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Configure the AD-10 network port using the AD-10 console. The network port interface type
and clock mode must be configured. Refer to theSynchrony AD-10 User’s Guide.
4-87
NOTE:
If the AD-10 network port speed is 19.2 or 56 kbps, the synchronous
port carrying the AD-10 aggregate and the SGM must be in the same
node.
If the network port speed is 64 or 128 kbps, the synchronous or
T1/E1 port carrying the AD-10 aggregate and the SGM do not have
to be in the same node. The TDM connections between the
synchronous port or T1/E1 bundle and the SGM/AG virtual port can
span nodes.
2.
Configure a synchronous port at the ST node to provide the physical interface to the AD
-10.
Synchronous port speed can be set to 19.2, 56, 64, or 128 kbps. The bit mode should be set to
8-bit bytes. The interface type can be set to DCE1 or DCE2 depending on the AD-10 network
port clock mode. Refer to the "Synchronous Port Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for additional
configuration parameters.
Alternately, the interface to the AD-10 can be provided by 64 or 128 kbps T1 or E1 bundles.
This configuration requires the AD-10 to be connected to the ST network via a channel bank.
descriptions.
Command:
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
or
set sdm port n:s:p
where n:s:p = port on T1M, E1M, or SDM Module associated with the AD-10 aggregate
3.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
or
dsp sdm port n:s:p
4.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
4-88
STCPSUG
7/31/97
ST NODE
AD-10
DATA TO PACKET
MODE PORTS
A
VFAX
TDM
MUX
HDM
19.2, 56, 64,
OR 128 KBPS
C
FSM
DATA TO TDM OR
PACKET MODE PORTS
VFAX
SDM
VOICE
CHANNELS
EDM
EDM
SGM/AG
B
AD-10 AGGREGATE
PACKET BAND
T1/E1
A
C
FSM
T1M/E1M
AD-10
64 OR 128
KBPS
CHANNEL
BANK
1. CONFIGURE SYNCHRONOUS DATA OR T1/E1 PORT AT A . IF A T1/E1 PORT IS USED,
CONFIGURE BUNDLE.
SGM/AG
B
2. CONFIGURE AN SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT AT B FOR AD-10 AGGREGATE.
3. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL CONNECTIONS BETWEEN SYNCHRONOUS PORT OR
BUNDLE AND CORRESPONDING SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT (i.e., A TO B AND B TO A ).
4. CONFIGURE A VOICE PORT AT B FOR EACH VOICE CHANNEL IN THE AD-10 AGGREGATE.
5. CONFIGURE A TDM DATA PORT AT B FOR EACH TDM MODE DATA PORT AT THE AD-10.
6. CONFIGURE A PACKET BAND PORT AT B FOR THE AD-10 PACKET BAND.
7. CONFIGURE EACH AD-10 PACKET MODE DATA PORT.
8. CONFIGURE A FRAME SERVER VIRTUAL PORT AT C FOR THE AD-10 PACKET BAND.
9. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL CONNECTIONS BETWEEN SGM/AG PACKET BAND PORT
AND FRAME SERVER VIRTUAL PORT (i.e., B TO C AND C TO B ).
NOTE: WHEN THE CONNECTION BETWEEN THE AD-10 AND THE ST NODE IS 56 KBPS, THE SGM/AG
MUST BE IN THE SAME NODE AT THE SYNCHRONOUS PORT. WHEN THE CONNECTION IS 64
KBPS, THE TDM CONNECTION BETWEEN THE SYNCHRONOUS PORT OR T1/E1 BUNDLE AND
THE SGM/AG CAN SPAN NODES.
Figure 4-17. AD-10 to ST Node Connection
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-89
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
5.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
6.
If a T1/E1 port is used, configure the bundle carrying the AD-10 aggregate. Refer to the
"Bundle Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony Configuration Planning Manual for
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
7.
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
8.
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
to take effect.
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
NOTE:
9.
4-90
port operations.
Configure an SGM/AG virtual port for the AD-10 aggregate. See "SGM/AG Port
Parameters" in the "AD-10 Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
set ag port 129:g:p
Commands:
dsp ag port 129:g:p
NOTE:
of the TDM channel.
11. Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between the synchronous port or T1/E1 bundle
(if a T1/E1 port provides the interface) and the corresponding SGM/AG virtual port. This
connection transports the AD-10 aggregate to/from the SGM. Refer to the "TDM Channel
To define the connection from the T1M or E1M bundle to the SGM/AG virtual port, use the
command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e
To define the connection from the SDM port to the SGM/AG virtual port, use the command:
set ch tdm n:s:p
To define the connection from the SGM/AG virtual port to the T1M or E1M bundle, or SDM
set ch tdm 129:g:p
where 129:g:p = AD-10 aggregate channel associated with SGM Module virtual port
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
or
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
or
dsp ch tdm 129:g:p
Command:
or
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-91
NOTE:
connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:e
or
rst ch n:s:p
NOTE:
14. For each voice channel carried in the AD-10 aggregate, configure the voice port parameters.
Refer to "Voice Port Parameters" in the "AD-10 Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter
descriptions. Prior to configuring the AD-10 voice port, take the port offline.
Commands:
set ad10 voice 129:g:p:e mode=offline
set ad10 voice 129:g:p:e (AD-10 component of configuration)
set ag voice 129:g:p:e (SGM/AG component of configuration)
where 129:g:p = virtual port on SGM Module and e = network element associated with the
AD-10 port
15. Verify the AD-10 voice port configuration by displaying the parameters.
Commands:
16. Activate the AD-10 voice port configuration by issuing the following commands in the order
shown:
set ad10 sys 129:g:p ctrl=switch
rst ad10 voice 129:g:p:e
set ad10 voice 129:g:p:e mode=online
17. Configure each AD-10 data port. Refer to "Data Port Parameters" in the "AD-10
Configuration" chapter of the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions. Prior to configuring the AD-10
data port, take the port offline.
4-92
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Commands:
set ad10 data 129:g:p:e mode=offline
set ad10 data 129:g:p:e (AD-10 component of configuration)
set ag data 129:g:p:e (SGM/AG component of configuration)
AD-10 port
18. Verify the AD-10 data port configuration by displaying the parameters.
Commands:
dsp ag data 129:g:p:e
dsp ad10 data 129:g:p:e
19. Activate the AD-10 data port configuration by issuing the following commands in the order
shown:
rst ad10 data 129:g:p:e
set ad10 data 129:g:p:e mode=online
20. For AD-10 data ports operating in packet mode, configure the packet band at the SGM/AG
virtual port. See "Packet Band Parameters" in the "AD-10 Configuration" chapter of the
Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual.
Commands:
set ad10 pkt 129:g:p:1 (AD-10 component of configuration)
set ag pkt 129:g:p:1 (SGM/AG component of configuration)
where 129:g:p = virtual port on SGM Module and 1 = packet band
21. Verify the packet band configuration by displaying the parameters.
Commands:
dsp ag pkt 129:g:p:1
dsp ad10 pkt 129:g:p:1
22. Activate AD-10 packet band configuration by resetting the AD-10 packet band.
Command:
rst ad10 pkt 129:g:p:1
23. Configure a frame server virtual port for the AD-10 packet band. Refer to the “Frame Server
Port Parameters” in the "Packet Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Command:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-93
Command:
NOTE:
The frame server virtual port parameters will take effect upon
connection of the TDM channel.
25. Configure reciprocal TDM connections between the packet band port and the corresponding
frame server virtual port. This connection transports the AD-10 packet band to/from the FSM
module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
To define the connection from the AD-10 packet band to the frame server virtual port, use the
command:
set ch tdm 129:g:p:1
To define the connection from the frame server virtual port to the AD-10packet band use the
command:
Commands:
dsp ch tdm 129:g:p:1 (for packet band)
dsp ch tdm 128:g:p:e (for frame server virtual port)
27. For a newly configured TDM channel,the parameters will take effect upon connection of the
Command:
con ch 129:g:p:1
or
con ch 128:g:p:e
Command:
rst ch 129:g:p:1
or
rst ch 128:g:p:e
4-94
STCPSUG
7/31/97
NOTE:
Procedure 4-37. Configuring AD-10 Access Device Parameters Connections Between AD-10 Voice or TDM Mode Ports
To configure connections between AD-10 voice or TDM mode ports (Figure 4-18):
1.
Configure the AD-10 network ports using the AD-10 console. The network port interface type
NOTE:
node.
If the network port speed is 64 or 128 kbps, the synchronous or
T1/E1 port carrying the AD-10 aggregate and the SGM do not have
to be in the same node. The TDM connections between the
synchronous port or T1/E1 bundle and the SGM/AG virtual port can
span nodes.
2.
Configure a synchronous port at the ST node to provide the physical interface to each AD
-10.
Alternately, the interface to the AD-10 can be provided by 64 or 128 kbps T1 or E1 bundles.
This configuration requires the AD-10 to be connected to the ST network via a channel bank.
descriptions.
Command:
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
or
set sdm port n:s:p
where n:s:p = port on T1M, E1M, or SDM Module associated with AD-10 aggregate
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-95
AD-10
3
C
D
PBX
SGM/AG
AD-10
2
DTE
SDM
SGM/AG
B
PBX
CHANNEL
BANK
DTE
T1M/E1M
ST
NETWORK
E
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
SDM
INL
INL
PBX
DTE
DTE
1
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
A
AD-10
1. CONFIGURE SYNCHRONOUS PORTS AT A AND C .
2. CONFIGURE T1/E1 PORT AT E .
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
AD-10 AGGREGATE FORMAT
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
3. CONFIGURE BUNDLE AT E .
4. CONFIGURE AN SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT AT B FOR THE AD-10 AGGREGATE FROM 1 .
5. CONFIGURE AN SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT AT B FOR THE AD-10 AGGREGATE FROM 2 .
6. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNELS BETWEEN SYNCHRONOUS PORTS AND
CORRESPONDING SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORTS (e. g., A TO B AND B TO A ).
7. CONFIGURE AN SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT AT D FOR THE AD-10 AGGREGATE FROM 3 .
8. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNELS BETWEEN T1M OR E1M BUNDLE AND
CORRESPONDING SGM/AG (e. g., D TO E AND E TO D ).
9. CONFIGURE THE COMPONENT TDM DATA AND VOICE PORTS AT B AND D .
10. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CONNECTIONS BETWEEN VOICE PORTS AS REQUIRED ( B TO D AND
D TO B , OR BETWEEN THE VOICE PORTS CONFIGURED AT B FOR LOCAL CONNECTIONS).
11. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CONNECTIONS BETWEEN TDM DATA PORTS AS REQUIRED ( B TO D AND
D TO B , OR BETWEEN THE TDM DATA PORTS CONFIGURED AT B FOR LOCAL CONNECTIONS).
NOTE: THE SGM/AG MODULES SHOWN EACH REPRESENT ONE MODULE FROM THEIR RESPECTIVE REDUNDANCY GROUPS.
THE SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORTS CONFIGURED AT B MAY BELONG TO DIFFERENT REDUNDANCY GROUPS.
Figure 4-18. Interconnecting AD-10 Voice or TDM Ports
4-96
STCPSUG
7/31/97
3.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
or
dsp sdm port n:s:p
4.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
5.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
6.
For the T1/E1 port, configure the bundle carrying the AD-10 aggregate. Refer to the "Bundle
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
7.
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
8.
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-97
to take effect.
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
NOTE:
9.
port operations.
Configure an SGM/AG virtual port for each AD-10 aggregate. See "SGM/AG Port
Command:
set ag port 129:g:p
Commands:
dsp ag port 129:g:p
NOTE:
of the TDM channel.
11. Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between eachsynchronous port or T1/E1
bundle (if a T1/E1 port provides the interface) and the corresponding SGM/AG virtual port.
This connection transports the AD-10 aggregate to/from the SGM. Refer to the "TDM
Channel Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
To define the connection from the T1M or E1M bundle to the SGM/AG virtual port, use the
command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e
set ch tdm n:s:p
To define the connection from the SGM/AG virtual port to the T1M or E1M bundle, or SDM
set ch tdm 129:g:p
4-98
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
or
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
or
dsp ch tdm 129:g:p
Command:
or
NOTE:
connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:e
or
rst ch n:s:p
NOTE:
14. For voice channels carried in the AD-10 aggregate, configure the voice port parameters. Refer
to "Voice Port Parameters" in the "AD-10 Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter
descriptions. Prior to configuring the AD-10 voice port, take the port offline.
Commands:
port
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-99
15. Verify the AD-10 voice port configuration bydisplaying the parameters.
Commands:
16. Activate to AD-10 voice port configuration by issuing the following commands in the order
shown:
Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions. Prior to configuring, the AD-10
data port is taken offline.
Commands:
AD-10 port
Commands:
shown:
20. Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between the voice ports configured at each
SGM/AG virtual port as required to define the network voice channel connections. Refer to
the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Command:
where 129:g:p = virtual port on SGM Module and e = element associated with the virtual port
4-100
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
Command:
con ch n:s:p:e
NOTE:
The con ch command only needs to be issued to one end of the
channel connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:e
NOTE:
configuration will take effect.
23. Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between the TDM data ports configured at
each SGM/AG virtual port as required to define the network TDM channel connections. Refer
to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Command:
where 129:g:p = virtual port on SGM Module and e = element associated with the virtual port
Command:
Command:
con ch n:s:p:e
NOTE:
channel connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:e
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-101
NOTE:
Procedure 4-38. Configuring AD-10 Access Device Parameters Connections Between AD-10 TDM Mode Data Ports and Other Devices
To configure connections between AD-10 TDM mode data ports and other devices (Figure 4-19):
1.
NOTE:
node.
If the network port speed is 64 or 128 kbps, the synchronous port
carrying the AD-10 aggregate and the SGM do not have to be in the
same node. The TDM connections between the synchronous port and
the SGM/AG virtual port can span nodes.
2.
-10.
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
3.
Verify the configuration of the SDM port by displaying the port parameters.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
4.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
If you are reconfiguring an already configured SDM port, reset the port to cause the changed
Command:
rst port n:s:p
4-102
STCPSUG
7/31/97
ST
NETWORK
D
SDM
INL
INL
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
SDM
AD-10
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
A
DTE
DTE
DTE
SGM
C
SDM
SGM/AG
B
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
SUBRATE CHANNEL
1. CONFIGURE SYNCHRONOUS PORT AT A .
2. CONFIGURE AN SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT AT B FOR THE AD-10 AGGREGATE. CONFIGURE THE TDM PORTS.
3. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNELS BETWEEN SYNCHRONOUS PORT AT A AND SGM/AG PORT AT B .
4. CONFIGURE SYNCHRONOUS PORTS AT C AND D .
5. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CONNECTIONS BETWEEN TDM PORTS AT B AND THE SYNCHRONOUS PORTS
(e.g., B TO D AND D TO B ).
NOTE: AN SGM IS REQUIRED FOR REMOTE SUBRATE CONNECTIONS. CONNECTIONS THROUGH THE SGM
ARE AUTOMATIC, NOT USER SPECIFIED.
Figure 4-19. Connecting AD-10 TDM Mode Ports to Other Devices
NOTE:
5.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-103
6.
Command:
set ag port 129:g:p
7.
Commands:
dsp ag port 129:g:p
NOTE:
8.
of the TDM channel.
Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between the synchronous port and the
corresponding SGM/AG virtual port. This connection transports the AD-10 aggregate to/from
the SGM. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions.
set ch tdm n:s:p
To define the connection from the SGM/AG virtual port to the SDM port, use the command:
set ch tdm 129:g:p
9.
Verify each TDM channel configuration by displayingthe TDM channel parameters.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
or
dsp ch tdm 129:g:p
Command:
con ch n:s:p
NOTE:
connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p
4-104
STCPSUG
7/31/97
NOTE:
11. Configure a synchronous port for each device that will serve as the origin/destination for data
to/from an AD-10 TDM mode data port. Refer to the "Synchronous Port Configuration"
Manual.
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
12. Verify the configuration of each SDM port by displaying the SDM port parameters
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
13. For a newly configured port, after configuring the port parameters, logically insert the port to
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
port operations.
14. Determine the condition of the port by displaying the port status information.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
15. Configure reciprocal TDM channel connections between each TDM channel defined at the
SGM/AG virtual port and the corresponding synchronous data port. Refer to the "TDM
Commands:
set ch tdm n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-105
where n:s:p = end of TDM channel connection at physical port on SDM Module and
129:g:p:e = end of TDM channel connection at virtual port on SGM Module
Commands:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
NOTE:
TDM channel connections to subrate synchronous ports remote to an
SGM/AG virtual port require an SGM at the remote node to process
the subrate data.
Command:
con ch n:s:p
or
con ch 129:g:p:e
NOTE:
channel connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p
or
rst ch 129:g:p:e
NOTE:
4-106
issued to one end of a channel connection.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Procedure 4-39. Configuring AD-10 Access Device Parameters Connections Between AD-10 TDM Packet Mode Ports
To configure connections between AD-10 packet mode ports (Figure 4-20):
1.
NOTE:
node.
2.
Configure synchronous ports at the ST nodes to provide the physical interface to each AD
-10.
8-bit bytes. The interface type can be set to DCE1 or DCE2 depending onthe AD-10 network
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
3.
Verify the configuration of each SDM port by displaying the port parameters.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
4.
For a newly configured port, after configuring the port parameters, logically insert the oprt to
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
port operations.
4-107
NODE X
FSM
INL
D
AD-10
G
H
AD-10
DATA TO/FROM
PACKET MODE
PORTS
E
FSM
SDM
C
J
SDM
PACKET
SUBNET
SGM/AG
DATA TO/FROM
PACKET MODE
PORTS
ST
NETWORK
SGM/AG
AD-10
INL
FSM
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
F
A
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
SDM
B
SGM/AG
NODE Y
AD-10 AGGREGATE
DATA TO/FROM
PACKET MODE
PORTS
ONE OR MORE PACKET CHANNELS (PVCs)
1. CONFIGURE SYNCHRONOUS PORTS AT A , C , AND H .
2. CONFIGURE AN SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT AND PACKET BAND AT B , D , AND G .
CONFIGURE EACH AD-10 PACKET MODE DATA PORT.
3. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNELS BETWEEN SYNCHRONOUS PORTS AND SGM/AG PORTS
(e.g., A TO B AND B TO A ).
4. CONFIGURE A FRAME SERVER VIRTUAL PORT AT E , F , AND J FOR EACH PACKET BAND.
5. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CONNECTIONS BETWEEN EACH SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT AND THE CORRESPONDING
FRAME SERVER VIRTUAL PORT (e.g., B TO F AND F TO B ).
6. USE THE DLCIs ASSIGNED AT THE AD-10 PACKET MODE DATA PORTS TO CONFIGURE THE APPROPRIATE FRAME RELAY
CHANNELS (PVCs) AT EACH FRAME SERVER VIRTUAL PORT. FOR EXAMPLE:
PVC = PORT AT F , DLCIF1
PORT AT E , DLCIE1
PVC = PORT AT F , DLCIF2
PORT AT
J , DLCIJ1
PVC = PORT AT E , DLCIE1
PORT AT F , DLCIF1
PVC = PORT AT J , DLCIJ1
PORT AT
F , DLCIF2
NOTE: THE TWO SGM/AG AND FSM MODULES AT NODE X ARE SHOWN TO MORE CLEARLY ILLUSTRATE THE CONNECTIONS
WITHIN THE NODE. THE SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORTS OR FRAME SERVER PORTS DEFINED COULD BE ALLOCATED TO THE
SAME SGM/AG OR FSM MODULE.
Figure 4-20. Interconnecting AD-10 Packet Mode Ports
4-108
STCPSUG
7/31/97
5.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
6.
Configure an SGM/AG virtual port for each AD-10 aggregate. See "SGM/AG Port
Command:
set ag port 129:g:p
7.
Verify each SGM/AG virtual port configuration by displaying the parameters.
Commands:
dsp ag port 129:g:p
NOTE:
8.
of the TDM channel.
Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between each synchronous port and the
set ch tdm n:s:p
set ch tdm 129:g:p
9.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
or
dsp ch tdm 129:g:p
Command:
con ch n:s:p
NOTE:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
connection.
4-109
Command:
rst ch n:s:p
NOTE:
11. For AD-10 data ports operating in packet mode, configure the packet band at the SGM/AG
virtual port. See "Packet Band Parameters" in the "AD-10 Configuration" chapter of the
Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual.
Commands:
set ag pkt 129:g:p:1
set ad10 pkt 129:g:p:1
Commands:
13. Activate changes to AD-10 packet band configuration by resetting the packet band.
Command:
14. Configure a frame server virtual port for each AD-10 packet band. Refer to the “Frame
Server Port Parameters” in the "Packet Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST-1000/ST20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions.
Command:
Command:
NOTE:
4-110
STCPSUG
7/31/97
16. Configure reciprocal TDM connections between each AD-10 packet band and the
corresponding frame server virtual port. This connection transports the AD-10 packet band
to/from the FSM module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter of the
command:
To define the connection from the frame server virtual port to the AD-10 packet band use the
command:
set ch tdm 128:g:p
Commands:
dsp ch tdm 129:g:p:1 for packet band
and
dsp ch tdm 128:g:p for frame server virtual port
Command:
con ch 129:g:p:1
or
con ch 128:g:p:e
Command:
rst ch 129:g:p:1
or
rst ch 128:g:p:e
NOTE:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-111
19. Configure frame relay channels at each frame server virtual port. The FSM serves as the
access point to the Synchrony packet subnetwork. At each frame server virtual port, use the
DLCIs that were assigned to each AD-10 packet mode data port to configure the appropriate
frame relay channels (also known as PVCs). Refer to the "Packet Configuration" chapter in
details.
Command:
set ch fr 128:g:p:e
where 128:g:p = virtual port on FSM Module and e = DLCI associated with that virtual port
Command:
dsp ch 128:g:p:e
of the channel. Connect the frame relay channel.
Command:
con ch 128:g:p:e
If you are reconfiguring an existing frame relay channel, reset the channel to cause the
Command:
rst ch 128:g:p:e
NOTE:
Procedure 4-40. Configuring AD-10 Access Device Parameters Connections Between AD-10 TDM Packet Mode Ports and Other
Devices
To configure connections between AD-10 packet mode ports and other devices (Figure 4-21):
1.
Configure the AD-10 network port using the AD-10 console. The network port interface type
NOTE:
node.
4-112
STCPSUG
7/31/97
INL
PACKET
SUBNET
C
FSM
D
SDM
SGM/AG
B
HDLC
DEVICE
E
FSM
DATA TO/FROM
PACKET MODE
PORTS
F
SDM
ST
NETWORK
INL
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
SDM
AD-10
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
A
HDLC
DEVICE
AD-10 AGGREGATE
PACKET CHANNEL
SUBRATE CHANNEL
1. CONFIGURE A SYNCHRONOUS PORT AT A .
2. CONFIGURE AN SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT AND PACKET BAND PORT AT B .
CONFIGURE EACH AD-10 PACKET MODE DATA PORT.
3. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNELS BETWEEN SYNCHRONOUS PORT A AND
SGM/AG PORT B .
4. CONFIGURE A FRAME SERVER VIRTUAL PORT FOR THE PACKET BAND AT C .
5. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT AND THE
CORRESPONDING FRAME SERVER VIRTUAL PORT ( B TO C AND C TO B ).
6. CONFIGURE SYNCHRONOUS PORTS AT D AND F .
7. CONFIGURE FRAME SERVER VIRTUAL PORTS AT C AND E .
8. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL CONNECTIONS BETWEEN EACH SYNCHRONOUS PORT AND THE
CORRESPONDING FRAME SERVER VIRTUAL PORT (e.g., C TO D AND D TO C ).
9. CONFIGURE THE FRAME RELAY CHANNELS (PVCs) AT EACH FRAME RELAY VIRTUAL PORT ( D AND E ).
Figure 4-21. Connecting AD-10 Packet Mode Ports to Other Devices
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-113
2.
-10.
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
3.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
4.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
5.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
6.
Command:
set ag port 129:g:p
7.
Commands:
dsp ag port 129:g:p
4-114
STCPSUG
7/31/97
NOTE:
8.
of the TDM channel.
Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between the synchronous port and the
set ch tdm n:s:p
set ch tdm 129:g:p
9.
Verify each TDM channel configuration bydisplaying the TDM channel parameters.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
or
dsp ch tdm 129:g:p
Command:
con ch n:s:p
NOTE:
connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p
NOTE:
11. Configure the appropriate connection on the SGM Module for the AD-10 aggregate carrying
the packet band to be connected to other devices on the network. See "Packet Band
Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-115
Commands:
set ag pkt 129:g:p:1
set ad10 pkt 129:g:p:1
Commands:
13. Activate changes to AD-10 packet band configuration by resetting access device.
Command:
14. Configure a frame server virtual port for the AD-10 packet band. Refer to the “Frame Server
Port Parameters” in the "Packet Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Command:
Command:
NOTE:
16. Configure reciprocal TDM connections between the packet band and the corresponding frame
server virtual port. This connection transports the AD-10 packet band to/from the FSM
module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
command:
To define the connection from the frame server virtual port to the AD-10 packet band use the
command:
set ch tdm 128:g:p
4-116
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Commands:
dsp ch tdm 129:g:p:1 for packet band
and
dsp ch tdm 128:g:p for frame server virtual port
Command:
con ch 129:g:p:1
or
con ch 128:g:p:e
Command:
rst ch 129:g:p:1
or
rst ch 128:g:p:e
NOTE:
19. Configure a synchronous port for each HDLC device that will serve as the origin/destination
for data to/from an AD-10 packet mode data port. Refer to the "Synchronous Port
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
20. Verify the configuration of each SDM port by displaying the SDM port parameters
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
Command:
ins port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-117
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
port operations.
22. Determine the condition of the port by displaying the port status information.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
23. Configure a frame server virtual port for each synchronous data port configured in step 19.
Command:
Command:
NOTE:
25. Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between each synchronous data port and the
relay data to/from the FSM Module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in
To define the connection from the synchronous data port to the frame server virtual port, use
the command:
set ch tdm n:s:p
the command:
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p for SDM port
4-118
STCPSUG
7/31/97
or
dsp ch tdm 128:g:p for frame server virtual port.
Command:
con ch n:s:p
NOTE:
TDM channel.
28. Configure frame relay channels at each frame server virtual port. The FSM serves as the
access point to the Synchrony packet subnetwork. To configure the appropriate frame relay
channels (also known as PVCs), refer to the "Packet Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony
descriptions.
Command:
set ch fr 128:g:p:e
where 128:g:p = virtual port on FSM Module and e = DLCI associated with that virtual port
Command:
dsp ch fr 128:g:p:e
Command:
con ch 128:g:p:e
Command:
rst ch 128:g:p:e
NOTE:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-119
AD-3/AD-7 Applications
Typical AD-3 and AD-7 applications include:
• Data transmission between AD-3 and AD-7 access devices
• Data transmission between AD-3/AD-7 access devices and other I/O devices
Figure 4-22 illustrates some possible AD-3/AD-7 applications. For example, AD-3/AD-7 subrate
channels originating at Node X can be independently routed to various I/O ports at either Node X
or Node Y. As can be seen in the example, channels that originate from devices connected to an
AD-3 or AD-7 access device do not necessarily terminate at devices connected to other AD-3 or
AD-7 access devices.
that the channel profiles and modules have been properly configured (refer to the "Channel Profile
Parameters" or "Module Parameters" paragraphs for additional information).
AD-3/AD-7 Configuration
When configuring an AD-3 or AD-7 user port, certain parameters are relevant to the ST (RTM
Module to which the AD-3 or AD-7 is connected) and other parameters are relevant to the AD-3 or
AD-7 access device. Those parameters associated with the RTM Module are configured using the
set rtm ad command and those parameters associated with the AD-3 or AD-7 access device are
configured using the set ad port command.
For example, to configure an AD-3 or AD-7 port , the parameters relevant to the ST are defined
using the set rtm ad command and the parameters relevant to the AD-3 or AD-7 are defined using
the set ad port command.
Procedure 4-41. Configuring AD-3/AD-7 Access Device Parameters Connections Between AD-3/AD-7s Connected to Same RTM Module
To configure connections between AD-3/AD-7s connected to same RTM Module (Figure 4-23):
1.
Define the parameters for each port on the RTM module connected to an AD-3/AD-7 access
device. Refer to the "AD-3/AD-7 Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Command:
set rtm port n:s:p
4-120
STCPSUG
7/31/97
ST NETWORK
PACKET
SUBNET
AD-3/AD-7
NODE Y
RTM
AD-3/AD-7
SGM
T1M/E1M/SDM
SGM
RTM
AD-3/AD-7
INL
T1M/E1M/SDM
INL
NODE X
AD-3/AD-7
X.50
NETWORK
FSM
FSM
AD-3/AD-7
SDM
RTM
ASM
AD-3/AD-7
RTM
AD-3/AD-7
DTE
SGM/AG
FRAME
RELAY
OR
HDLC
SDM
SDM
AD-3/AD-7
AD-10
SUBRATE CIRCUITS IN SUBRATE CHANNEL FORMAT
X.50 AGGREGATE
SUBRATE CIRCUITS IN SUBRATE AGGREGATED FORMAT
AD-10 AGGREGATE
FRAME RELAY OR HDLC CHANNELS
Figure 4-22. AD-3/AD-7 Applications
where n:s:p = port on RTM Module associated with this access device
2.
Verify the configuration for the RTM port by displaying the RTM port parameters.
Command:
dsp rtm port n:s:p
3.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
For a newly configured RTM port, after configuring the port parameters, logically insert the
port to cause all of the parameters to take effect.
4-121
Command:
ins port n:s:p
If you are reconfiguring an already configured RTM port, reset the port to cause the changed
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
port operations.
ST NODE
U-INTERFACE
A
RTM
C AD-3/AD-7
D AD-3/AD-7
U-INTERFACE
B
1. CONFIGURE RTM PORTS AT A AND B .
2. CONFIGURE AD-3/AD-7 PORTS AT C AND D .
3. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL
DEFINITIONS BETWEEN THE AD-3/AD-7 PORTS
(i. e., C TO D AND D TO C ).
Figure 4-23. AD-3/AD-7 Local Switch
4-122
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4.
Confirm that port is operating normally with the new configuration.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
5.
Configure the AD-3/AD-7 access device ports. Refer to the "AD-3/AD-7 Configuration"
Commands:
set rtm ad n:s:p:e
set ad port n:s:p:e
where n:s:p = port on RTM Module associated with this access device ande = port on AD-3
or AD-7 access device.
6.
Verify the configuration for each AD-3/AD-7 port by displaying the AD-3/AD-7 port
parameters.
Commands:
dsp rtm ad n:s:p:e
dsp ad port n:s:p:e
7.
For a newly configured port, after configuring the AD-3/AD-7 port parameters, logically
Command:
ins ad port n:s:p:e
If you are reconfiguring an already configured AD-3/AD-7 port, reset the port to cause the
Command:
rst ad port n:s:p:e
NOTE:
8.
The rst ad port command will temporarily interrupt service on the
port if the port is currently in use.
Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between the AD-3 or AD-7 access device
ports. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e
9.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-123
Command:
con ch n:s:p:e
NOTE:
The con ch command only needs to be issued to one end of a channel
connection.
If you are reconfiguring an existing TDM channel, reset the TDMchannel to cause the
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:e
NOTE:
Procedure 4-42. Configuring AD-3/AD-7 Access Device Parameters Connections Between AD-3/AD-7s and other CPE at the Same Node
(Local Drop)
To configure connections between AD-3/AD-7s and other customer premises equipment (CPE) at
the same node (Figure 4-24):
1.
Define the parameters for each port on each RTM module connected to an AD-3/AD-7 access
Command:
set rtm port n:s:p
2.
Command:
dsp rtm port n:s:p
3.
For a newly configured RTM port, after configuring the port parameters, logically insert the
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
4-124
STCPSUG
7/31/97
U-INTERFACE
ST NODE
B
RTM
RTM
A AD-3/AD-7
D
U-INTERFACE
AD-3/AD-7 E
SDM
C
CPE
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
SUBRATE CHANNEL FORMAT
1. CONFIGURE RTM PORTS AT B AND D .
2. CONFIGURE AD-3/AD-7 PORTS AT A AND E .
DEFINITIONS BETWEEN AD-3/AD-7 PORTS
(i. e., A TO E AND E TO A ).
5. CONFIGURE RECIPROCOL TDM CHANNEL
DEFINITIONS BETWEEN AD-3/AD-7 PORTS AND SDM
PORTS (e. g., A TO C AND C TO A ).
Figure 4-24. AD-3/AD-7 Local Drop to AD-3/AD-7 or Other CPE
NOTE:
4.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-125
5.
Configure the AD-3/AD-7 access device ports. Refer to the "AD-3/AD-7 Configuration"
Commands:
set rtm ad n:s:p:e
set ad port n:s:p:e
6.
Verify the configuration for each AD-3/AD-7 port by displaying the AD-3/AD-7 port
parameters.
Commands:
dsp rtm ad n:s:p:e
dsp ad port n:s:p:e
7.
For a newly configured port, after configuring the AD-3/AD-7 port parameters, logically
Command:
ins ad port n:s:p:e
Command:
rst ad port n:s:p:e
NOTE:
8.
Define the parameters for each port on the SDM module connected to CPE. Refer to the
"Synchronous Port Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
where n:s:p = port on SDM Module connected to CPE
9.
Verify the configuration for the SDM port by displaying the SDM port parameters.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
Command:
ins port n:s:p
4-126
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
port operations.
11. Confirm that port is operating normally with the new configuration.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
12. Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between the AD-3 or AD-7 access device
ports, and between the AD-3 or AD-7 access device ports and the SDM ports. Refer to the
"TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Commands:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e for AD-3 or AD-7 access device
and
set ch tdm n:s:p for SDM Module
Commands:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
Command:
con ch n:s:p:e
NOTE:
connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:e
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-127
NOTE:
Procedure 4-43. Configuring AD-3/AD-7 Access Device Parameters Connections Between AD-3/AD-7 and AD-10 Access Devices at the
Same Node (Local Drop)
To configure connections between AD-3/AD-7 and AD-10 access devices at the same node (Figure
4-25):
1.
Configure the physical port on the SDM module connected to the AD-10 access device. Refer
to the "Synchronous Port Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
where n:s:p = port on SDM Module connected to AD-10
2.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
3.
For a newly configured SDM port, after configuring the port parameters, logically insert the
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
4.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
4-128
STCPSUG
7/31/97
ST NODE
B
SDM
U-INTERFACE
RTM
A AD-3/AD-7
D
AD-10
E
SGM/AG
C
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
AD-10 AGGREGATE
2. CONFIGURE SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT AT C FOR
AD-10 AGGREGATE.
3. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN
SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT AND SDM PORT (i. e., C TO D AND D TO C ).
4. CONFIGURE AD-10 DATA PORTS AT E .
5. CONFIGURE RTM PORT AT B .
6. CONFIGURE AD-3/AD-7 PORTS AT A .
7. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS
BETWEEN AD-3/AD-7 PORT AND SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT
(i. e., A TO C AND C TO A ).
Figure 4-25. AD-3/AD-7 Local Drop to AD-10
5.
Configure an SGM/AG virtual port for the AD-10 aggregate. See "AD-10 Configuration"
Command:
set ag port 129:g:p
where 129:g:p = virtual port on SGM associated with AD-10 aggregate
6.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Verify the configuration for the SGM/AG virtual port by displaying the SGM/AG port
parameters.
4-129
Command:
dsp ag port 129:g:p
NOTE:
7.
of the TDM channel.
Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between the SDM Module synchronous port
and the corresponding SGM/AG virtual port. This connection transports the AD-10 aggregate
to/from the SGM Module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in the
To define the connection from the SDM port to the virtual port on the SGM Module, use the
command:
set ch tdm n:s:p
To define the connection from the virtual port on the SGM Module to the SDM port, use the
command:
set ch tdm 129:g:p
where 129:g:p = virtual port on SGM Module
8.
Commands:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
or
dsp ch tdm 129:g:p
9.
Command:
con ch n:s:p
NOTE:
connection.
If you are reconfiguring an existing TDM channel, reset the TDM channel to causethe
Command:
rst ch n:s:p
NOTE:
4-130
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions. Prior to configuring, the AD-10
data port is taken offline.
Commands:
AD-10 port
Commands:
shown:
NOTE:
The rst ad10 data command will temporarily interrupt service on the
port.
14. Define the parameters for each port on the RTM module connected to an AD-3/AD-7 access
Command:
set rtm port n:s:p
15. Verify the configuration for the RTM port by displaying the RTM port parameters.
Command:
dsp rtm port n:s:p
16. For a newly configured RTM port, after configuring the port parameters, logically insert the
Command:
ins port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-131
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
18. Configure the AD-3/AD-7 access device ports. Refer to the "AD-3/AD-7 Configuration"
Commands:
set rtm ad n:s:p:e
set ad port n:s:p:e
19. Verify the configuration for each AD-3/AD-7 port by displaying the AD-3/AD-7 port
parameters.
Commands:
dsp rtm ad n:s:p:e
dsp ad port n:s:p:e
20. For a newly configured port, after configuring the AD-3/AD-7 port parameters, logically
Command:
ins ad port n:s:p:e
Command:
rst ad port n:s:p:e
NOTE:
21. Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between the AD-3 or AD-7 access device ports
and AD-10 ports. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter
descriptions.
4-132
STCPSUG
7/31/97
To define the channel connection from the AD-3 or AD-7 port to the AD-10 port, use the
command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e
where n:s:p:e = channel associated with the physical port on the AD-3 or AD-7 access device
To define the connection from the AD-10 port to the AD-3 or AD-7 port use the command:
where 129:g:p:e = channel associated with that AD-10 data port.
Commands:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
Command:
con ch n:s:p:e
NOTE:
connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:e
NOTE:
Procedure 4-44. Configuring AD-3/AD-7 Access Device Parameters Connections Between AD-3/AD-7 and X.50 Network at the Same Node
(Local Drop)
To configure connections between AD-3/AD-7 access devices and an X.50 network at the same
node (Figure 4-26):
1.
Configure the physical port on the SDM module connected to the X.50 network. Refer to the
"Synchronous Port Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-133
X.50
AGGREGATE
ST NODE
B
U-INTERFACE
SDM
AD-3/AD-7
RTM
A
D
X.50
NETWORK
ASM
C
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
X.50 AGGREGATE
2. CONFIGURE X.50 VIRTUAL PORT AT C FOR
X.50 AGGREGATE.
3. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN
ASM VIRTUAL PORT AND SDM PORT (i.e., C TO D AND D TO C ).
DEFINITIONS BETWEEN AD-3/AD-7 PORT AND ASM VIRTUAL PORT
Figure 4-26. AD-3/AD-7 Local Drop to X.50 Network
where n:s:p = port on SDM Module connected to X.50 network.
2.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
3.
4-134
For a newly configured SDM port, after configuring the port parameters, logically insert the
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
4.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
5.
Configure an X.50 virtual port on the ASM for the X.50 aggregate. See "X.50 Configuration"
Command:
where 130:g:p = X.50 virtual port associated with X.50 aggregate
6.
Verify the configuration for the X.50 virtual port by dislaying the ASM port parameters.
Command:
NOTE:
7.
the TDM channel.
Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between the SDM Module synchronous port
and the corresponding ASM virtual port. This connection transports the X.50 aggregate
to/from the ASM Module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter in the
To define the connection from the SDM port to the virtual port on the ASM Module, use the
command:
set ch tdm n:s:p
To define the connection from the virtual port on the ASM Module to the SDM port, use the
command:
set ch tdm 130:g:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-135
where 130:g:p = virtual port on ASM Module
8.
Commands:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
dsp ch tdm 130:g:p
9.
Command:
con ch n:s:p
NOTE:
connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p
NOTE:
10. Define the parameters for each port on the RTM module connected to an AD-3/AD-7 access
Command:
set rtm port n:s:p
Command:
dsp rtm port n:s:p
Command:
ins port n:s:p
4-136
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
Commands:
set rtm ad n:s:p:e
set ad port n:s:p:e
parameters.
Commands:
dsp rtm ad n:s:p:e
dsp ad port n:s:p:e
Command:
ins ad port n:s:p:e
Command:
rst ad port n:s:p:e
NOTE:
17. Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between the AD-3 or AD-7 access device ports
and the X.50 circuits on the ASM virtual port. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration"
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-137
To define the channel connection from an AD-3 or AD-7 port to he
t virtual port on the ASM
Module, use the command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e
where n:s:p:e = channel assoicated with physical port on the AD-3 or AD-7 access device
To define the connection from the virtual port on the ASM Module to the AD-3 or AD-7 port
use the command:
where 130:g:p:e = X.50 circuit associated with virtual port on the ASM Module
Commands:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
Command:
con ch n:s:p:e
or
con ch 130:g:p:e
NOTE:
connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:e
or
rst ch 130:g:p:e
NOTE:
4-138
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Procedure 4-45. Configuring AD-3/AD-7 Access Device Parameters Connections Between AD-3/AD-7 and Frame Relay or HDLC at the
Same Node (Local Drop)
To configure connections between AD-3/AD-7 access devices and frame relay or high level data
link control (HDLC) devices at the same node (Figure 4-27):
1.
Define the parameters for the port on the SDM, T1M, or E1M Module connected to the frame
relay or HDLC devices. Refer to the "Synchronous Port Configuration", "T1 Port
Configuration", or "E1 Port Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
or
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
where n:s:p = port on SDM, T1M, or E1M Module connected to frame relay or HDLC
device
2.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
or
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
3.
For a newly configured port, after configuring the SDM, T1M, or E1M port parameters,
logically insert the port to cause all of the parameters to take effect.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-139
ST NODE
U-INTERFACE
RTM
A AD-3/AD-7
D
T1M/E1M/SDM
B
FRAME
RELAY
OR
HDLC
FSM
C
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
FRAME RELAY OR HDLC CHANNEL
1. CONFIGURE T1M, E1M, OR SDM PORT AT D .
2. CONFIGURE FRAME SERVER VIRTUAL PORT AT C .
3. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNNEL DEFINITIONS
BETWEEEN FSM VIRTUAL PORT AND T1M, E1M, OR SDM PORT
(i.e., C TO D AND D TO C ).
DEFINITIONS BETWEEN AD-3/AD-7 PORT AND FSM VIRTUAL PORT
7. CONFIGURE FRAME RELAY CHANNEL (PVC) AT FSM VIRTUAL PORT C .
Figure 4-27. AD-3/AD-7 Local Drop to Frame Relay or HDLC
NOTE:
4-140
port operations.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
5.
For T1M or E1M port, configure the T1 or E1 bundle(s).
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
where b = bundle on physical port n:s:p of T1M, E1M, or SDM Module.
6.
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
7.
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
to take effect.
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
NOTE:
8.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st bdl n:s:p:b
9.
Configure a frame server virtual port on the FSM for the frame relay or HDLC access
channel. See "Packet Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Command:
10. Verify the configuration of the frame server port by displaying the port parameters.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-141
Command:
NOTE:
11. Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between the SDM physical port, or T1M/E1M
bundle and the corresponding FSM virtual port. This connection transports the frame relay or
HDLC channel to/from the FSM Module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter
To define the connection from the T1M/E1M bundle or SDM port to the virtual port on the
FSM Module, use the command:
set ch tdm n:s:p (SDM Module)
or
set ch tdm n:s:p:b (T1M, E1M bundle)
where n:s:p = physical port on T1M, E1M, or SDM Module and b equals T1M or E1M
bundle
To define the connection from the virtual port on the FSM Module to the T1M, E1M, or
SDM port, use the command:
set ch tdm 128:g:p
Commands:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:b
dsp ch tdm 128:g:p
channel. Connect the TDM channels.
Command:
con ch n:s:p
or
con ch n:s:p:b
NOTE:
connection.
If you are reconfiguring an existing TDM channel, reset the channel to cause the chan
ged
4-142
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
rst ch n:s:p
or
rst ch n:s:p:b
NOTE:
14. Define the parameters for each port on the RTM moduleconnected to an AD-3/AD-7 access
Command:
set rtm port n:s:p
Command:
dsp rtm port n:s:p
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-143
Commands:
set rtm ad n:s:p:e
set ad port n:s:p:e
parameters.
Commands:
dsp rtm ad n:s:p:e
dsp ad port n:s:p:e
Command:
ins ad port n:s:p:e
Command:
rst ad port n:s:p:e
NOTE:
21. Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between the AD-3 or AD-7 access device port
and the FSM virtual port associated with the frame relay or HDLC device. Refer to the "TDM
Channel Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony Configuration Planning Manual for
To define the connection from the AD-3 or AD-7 port to the virtual port on the FSM Module,
use the command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e
where n:s:p:e = physical port on the AD-3 or AD-7 access device
To define the connection from the virtual port on the FSM Module to the AD-3 or AD-7 port,
use the command:
set ch tdm 128:g:p
Commands:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
dsp ch tdm 128:g:p
4-144
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
con ch n:s:p:e
or
con ch 128:g:p:e
NOTE:
connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:e
or
rst ch 128:g:p:e
NOTE:
24. Configure a frame relay channel for each incoming DLCI at the frame server port.
Command:
set ch fr 128:g:p:e
where 128:g:p = virtual port on FSM Module and e = DLCI associated with the virtual port
Command:
dsp ch fr 128:g:p:e
Command:
con ch 128:g:p:e
Command:
rst ch 128:g:p:e
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-145
NOTE:
Procedure 4-46. Configuring AD-3/AD-7 Access Device Parameters Connections Between AD-3/AD-7 Access Devices at Different Nodes
To configure connections between AD-3/AD-7 access devices located at different nodes
(Figure 4-28):
1.
Define the parameters for the ports on the SDM, T1M, or E1M modules. Refer to the
"Synchronous Port Configuration", "T1 Port Configuration", or "E1 Port Configuration"
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p, set t1m port n:s:p, or set e1m port n:s:p
where n:s:p = port on SDM, T1M, or E1M Module
2.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p, dsp t1m port n:s:p, or dsp e1m port n:s:p
3.
For a newly configured port, after configuring the SDM, T1M, or E1M port parameters,
logically insert the port to cause all of the parameters to take effect.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
4.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
4-146
STCPSUG
7/31/97
U-INTERFACE
U-INTERFACE
ST
NETWORK
NOTE: SGM MODULES ARE NOT
REQUIRED IF AD-3/AD-7
CHANNEL SPEED IS 64K OR 128K.
E
AD-3/AD-7
F
SGM
INL
INL
T1M/E1M/SDM
T1M/E1M/SDM
AD-3/AD-7
D
C
SGM
A
RTM
B
ST NODE
RTM
ST NODE
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN SUBRATE
CHANNEL FORMAT
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN SUBRATE
AGGREGATE FORMAT
1. CONFIGURE T1M, E1M, OR SDM PORTS
AT C AND D .
2. CONFIGURE DS0 BUNDLES AT C AND D .
3. CONFIGURE INL AT EACH NODE.
4. CONFIGURE RTM PORTS AT B AND E .
5. CONFIGURE AD-3/AD-7 PORTS AT A AND F .
6. CONFIGURE RECIPROCOL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS
BETWEEN AD-3/AD-7 PORTS (i. e., A TO F AND F TO A ).
Figure 4-28. AD-3/AD-7 Remote Connection to AD-3/AD-7
5.
Configure the DS0 bundle(s).
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
where b = bundle on physical port n:s:p of T1M, E1M, or SDM Module.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-147
6.
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
7.
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
to take effect.
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
NOTE:
8.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st bdl n:s:p:b
9.
Define the internodal link (INL) parameters for each node.
Command:
set inl x
where x = INL number
10. Verify the INL configuration by displaying the INL parameters.
Command:
dsp inl x
11. For a newly configured INL, after configuring the INL parameters, logically insert the INL to
Command:
ins inl x
If you are reconfiguring an already configured INL, reset the INL to cause the changed
Command:
rst inl x
4-148
STCPSUG
7/31/97
NOTE:
The rst inl command will temporarily interrupt service on the bundle.
If only nonintrusive parameters have been changed, the update inl x
command can be used to implement the new configuration. The
update inl command does not disrupt port operations.
12. Define the parameters for each port on each RTM Module connected to an AD-3/AD-7 access
Command:
set rtm port n:s:p
Command:
dsp rtm port n:s:p
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
Commands:
set rtm ad n:s:p:e
set ad port n:s:p:e
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-149
parameters.
Commands:
dsp rtm ad n:s:p:e
dsp ad port n:s:p:e
Command:
ins ad port n:s:p:e
Command:
rst ad port n:s:p:e
NOTE:
19. Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between the AD-3 or AD-7 access device
ports. Refer to the "AD-3/AD-7 Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e
where n:s:p:e = channel associated with physical port on AD-3 or AD-7 access device
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
Command:
con ch n:s:p:e
NOTE:
connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:e
4-150
STCPSUG
7/31/97
NOTE:
Configuring LINK Gateway Parameters
The LINK Gateway Module (LGM) provides a gateway from a LINK/+ network into an ST
network and allows the two networks to interwork with each other. The LGM Module multiplexes
and demultiplexes the LINK/+ frames and provides protocol conversion between the LINK/+ and
ST networks.
The data stream from an Interlink Module or Integrated Trunk Module at a LINK/+ node can
connect to the ST network through a T1M, E1M, or SDM Module.
LINK Gateway Applications
Typical LINK Gateway applications include:
• Synchonous data from a LINK/+ synchronous port to an SDM port at an ST node
• Synchonous data from a LINK/+ synchronous port to an AD-10 synchronous port at an ST
node
• Synchronous/asynchronous data from a LINK/+ port to a synchronous or asynchronous port on
an AD-3 or AD-7 at an ST node.
• Analog voice from a LINK/+ voiceport to an AD-10 voice port at an ST node
• Digital voice from a PBX at a LINK/+ node to a PBX at an ST node
Figure 4-29 illustrates some of these applications.
that the required INLs, channel profiles, and modules have been properly configured. Refer to the
"Configuring Internodal Link Parameters", "Configuring Channel Profile Parameters", or
"Configuring Module Parameters" procedures for additional information.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-151
PBX
T1M/E1M
SDM
SDM
ASM
SGM/AG
SGM
SYNC
DATA
RTM
LINK FRAME IN ILC
AGGREGATE FORMAT
AD-10
AD-3
OR
AD-7
SYNC
DATA
ASM
LGM
SGM
ILC, ILQ
ILP, ILQ
I/O
ASYNC
DATA
I/O
I/O
PBX
SYNC
DATA
LGM
DATALINK
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
ST GATEWAY NODE
LINK/+ NODE
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
SYNC
DATA
ASYNC
DATA
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
LINK/+ CHANNELS
Figure 4-29. LINK Gateway Applications
Procedure 4-47. Configuring an LGM Datalink
To configure an LGM datalink between a LINK/+ node and an ST node (refer to figure 4-30):
1.
At the LINK/+ node, configure the intermachine link parameters (ILC Module) or integrated
trunk parameters (ILQ Module). Refer to the “Intermachine Link Parameters” or “Integrated
Trunk Parameters” chapters in the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual or the
“Intermachine Link Configuration” chapter in theentréeLINK+ Design and Configuration
Command:
def dl ss (for ILC Module)
or
def ilq 1:ss (for ILQ Module)
where ss = slot location of ILC Module and 1:ss = slot location of ILQ Module
4-152
STCPSUG
7/31/97
ILC, ILQ
A
LGM DATALINK
B
C
LGM
ST GATEWAY NODE
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
LINK/+ NODE
LINK FRAME IN ILC
AGGREGATE FORMAT
1. CONFIGURE ILC OR ILQ AT A .
2. FOR ILQ, CONFIGURE PROPRIETARY BUNDLE(S) AT A .
3. CONFIGURE T1M, E1M, OR SDM PORT AT B .
4. FOR T1M OR E1M, CONFIGURE BUNDLE AT B FOR LINK/+ AGGREGATE.
5. CONFIGURE LGM VIRTUAL PORT AT C .
6. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN B AND C .
7. CONFIGURE ROUTING TABLES AT BOTH NODES.
Figure 4-30. Configuring an LGM Datalink
2.
Verify the intermachine link or integrated trunk configuration by displaying the parameters.
Command:
dsp dl ss (for ILC Module)
or
dsp ilq 1:ss (for ILQ Module)
3.
After configuring the intermachine link or integrated trunk parameters, reset the module to
cause the parameters to take effect.
Command:
rst n:ss
4.
For an ILQ Module, configure the proprietary bundle parameters. Refer to the “Integrated
Trunk Parameters” chapter in the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual for parameter
descriptions.
NOTE:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Channels must be disconnected before the set cfg command is issued.
After the command is issued, the channels must be reconnected for
the changes to take effect.
4-153
Commands:
dsc ds0 1:ss:cc
def bdl pr 1:ss:cc
where 1:ss = slot location of ILQ Module and cc = bundle number
5.
Verify the proprietary bundle configuration by displaying the parameters.
Command:
dsp bdl pr 1:ss:cc
6.
After configuring the proprietary bundle parameters, connect the channel to cause all of the
Command:
con ds0 n:ss:cc
7.
At the ST node, configure theT1M, E1M, or SDM, configure the port to provide an interface
to the LGM datalink. Refer to the "T1 Port Configuration", "E1 Port Configuration", or
“Synchronous Port Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Command:
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
or
set sdm port n:s:p
where n:s:p = port on T1M, E1M, or SDM Module associated with LGM datalink
8.
Verify the T1M, E1M, or SDM port configuration by displaying the port parameters.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
or
dsp sdm port n:s:p
9.
After configuring the T1M, E1M, or SDM port, reset the port to cause all of the parameters
to take effect.
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
4-154
The rst port command will temporarily interrupt service on the port.
If only nonintrusive parameters have been changed, the update port
STCPSUG
7/31/97
command can be used to implement the new configuration. The
update port command does not disrupt port operations.
10.
If a T1 or E1 port is used, configure the bundle carrying the LINK/+ aggregate. Refer to the
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
12. After configuring the bundle, reset the bundle to cause all of the parameters to take effect.
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
NOTE:
The rst bdl command will temporarily interrupt service on the
bundle. If only nonintrusive parameters have been changed, the
update bdl command can be used to implement the new
configuration. The update bundle command does not disrupt port
operations.
13. Configure the LGM datalink associated with the virtual port on the LGM Module.
Command:
set dl 132:g:p
where 132:g:p = virtual port on LGM Module
See the “LINK Gateway Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
14. Verify the LGM datalink configuration by displaying the parameters.
Command:
dsp dl 132:g:p
NOTE:
The LGM datalink parameters will take effect upon connection of the
TDM channel.
15. Configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between the T1M, E1M, or SDM Module
synchronous port and the LGM Module virtual port. This connection transports the LINK/+
ILC aggregate to/from the LGM Module. Refer to the "TDM Channel Configuration" chapter
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-155
To define the connection from a T1M or E1M port to the virtual port on theLGM Module,
use the command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:b
where n:s:p = physical port on T1M or E1M Module and b = the associated bundle carrying
the LINK/+ aggregate
To define the connection from an SDM port to the virtual port on the LGM Module, use the
command:
set ch tdm n:s:p
To define the connection from the virtual port on the LGM Module to the T1M, E1M, or
SDM port, use the command:
set ch tdm 132:g:p
Commands:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:b (T1M or E1M)
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:b (SDM)
dsp ch tdm 132:g:p
17. After configuring the TDM channel, connect the channel to cause all of the parameters to take
effect.
Command:
con ch n:s:p:b (T1M or E1M)
con ch n:s:p (SDM)
18. At the LINK/+ node, configure a routing table to define the routes to the ST node.
Command:
def rte xxxx
where xxxx = ST node number
19 Verify the routing table information.
Command:
dsp rte xxxx
20. At the ST node, configure a static routing table to define the routes to the LINK/+ node or ST
gateway node.
Command:
set srte xxxx:y
where xxxx = LINK/+ or ST node number and y = routing table entry
21. Verify the static routing table information.
4-156
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
dsp srte xxxx:y
Procedure 4-48. Configuring Synchronous Data Connections to SDM
Ports
To configure connections between LINK/+ synchronous data ports and ST node SDM ports
(Figure 4-31):
1.
At the ST node, determine that there is enough bandwidth on the LGM datalink for the
channels to be configured.
Command:
dsp st dl avail_bw
If required, configure an LGM datalink according to Procedure 4-46.
2.
At the LINK/+ node, configure a synchronous data channel for each synchronous port. Refer
to the “Synchronous I/O Channel Parameters” chapter inthe LINK/2+ Configuration
Planning Manual or the “Channel Configuration” chapter in theentréeLINK+ Design and
Configuration Manual for parameter descriptions.
Command:
def ch/module n:ss:c
where module = synchronous module type andn:ss:c = channel associated with synchronous
port
NOTE:
3.
If the LINK/+ connect mode is set to originate, the ST connect mode
must be set to user. If the LINK/+ connect mode is set to terminate,
the ST connect mode can be set to either auto or user.
Verify the synchronous data channel configuration by displaying the channel parameters.
Command:
dsp ch n:ss:c
4.
At the ST node, configure the synchronous I/O ports on the SDM Module(s) for each subrate
channel. Refer to the " Synchronous Port Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter
descriptions.
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-157
ST GATEWAY NODE
LINK FRAME IN ILC
AGGREGATE FORMAT
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
B
C
D
SDM
LGM
DATALINK
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
I/O
SYNC
DATA
ILC, ILQ
A
LGM
LINK/+ NODE
SYNC
DATA
ONE OR MORE LINK/+ CHANNELS
1. IF REQUIRED, CONFIGURE AN LGM DATA LINK AND A TDM CHANNEL
DEFINITION BETWEEN B AND C .
2. CONFIGURE SYNCHRONOUS DATA CHANNELS AT A .
3. CONFIGURE SDM PORTS AT D .
4. FOR EACH SDM PORT, CONFIGURE A TDM CHANNEL DEFINITION BETWEEN
D AND A CORRESPONDING TRANSLATION TABLE ENTRY.
5. AT THE LINK/+ NODE, FOR EACH SYNCHRONOUS DATA PORT, CONFIGURE A
CHANNEL CONNECTION BETWEEN A AND THE FIRST ENTRY IN THE
CORRESPONDING SEGMENT OF THE TRANSLATION TABLE.
Figure 4-31. LINK/+ Sync Data to SDM Sync Data
5.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
6.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
If you are reconfiguring an already configured SDM port, reset the port to cause all of the
Command:
rst port n:s:p
4-158
STCPSUG
7/31/97
NOTE:
7.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
8.
For each SDM port, configure a TDM channel definition between the SDM port and the
corresponding entry in the channel translation table. Refer to the “TDM Channel
Configuration” and “LINK Gateway Configuration” chapters in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions.
Command:
set ch tdm n:s:p
NOTE:
9.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
10. At the ST node, define an entry inthe channel translation table to provide a destination
channel for the TDM channel connection from each SDM port. Refer to the “LINK Gateway
Configuration” chapter in the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Command:
set tra n:s:entry#
where n:s:entry# is the channel translation table entry
11. Verify the channel translation table entry by displaying the translation table.
Command:
dsp tra n:s:entry#
12. At the LINK/+ node, configure a channel connection between each synchronous data port and
the first entry in the corresponding segment of the ST node channel translation table. Refer to
the “Configuration Commands” chapter in theLINK/2+ User’s Guide or entréeLINK+
Technical Reference Manual for information on defining channel connections.
Command:
def con
or
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-159
def dst ch
13. Connect the channels.
If the LINK/+ end of a channel connection has theconnect parameter defined as terminator,
connect the channel from the ST end. For each SDM port, connect the TDM channel. This
will cause all of the parameters to take effect.
Command:
con ch n:s:p
If the LINK/+ end of a channel connection has theconnect parameter defined as originator,
connect the channel from the LINK/+ end. For each synchronous data port, connect the
channel. This will also cause all of the parameters to take effect. Refer to theLINK/2+ User’s
Guide or entréLINK+Technical Reference Manual for information on connecting channels.
Command:
con ch
Procedure 4-49. Configuring Synchronous Data Connections to AD-10
Ports
To configure connections between LINK/+ node synchronous ports and ST node AD-10
synchronous ports (Figure 4-32):
1.
Command:
dsp st dl avail_bw
2.
At the LINK/+ node, configure a synchronous datachannel for each synchronous port. Refer
to the “Synchronous I/O Channel Parameters” chapter in theLINK/2+ Configuration
Command:
where module = synchronous module type andn:ss:c = channel associated with synchronous
port
NOTE:
3.
Verify the synchronous data channel configuration by displaying the channel parameters.
Command:
dsp ch n:ss:c
4-160
STCPSUG
7/31/97
ST GATEWAY NODE
E
SDM
B
C
D
SGM/AG
LGM
DATALINK
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
I/O
ILC, ILQ
A
SYNC
DATA
LGM
LINK/+ NODE
AD-10
SYNC
DATA
LINK FRAME IN ILC
AGGREGATE FORMAT
AD-10 AGGREGATE
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
DEFINITION BETWEEN B AND C .
2. CONFIGURE SYNCHRONOUS DATA CHANNELS AT A .
3. CONFIGURE SGM/AG VIRTUAL PORT AT D FOR AD-10 AGGREGATE.
4. CONFIGURE SDM PORT AT E .
5. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN D AND E
FOR AD-10 AGGREGATE.
6. CONFIGURE AD-10 DATA PORTS AT D .
7. FOR THE SGM/AG PORT, CONFIGURE A TDM CHANNEL DEFINITION BETWEEN D
AND A CORRESPONDING TRANSLATION TABLE ENTRY.
8. AT THE LINK/+ NODE, FOR EACH SYNCHRONOUS DATA PORT, CONFIGURE A
CHANNEL CONNECTION BETWEEN A AND THE FIRST ENTRY IN THE
CORRESPONDING SEGMENT OF THE TRANSLATION TABLE.
Figure 4-32. LINK/+ Sync Data to AD-10 Sync Data
4.
At the ST node, configure an SGM/AG virtual port for the AD-10 aggregate. See "SGM/AG
Port Parameters" in the "AD-10 Configuration" chapter of theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Command:
set ag port 129:g:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-161
5.
Commands:
dsp ag port 129:g:p
NOTE:
6.
of the TDM channel.
-10.
Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for additional configuration
parameters.
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
7.
Verify the configuration of each SDM port by displaying the SDM port parameters
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
8.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
9.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
10. Configure reciprocal TDM channel connection between the TDM port defined at the
SGM/AG virtual port and the corresponding SDM synchronous data port. Refer to the "TDM
4-162
STCPSUG
7/31/97
To define the connection from the SDM port to the virtual port on the SGM Module, use the
command:
set ch tdm n:s:p
To define the connection from the virtual port on the SGM Module to the SDM port, use the
command:
set ch tdm 129:g:p
where 129:g:p = virtual port on SGM Module
Commands:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
dsp ch tdm 129:g:p
NOTE:
the subrate data.
12. For a newly configured TDM channel, the parameters will take effectupon connection of the
Command:
con ch n:s:p
NOTE:
connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p
NOTE:
13. Configure the AD-10 data ports. Refer to "Data Port Parameters" in the "AD-10
Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions. Also, see theSynchrony AD-10
User’s Guide for information on configuring AD-10 data ports. Prior to configuring, the
AD-10 data port is taken offline.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-163
Commands:
AD-10 port
Commands:
15. Activate the AD-10 data port configuration by issuing the following comm
ands in the order
shown:
16. For each AD-10 data port, configure a TDM channel definition between the SGM/AG virtual
port and a corresponding entry in the channel translation table. Refer to the “TDM Channel
Command:
where 129:g:p:e = channel associated with virtual port on SGM Module
NOTE:
Command:
18. At the ST node, define an entry in the channel translation table to provide a destination
channel for the TDM channel connection from each AD-10 data port associated with the
SGM/AG port. Refer to the “LINK Gateway Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter
descriptions.
Command:
set tra n:s:entry#
4-164
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
dsp tra n:s:entry#
20. At the LINK/+ node, configure a channel connection between each synchronous data port and
Command:
def con
or
def dst ch
connect the channel from the ST end. Connect each TDM channel associated with the
SGM/AG virtual port. This will cause all of the parameters to take effect.
Command:
con ch 129:g:p:e
Command:
con ch
Procedure 4-50. Configuring Synchronous/Asynchronous Data
Connections to AD-3/AD-7 Ports
To configure connections between LINK/+ node synchronous or asynchronous ports and ST node
AD-3 or AD-7 synchronous or asynchronous ports (Figure 4-33):
1.
Command:
dsp st dl avail_bw
2.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
At the LINK/+ node, configure a synchronous data channel for each synchronous port and an
asynchronous data channel for each asynchronous port. Refer to the “Synchronous I/O
Channel Parameters” and “Asynchronous I/O Channel Parameters” chapters in theLINK/2+
Configuration Planning Manual or the “Channel Configuration” chapter in the
entréeLINK+ Design and Configuration Manual for parameter descriptions.
4-165
ST GATEWAY NODE
ILC, ILQ
I/O
A
SYNC
DATA
LGM
DATALINK
C
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
LINK/+ NODE
LINK FRAME IN ILC
AGGREGATE FORMAT
LGM
D
E
F
RTM
I/O
B
ASYNC
DATA
AD-3/
AD-7
SYNC
DATA
ASYNC
DATA
SUBRATE CHANNELS IN
DEFINITION BETWEEN C AND D .
2. CONFIGURE SYNCHRONOUS DATA CHANNELS AT A AND ASYNCHRONOUS
DATA CHANNELS AT B .
3. CONFIGURE RTM PORT AT E .
4. CONFIGURE AD-3/AD-7 PORTS AT F .
5. FOR EACH AD-3/AD-7 PORT, CONFIGURE A TDM CHANNEL DEFINITION BETWEEN
F AND A CORRESPONDING TRANSLATION TABLE ENTRY.
6. AT THE LINK/+ NODE, FOR EACH SYNCHRONOUS OR ASYNCHRONOUS DATA
PORT, CONFIGURE A CHANNEL CONNECTION BETWEEN B AND THE FIRST
ENTRY IN THE CORRESPONDING SEGMENT OF THE TRANSLATION TABLE.
Figure 4-33. LINK/+ Sync/Async Data to AD-3 or AD-7 Sync/Async Data
Command:
where module = module type and n:ss:c = channel associated with synchronous or
asynchronous port
4-166
STCPSUG
7/31/97
NOTE:
3.
Verify the synchronous or asynchronous data channel configuration by displaying the channel
parameters.
Command:
dsp ch n:ss:c
4.
At the ST node, define the parameters for the port on the RTM module connected to the AD-3
or AD-7 access device. Refer to the "AD-3/AD-7 Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony
descriptions.
Command:
set rtm port n:s:p
5.
Command:
dsp rtm port n:s:p
6.
For a newly configured RTM port, after configuring the portparameters, logically insert the
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
7.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
8.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Configure the AD-3 or AD-7 access device ports. Refer to the "AD-3/AD-7 Configuration"
4-167
Commands:
set rtm ad n:s:p:e
set ad port n:s:p:e
9.
Verify the configuration for each AD-3 or AD-7 port by displaying the AD-3/AD-7 port
parameters.
Commands:
dsp rtm ad n:s:p:e
dsp ad port n:s:p:e
dsp ad port n:s:p:e
Command:
ins ad port n:s:p:e
Command:
rst ad port n:s:p:e
NOTE:
11. For each AD-3 or AD-7 synchronous or asynchronous port, configure a TDM channel
definition between the AD-3/AD-7 port and a corresponding entry in the channel translation
table. Refer to the “TDM Channel Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e
where n:s:p:e = physical port on AD-3 or AD-7 access device
NOTE:
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
channel for the TDM channel connection from each AD-3/AD-7 port. Refer to the “LINK
Gateway Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
4-168
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
set tra n:s:entry#
Command:
dsp tra n:s:entry#
15. At the LINK/+ node, configure a channel connection between each synchronous and
asynchronous data port and the first entry in the corresponding segment of the ST node
channel translation table. Refer to the “Configuration Commands” chapter in theLINK/2+
User’s Guide or entréeLINK+ Technical Reference Manual for information on defining
channel connections.
Command:
def con
or
def dst ch
connect the channel from the ST end. Connect each AD-3 or AD-7 channel. This will cause
all of the parameters to take effect.
Command:
con ch n:s:p:e
If the LINK/+ end of a channel connectionhas the connect parameter defined as originator,
Command:
con ch
Procedure 4-51. Configuring Analog Voice Connections
To configure connections between LINK/+ node analog voice ports and ST node AD-10 analog
voice ports (Figure 4-34):
1.
Command:
dsp st dl avail_bw
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-169
LINK/+ NODE
ST GATEWAY NODE
SDM
D
F
SGM/AG
B
VSM
E
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
ILC, ILQ
I/O
LGM
DATALINK
LGM
C
A
AD-10
LINK FRAME IN ILC
AGGREGATE FORMAT (IAF)
IN SUBRATE AGGREGATE FORMAT (SAF)
LINK/+ PCM VOICE CHANNELS
LINK/+ COMPRESSED VOICE CHANNELS
2. CONFIGURE VOICE CHANNELS AT A AND VOICE PROFILES AT B .
3. CONFIGURE SGM VIRTUAL PORT AT F FOR AD-10 AGGREGATE.
4. CONFIGURE SDM PORT AT E .
5. CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN E AND F
FOR AD-10 AGGREGATE.
6. CONFIGURE AD-10 VOICE PORTS AT F .
7. FOR THE SGM/AG PORT, CONFIGURE A TDM CHANNEL DEFINITION BETWEEN
F AND A CORRESPONDING TRANSLATION TABLE ENTRY.
8 AT THE LINK/+ NODE, FOR EACH ANALOG VOICE PORT, CONFIGURE A CHANNEL
CONNECTION BETWEEN A AND THE FIRST ENTRY IN THE CORRESPONDING
SEGMENT OF THE TRANSLATION TABLE.
Figure 4-34. LINK/+ Analog Voice to AD-10 Analog Voice
4-170
STCPSUG
7/31/97
2.
At the LINK/+ node, configure a voice channel for each analog voice. Refer to the “Analog
Voice Parameters” and “Voice Profile Parameters” chapters in theLINK/2+ Configuration
Commands:
where module = module type and n:ss:c = channel associated with analog voice port
def vpr vp
where vp = voice profile number
NOTE:
3.
Verify the analog voice channel and voice profile configuration by displaying the channel
parameters.
Commands:
dsp ch n:ss:c
dsp vpr vp
4.
Configure the SGM/AG virtual port and corresponding AD-10 network port for the AD-10
aggregate. Refer to the "AD-10 Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for SGM/AG virtual port
Command:
set ag port 129:g:p
5.
Command:
dsp ag port 129:g:p
NOTE:
6.
of the TDM channel.
-10.
Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for additional configuration
parameters.
Command:
set sdm port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-171
7.
Command:
dsp sdm port n:s:p
8.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
9.
port operations.
Determine the condition of the port by displaying the portstatus information.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
10. Configure a reciprocal TDM channel connection between the TDM port defined at the
SGM/AG virtual port and the corresponding synchronous data port for the AD-10 aggregate.
Commands:
set ch tdm n:s:p
where n:s:p = end of TDM channel connection at physical port on SDM Module and
129:g:p:e = end of TDM channel connection at virtual port on SGM Module
Commands:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p
NOTE:
the subrate data.
4-172
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
con ch n:s:p
NOTE:
connection.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p
NOTE:
13. Configure the SGM/AG and AD-10 voice ports. Refer to the "AD-10 Configuration" chapter
for parameter descriptions on SGM/AG voice ports. Also, see theSynchrony AD-10 User’s
Guide for information on configuring AD-10 voice ports. Prior to configuring, the AD-10
voice port is taken offline.
Commands:
port
14. Verify the AD-10 voice port configuration by displaying the parameters.
Commands:
15. Activate the AD-10 voice port configuration by issuing the following commands in the order
shown:
16. For each AD-10 voice port, configure a TDM channel definition between the SGM/AG
virtual port and a corresponding entry in the channel translation table. Refer to the “TDM
Channel Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-173
Command:
where 129:g:p:e = channel associated with virtual port on SGM Module
NOTE:
Command:
channel for the TDM channel connection from each AD-10 voice port associated with the
SGM/AG port. Refer to the “LINK Gateway Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning Manual for parameter
descriptions.
Command:
set tra n:s:entry#
Command:
dsp tra n:s:entry#
20. At the LINK/+ node, configure a channel connection between each analog voice channel and
Command:
def con
or
def dst ch
connect the channel from the ST end. Connect each TDM channel associated with the
SGM/AG virtual port. This will cause all of the parameters to take effect.
Command:
con ch 129:g:p:e
4-174
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
con ch
Procedure 4-52. Configuring PBX Voice Connections
To configure voice connections between a PBX at a LINK/+ node and a PBX at an ST node
(Figure 4-35):
1.
Command:
dsp st dl avail_bw
2.
At the LINK/+ node, define the T1 or E1 trunk and a digital voice channel for each DS0
bundle. Refer to the “Digital Voice and Channelized Services Parameters” chapter in the
LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions.
Commands:
def ds1 (for ILP Module trunk)
def ds0 (for ILP Module DS0)
or
def ilq (for ILQ Module trunk)
def bdl npr (for ILQ Module bundle)
NOTE:
3.
If the LINK/+ originator/terminator parameter is set to originate, the
ST connect mode must be set to user. If the LINK/+
originator/terminator parameter is set to terminate, the ST connect
mode can be set to either auto or user.
Verify the LINK/+ T1 or E1 trunk and digital voice channel configuration by displaying the
parameters.
Commands:
dsp ds1 (for ILP Module trunk)
dsp ds0 (for ILP Module DS0)
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-175
ST GATEWAY NODE
C
E
T1M/E1M
ASM
LGM
DATALINK
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
ILC, ILQ
ILP, ILQ
PBX
A
PBX
LINK/+ NODE
F
SGM
LINK FRAME IN ILC
AGGREGATE FORMAT
D
LGM
VSM
B
IN SUBRATE AGGREGATE FORMAT
LINK/+ PCM VOICE CHANNELS
LINK/+ COMPRESSED VOICE CHANNELS
1. IF REQUIRED, CONFIGURE AN LGM DATALINK AND A TDM CHANNEL
2. CONFIGURE DIGITAL VOICE CHANNELS AT A AND VOICE PROFILES AT B .
3. CONFIGURE A T1M/E1M PORT AT E .
4. CONFIGURE DS0 BUNDLES AT E .
5. CONFIGURE VOICE PROFILES.
6. FOR EACH DS0 BUNDLE, CONFIGURE A TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS BETWEEN E
AND A CORRESPONDING TRANSLATION TABLE ENTRY.
7. AT THE LINK/+ NODE, FOR EACH DIGITAL VOICE CHANNEL, CONFIGURE A
CHANNEL CONNECTION BETWEEN THE ASSOCIATED DS0 BUNDLE AT A
AND THE FIRST ENTRY IN THE CORRESPONDING SEGMENT OF THE TRANSLATION TABLE.
Figure 4-35. LINK/+ Node PBX to ST Node PBX
4-176
STCPSUG
7/31/97
or
dsp ilq (for ILQ Module trunk)
dsp bdl npr (for ILQ Module bundle)
4.
Define a voice profile for each DS0 voice channel. Refer to the “Voice Profile Parameters”
chapter in the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual for parameter descriptions.
Command:
def vpr vp
where vp = voice profile number
5.
Verify the voice profile configuration by displaying the parameters.
Command:
dsp vpr vp
6.
At the ST node, for the T1M or E1M Module connected to the PBX, configure the T1/E1 port
to provide an interface to the digital PBX. Each bundle defined as part of T1/E1 port
configuration corresponds to a single PCM DS0 to be compressed. Refer to the "T1 Port
Configuration" or "E1 Port Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Command:
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
7.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
8.
For a newly configured port, after configuring the T1M or E1M port parameters, logically
Command:
ins port n:s:p
If you are reconfiguring an already configured T1M or E1M port, reset the port to causethe
Command:
rst port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-177
NOTE:
9.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
10. At the T1M or E1M port, configure the DS0 PCM bundles. Refer to the "Bundle
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
If you are reconfiguring an already configured bundle, reset the bundle to cause all of the
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
NOTE:
port operations.
13. Configure a voice profile for each unique voice circuit requirement. Refer to the “Voice
Profile Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Commands:
set voice prf net x
where x = voice profile index entry
4-178
STCPSUG
7/31/97
14. Verify the voice profile configuration by displaying the parameters.
Commands:
dsp voice prf net x
15. Configure a TDM channel definition between the T1M or E1M bundle and the corresponding
entry in the channel translation table. Refer to the “TDM Channel Configuration” chapter in
Command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e
where n:s:p:e = channel associated with physical port on T1M or E1M Module
NOTE:
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
channel for the TDM channel connection for each bundle of the T1M or E1M port that
interfaces to the digital PBX. Refer to the “LINK Gateway Configuration” chapter in the
Command:
set tra n:s:entry#
Command:
dsp tra n:s:entry#
19. At the LINK/+ node, configure a channel connection between each DS0 bundle and the first
entry in the corresponding segment of the ST node channel translation table. Refer to the
“Configuration Commands” chapter in theLINK/2+ User’s Guide for information on defining
channel connections.
Command:
def dst ds0
If the LINK/+ end of a channel connection has the connect parameter defined as terminator,
connect the channel from the ST end. Connect each TDM channel associated with a T1M or
E1M bundle. This will cause all of the parameters to take effect.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-179
Command:
con ch n:s:p:e
connect the channel from the LINK/+ end. For each DS0 bundle, connect the channel. This
will also cause all of the parameters to take effect. Refer to theLINK/2+ User’s Guide for
information on connecting channels.
Command:
con ds0
Configuring PBX Networking Parameters
The D-Channel Server Module (DSM) allows an ST network to perform as a transit PBX in a
Private Branch Exchange (PBX) network. In this implementation, the ST network provides
distributed call switching among the ST nodes to PBXs at the edges of the network. The DSM
Module supports both DPNSS and QSIG common channel signaling (CCS) protocols that use a
message-based signaling protocol carried in the D-channel (64 kbps DS0 time slot) of a T1 or E1
framed facility interfacing to the DSM Module.
that the required INLs and modules have been properly configured. Refer to the "Configuring
Internodal Link Parameters" or "Configuring Module Parameters" procedures for additional
information.
Procedure 4-53. Configuring PBX Networking Parameters -Central
DSM Module
To configure PBX networking parameters for PBXs using a central DSM Module (Figure 4-36):
1.
For each B-channel requirement, configure the network level voice profiles. Refer to the
“Voice Profile Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
NOTE:
4-180
STCPSUG
7/31/97
C
PBX
INL
T1M/E1M
INL
ST NODE
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
T1M/E1M
PBX
A
ST NODE
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
ST NODE
ASM
SGM
DSM
ASM
SGM
B
B-CHANNELS
1. CONFIGURE NETWORK LEVEL VOICE PROFILES.
2. CONFIGURE NODE LEVEL VOICE PROFILES.
IN SUBRATE AGGREGATE FORMAT
3. CONFIGURE T1M OR E1M PORTS AT A AND C .
D-CHANNELS
4. CONFIGURE BUNDLES AT A AND C FOR B-CHANNELS.
5. CONFIGURE BUNDLES AT A AND C FOR D-CHANNELS.
6. CONFIGURE D-CHANNEL VIRTUAL PORTS AT B .
7. FOR EACH D-CHANNEL, CONFIGURE B-CHANNEL DIRECTION AT B .
8. FOR EACH D-CHANNEL, CONFIGURE EXCHANGE CODES AT B .
9. FOR EACH D-CHANNEL, CONFIGURE PROTOCOLS AT B .
10. FOR EACH D-CHANNEL, CONFIGURE QUALITY OF SERVICE TABLE AT B .
11. FOR EACH D-CHANNEL, CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS
12. FOR EACH B-CHANNEL, SET TDM CHANNEL CTRL PARAMETER TO ENABLE AND
CONNECT_MODE PARAMETER TO USER.
Figure 4-36. PBX Networking (Central DSM Module)
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-181
Command:
set voice prf net x
where x is the network level voice profile index entry
2.
Verify the network level voice profile configuration by displaying the network level voice
profile parameters.
Command:
dsp voice prf net x
3.
For each B-channel requirement, configure the corresponding node level voice profiles. Refer
to the “Voice Profile Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
NOTE:
Command:
where x is the same index entry number that was used for the network level voice profile
4.
Verify the node level voice profile configuration by displaying the node level voice profile
parameters.
Command:
5.
At each T1M or E1M that connects to a Private Branch Exchange (PBX), configure the port
to provide an interface to the PBX. Refer to the "T1 Port Configuration" or "E1 Port
Command:
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
where n:s:p = port on T1M or E1M Module associated with PBX
6.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
7.
4-182
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
ins port n:s:p
If you are reconfiguring an already configured T1M or E1M port, reset the port to cause all of
the parameters to take effect.
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
8.
port operations.
Determine the condition of the port by displaying the port status informationl
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
9.
For each T1 or E1 port, configure the bundles carrying the B-channels and D-channel. Refer
to the "Bundle Configuration" chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
bundle to cause all of the bundle parameters to take effect.
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
If you are reconfiguring an already configured bundle, reset the bundle to cause all of the
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
NOTE:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
port operations.
4-183
12. Configure a virtual port for each D-channel that connects to the DSM Module. Refer to the
“PBX Networking Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Command:
set dch port 131:g:p
where 131:g:p = D-channel virtual port on DSM Module
13. Verify the configuration for each D-channel virtual port by displaying the D-channel port
parameters.
Command:
dsp dch port 131:g:p
NOTE:
The D-channel virtual port parameters will take effect upon
14. For each D-channel, configure the call direction of each B-channel. Refer to the “PBX
Networking Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Command:
set dch bch 131:g:p:b
where 131:g:p:b = B-channel bundle associated with the D-channel virtual port
15. Verify each B-channel configuration by displaying the B-channel parameter.
Command:
dsp dch bch 131:g:p:b
NOTE:
The B-channel call direction parameter will take effect upon
connection of the associated D-channel.
16. Define the exchange code entries for each D-channel in the network. Refer to the “PBX
Command:
set dch exch 131:g:p:x
where 131:g:p is the virtual port on the DSM Module associated with the D-channel andx is
the exchange code entry number
17. Verify each exchange code entry by displaying the exchange code entry parameters.
Command:
dsp dch exch 131:g:p:x
18. For newly configured exchange code entries, the entries will take effect when the associated
D-channel is connected.
If you are reconfiguring existing exchange code entries, update the D-channel virtual port to
4-184
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
update port 131:g:p
19. Define the protocol attributes for the DSM Module D-channels. Refer to the “PBX
Command:
set dch dpnss 131:g:p
or
set dch qsig 131:g:p
where 131:g:p is the virtual port on the DSM Module associated with a specific D-channel
NOTE:
Although all D-channels on a DSM Module must be configured to use
the same protocol, the parameters must be configured independently
for each D-channel virtual port.
20. Verify the D-channel protocol configuration by displaying the protocol parameters.
Command:
dsp dch dpnss 131:g:p
or
dsp dch qsig 131:g:p
21. For newly configured D-channel protocols, the entries will take effect when the associated Dchannel is connected.
If you are reconfiguring existing D-channel protocols, reset the bundle associated with the Dchannel to cause the changed parameters to take effect.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:b
22. Configure the Quality of Service (QOS) tables for each D-channel. Refer to the “PBX
Command:
set dch qos 131:g:p:x
where 131:g:p is the virtual port on the DSM Module associated with the specific D-channel
and x is the QOS table entry
23. Verify the QOS table entry for each D-channel by displaying the entry.
Command:
dsp dch qos 131:g:p:x
24. For newly configured QOS table entries, the entries will take effect when the associated Dchannel is connected.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-185
If you are reconfiguring existing QOS table entries, update the D-channel virtual port to cause
the changed parameters to take effect.
Command:
update port 131:g:p
25. For each D-channel, configure reciprocal TDM channel definitions between each T1M or
E1M port D-channel bundle and the corresponding DSM Module D-channel virtual port. This
connection transports the PBX D-channel to/from the DSM Module. Refer to the "TDM
To define the connection from the T1M or E1M port to the D-channel virtual port on the
DSM Module, use the command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:b
where n:s:p = T1M or E1M port and b = DS0 bundle associated with the D-channel
To define the connection from the D-channel virtual port on the DSM Module to the T1M or
E1M bundle, use the command:
set ch tdm 131:g:p
Commands:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:b
dsp ch tdm 131:g:p
27. After configuring a TDM channel, connect the channel. This will cause all of the parameters
to take effect.
Command:
con ch n:s:p:b
NOTE:
The connection cannot be initiated from the virtual port.
28. For each B-channel, set the TDM channelctrl parameter to enable and the connect_mode
parameter to user.
Command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:b ctrl=ena connect_mode=user
where n:s:p = the T1M or E1M port and b = DS0 bundle associated with the B-channel
29. Verify each TDM channel configuration by displaying thectrl and connect_mode parameters.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:b ctrl connect_mode
NOTE:
4-186
A B-channel connection is initiated when the calling phone goes offhook at the PBX.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Procedure 4-54. Configuring PBX Networking Parameters -Local DSM
Modules
To configure PBX networking parameters for PBXs using local DSM Modules (Figure 4-37):
1.
NOTE:
Command:
set voice prf net x
2.
profile parameters.
Command:
dsp voice prf net x
3.
NOTE:
Command:
4.
parameters.
Command:
5.
Command:
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-187
ST NODE
ST
NETWORK
INL
PACKET
SUBNET
SGM
ASM
DSM
SGM
C
ASM
B
DSM
D
PBX
INL
T1M/E1M
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
T1M/E1M
PBX
A
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
ST NODE
B-CHANNELS
3. CONFIGURE T1M OR E1M PORTS AT A AND D .
D-CHANNELS
PERMANENT VIRTUAL CIRCUITS
4. CONFIGURE BUNDLES AT A AND D FOR B-CHANNELS.
5. CONFIGURE BUNDLES AT A AND D FOR D-CHANNELS.
6. CONFIGURE D-CHANNEL VIRTUAL PORTS AT B AND C .
7. FOR EACH D-CHANNEL, CONFIGURE B-CHANNEL DIRECTION AT B AND C .
8. FOR EACH D-CHANNEL, CONFIGURE EXCHANGE CODES AT B AND C .
9. FOR EACH D-CHANNEL, CONFIGURE PROTOCOLS AT B AND C .
10. FOR EACH D-CHANNEL, CONFIGURE QUALITY OF SERVICE TABLES AT B AND C .
11. FOR EACH D-CHANNEL, CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM CHANNEL DEFINITIONS
12. FOR EACH B-CHANNEL, SET TDM CHANNEL CTRL PARAMETER TO ENABLE,
AND CONNECT_MODE PARAMETER TO USER.
13. CONFIGURE FRAME RELAY CHANNELS BETWEEN DSM IDCPs.
Figure 4-37. PBX Networking (Local DSM Modules)
4-188
STCPSUG
7/31/97
6.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
7.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
8.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
9.
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-189
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
NOTE:
port operations.
12. Configure a virtual port for each D-channel that connects to a DSM Module. Refer to the
Command:
parameters.
Command:
NOTE:
14. For each D-channel, configure the B-channel call direction. Refer to the “PBX Networking
Command:
15. Verify each B-channel configuration by displaying the B-channel parameters.
Command:
NOTE:
16. Define the exchange code entries in each DSM Module for each D-channel in the network.
Refer to the “PBX Networking Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Command:
4-190
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
If you are reconfiguring existing exchange code entries, update the D-channel virtual port to
Command:
update port 131:g:p
19. Define the D-channel protocol attributes for each DSM Module. Refer to the “PBX
Command:
or
NOTE:
Command:
or
If you are reconfiguring existing D-channel protocol parameters, reset the bundle associated
with the D-channel to cause the changed parameters to take effect.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:b
Command:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-191
Command:
update port 131:g:p
Command:
To define the connection from the T1M or E1M port D-channel bundle to the D-channel
virtual port on the DSM Module, use the command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e
E1M port, use the command:
set ch tdm 131:g:p
Commands:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:b
dsp ch tdm 131:g:p
to take effect.
Command:
con ch n:s:p:b
NOTE:
parameter to user.
Command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e ctrl=ena connect_mode=user
4-192
STCPSUG
7/31/97
where n:s:p = T1M or E1M port and b = the DS0 bundle associated with the B-channel
29. Verify each TDM B-channel configuration by displaying thectrl and connect_mode
parameters.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:b ctrl connect_mode
NOTE:
31. For each DSM Module, configure frame relay channels between the InterDSM
Communications Port (IDCP) and the IDCP on every other DSM Module in the network.
Refer to the “Packet Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Management Configuration Planning Manual for configuration information.
Command:
set ch fr n:s:65:e
where n:s:65 = the IDCP port on the DSM Module and e = the assigned DLCI
32. Verify each frame relay channel configuration by displaying the frame relay channel
parameters.
Command:
dsp ch fr n:s:65:e
Command:
con ch n:s:65:e
Command:
rst ch n:s:65:e
Procedure 4-55. Configuring PBX Networking Parameters Remote/Local DSM Modules
To configure PBX networking parameters for PBXs using both remote and local DSM Modules
(Figure 4-38):
1.
NOTE:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-193
Command:
set voice prf net x
2.
profile parameters.
Command:
dsp voice prf net x
3.
NOTE:
Command:
4.
parameters.
Command:
5.
Command:
set t1m port n:s:p
or
set e1m port n:s:p
6.
Command:
dsp t1m port n:s:p
or
dsp e1m port n:s:p
4-194
STCPSUG
7/31/97
ST NODE
PACKET
SUBNET
C
SGM
DSM
SGM
B
ASM
PBX
INL
D
T1M/E1M
INL
ST
NETWORK
DSM
INL
ST NODE
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
T1M/E1M
PBX
A
T1M, E1M,
OR SDM
ST NODE
ASM
1. CONFIGURE T1M OR E1M PORTS AT A AND D .
2. CONFIGURE BUNDLES AT A AND D FOR B-CHANNELS.
3. CONFIGURE BUNDLES AT A AND D FOR D-CHANNELS.
B-CHANNELS
4. CONFIGURE D-CHANNEL VIRTUAL PORTS AT B AND C .
5. FOR EACH D-CHANNEL, CONFIGURE RECIPROCAL TDM
CHANNEL DEFINITIONS (e.g., A TO B AND B TO A ).
6. FOR EACH B-CHANNEL, SET TDM CHANNEL CTRL
PARAMETER TO ENABLE.
D-CHANNELS
PERMANENT VIRTUAL CIRCUITS
7. CONFIGURE B-CHANNEL DIRECTION AT B AND C .
8. CONFIGURE EXCHANGE CODES AT B AND C .
9. CONFIGURE PROTOCOLS AT B AND C .
12. CONFIGURE QUALITY OF SERVICE TABLES AT B AND C .
13. CONFIGURE FRAME RELAY CHANNELS BETWEEN DSM IDCPs.
Figure 4-38. PBX Networking (Remote/Local DSM Modules)
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-195
7.
Command:
ins port n:s:p
Command:
rst port n:s:p
NOTE:
8.
port operations.
Command:
dsp st port n:s:p
9.
Command:
set bdl n:s:p:b
Command:
dsp bdl n:s:p:b
Command:
ins bdl n:s:p:b
Command:
rst bdl n:s:p:b
4-196
STCPSUG
7/31/97
NOTE:
port operations.
12. Configure a virtual port for each D-channel that connects to the DSM Module. Refer to the
Command:
parameters.
Command:
NOTE:
14. For each D-channel, configure the B-channel call direction. Refer to the “PBX Networking
Command:
15. Verify each B-channel configuration by displaying the B-channel parameters.
Command:
NOTE:
16. Define the exchange code entries in the DSM Module for each D-channel in the network.
Refer to the “PBX Networking Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Command:
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-197
Command:
If you are reconfiguring existing exchangecode entries, update the D-channel virtual port to
Command:
update port 131:g:p
19. Define the protocol attributes for the DSM Module D-channels. Refer to the “PBX
Command:
or
NOTE:
Command:
or
If you are reconfiguring existing D-channel protocol parameters, reset the bundl
e associated
with the D-channel to cause the changed parameters to take effect.
Command:
rst ch n:s:p:b
Command:
4-198
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command:
Command:
update port 131:g:p
To define the connection from the T1M or E1M port D-channel bundle to the D-channel
virtual port on the DSM Module, use the command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:b
E1M port, use the command:
set ch tdm 131:g:p
Commands:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e
dsp ch tdm 131:g:p
to take effect.
con ch n:s:p:b
NOTE:
parameter to user.
Command:
set ch tdm n:s:p:e ctrl=ena connect_mode=user
where n:s:p:e is the channel associated with the DS0 bundle representing the B-channel
STCPSUG
7/31/97
4-199
29. Verify each TDM B-channel configuration by displaying thectrl and connect_mode
parameters.
Command:
dsp ch tdm n:s:p:e ctrl connect_mode
NOTE:
31. For each DSM Module, configure frame relay channels between the InterDSM
Communications Port (IDCP) and the IDCP on every other DSM Module in the network.
Refer to the “Packet Configuration” chapter in theSynchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth
Management Configuration Planning Manual for configuration information.
Command:
set ch fr n:s:65:e
where n:s:65 = the IDCP port on the DSM Module and e = the assigned DLCI
32. Verify each frame relay channel configuration by displaying the frame relay channel
parameters.
Command:
dsp ch fr n:s:65:e
Command:
con ch n:s:65:e
Command:
rst ch n:s:65:e
4-200
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Appendix
A
CPS Node Configuration
To assist in using the CPS for node configuration, this appendix provides:
• An overview of the required node configuration steps
• A cross-reference between CPS commands and the configuration parameter subgroups
described in the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management Configuration Planning
Manual
Node Configuration Steps
1.
Initialize the node’s configuration database
Use the flush db command to force the node’s database to be invalid so that it can then be flushed using the rst
node command.
Use the rst node command to flush the database, returning it to the factory default values.
2.
Set the system profile, node management, and master clock
configuration
Use the set sys command to define the node number, node type, partition assignment, number of shelves, and node
clock mode/priority. Although not required for node operation, the node name, location, contact, and description
can also be set.
3.
Set the IP access configuration
Use the set ip offline command to define the subnet table. Use the rst ip command to copy the offline table to the
online table. If the node is a root node, use the set ip prf command to define the subnet mask, root gateway ip
address, root gateway mask, Ethernet protocol, and default external gateway ip.
4.
Set the trap access and alarm configuration
Use the add alm log command to set the size of each alarm log to be defined. Use the set alm log command to
define the notification list and partition assignment for each alarm log. If the node is a root node, use the set trap
command to define the trap access list.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
A-1
5.
Set the node access configuration
Use the set node_list command to define the channel profile list, throughput, and node access list for each
partition at the node. If the node is a root node, use the set nms command to define the root access list.
6.
Define community profiles
Use the set cmnty command to define the level of access to each of the MIB subgroups for each community to be
defined in each partition at the node.
7.
Define the clock fallback list
Use the set clk fbk command to define the clock fallback table for the node.
8.
Define the channel profiles
Use the set ch prf command to define the channel profiles. Channel profiles are a network level resource; that is
the same set of profiles are defined at each node in the network.
9.
Define the voice profiles
Use the set voice prf net command to define the network level voice profiles and use the set voice prf node
command to define the node level voice profiles. The network level voice profiles are a network level resource;
that is the same set of profiles are defined at each node in the network.
10.
Define at least one INL
For Synchrony Network Management System to access a node, an INL path must be defined from the root node to
be used as the network management system point of access to each node in the network. To define an INL:
• Use the set module command to define the configuration for the T1M, E1M, or SDM on which
the INL will be defined.
• Use the set port command to define the port for the INL. If a T1 or E1 port is used, configure a
bundle using the set bdl command.
• Use the set inl command to define the INL characteristics.
Repeat the above at the node defined as the INL destination. The INL characteristics defined at the destination INL
must match the source characteristics.
11.
Reset the node
Use the rst node command to activate the configuration settings.
A-2
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command/Configuration Parameter Cross-Reference
To assist in Synchrony network configuration, Table A-1 lists CPS commands which correspond to the
configuration parameter subgroups described in the Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 Bandwidth Management
Configuration Planning Manual. Refer to the chapter indicated for parameter descriptions.
Table A-1. CPS Configuration Commands
To set values for . .
Use the CPS
command(s) . . .
Refer to the "Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20
Bandwidth Management Configuration
Planning Manual" . . .
Network Configuration
Network level voice profile
parameters
set voice prf net
Voice Profile Configuration Chapter
System profile parameters
set sys
Node Administration Configuration Chapter
IP access parameters
set ip prf
set ip offline
IP Access Configuration Chapter
Root access parameters
set nms
Node Access Configuration Chapter
Node access parameters
set node_list
Community profile parameters
set cmnty
Alarm log parameters
add alm log
set alm log
Alarm and Trap Configuration Chapter
Trap access parameters
set trap
Alarm and Trap Configuration Chapter
Craft Person Interface (CPI)
access parameters
set sys
CPI parameters
set cpi
CPI and Modem Configuration Chapter
Modem access parameters
set mdm
CPI and Modem Configuration Chapter
Node management parameters
set sys
set shelf
Master clock list parameters
set sys
Clock fallback list parameters
set clk fbk
Clocking Configuration Chapter
Channel profile parameters
set ch prf
Channel Profile Configuration Chapter
Node level voice profile
parameters
set voice prf node
Voice Profile Configuration Chapter
Software download parameters
set sfload
Node Configuration
STCPSUG
7/31/97
A-3
Table A-1. CPS Configuration Commands (Cont’d)
Use the CPS
command(s) . . .
Module configuration parameters
set module
Module Configuration Chapter
Server module specific
parameters
set ag module
set asm module
set fsm16 module
set fsm64 module
set dsm module
set lgm module
Module Configuration Chapter
Module Configuration
I/O Port, Bundle, and INL Configuration
Synchronous port parameters
set sdm port
Synchronous Port Configuration Chapter
T1 port parameters
set t1m port
T1 Port Configuration Chapter
E1 port parameters
set e1im port
E1 Port Configuration Chapter
T1/E1 bundle parameters
set bdl
Bundle Configuration Chapter
Internodal link parameters
set inl
Internodal Link Configuration Chapter
LINK Gateway Configuration
LGM port parameters
set dl
LINK/+ Gateway Configuration Chapter
Static routing table parameters
set srte
Channel translation table
parameters
set tra
TDM and Packet Channel Configuration
TDM channel parameters
set ch tdm
TDM Channel Configuration Chapter
Frame server port parameters
set fsm port
Packet Configuration Chapter
Frame relay channel parameters
set ch fr
Packet Configuration Chapter
Trunk Group Configuration
ASM voice trunk group
parameters
set voice trunk
Trunk Group Configuration Chapter
SGM/AG trunk group parameters
set ag trunk
Trunk Group Configuration Chapter
X.50 port parameters
set x50 port
X.50 Configuration Chapter
X.50 circuit parameters
set x50 ckt
X.50 Configuration Chapter
X.50 Configuration
ISPBX Networking Configuration
A-4
D-Channel port parameters
set dch port
PBX Networking Configuration Chapter
B-Channel bundle parameters
set dch bch
Exchange code parameters
set dch exch
DPNSS protocol parameters
set dch dpnss
QSIG protocol parameters
set dch qsig
Qualtiy of service parameters
set dch qos
CDR log entry parameters
set partn dsm log
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Table A-1. CPS Configuration Commands (Cont’d)
Use the CPS
command(s) . . .
AD-10 SGM/AG port parameters
set ag port
AD-10 Configuration Chapter
AD-10 packet band parameters
set ag pkt
set ad10 pkt
AD-10 data port parameters
set ag data
set ad10 data
AD-10 voice port parameters
set ag voice
set ad10 voice
AD-3/AD-7 channel parameters
set rtm ad
AD-3/AD-7 Configuration Chapter
AD-3/AD-7 port parameters
set ad port
RTM port parameters
set rtm port
AD-10 Configuration
AD-3/AD-7 Configuration
STCPSUG
7/31/97
A-5
Appendix
B
Alarm and Error Messages
Table B-1 lists the alarms generated by an ST node. Alarms are classified by type (state or event) and severity
(critical, major, minor, and informational).
• A state alarm indicates a transition to an ongoing mode of operation (e.g., module failed or
module active).
• An event alarm indicates the occurrence of a significant action (e.g., module reset).
• A critical alarm indicates a state or event that interrupts normal node operation.
• A major alarm indicates a service-affecting failure. Such a failure requires correctiveaction
before the alarm can be cleared.
• A minor alarm indicates a state or event that does not necessarily affect service.
• An informational alarm indicates an acknowledgment from the node software. Typically, an
informational alarm is generated in response to a completed command.
When an alarm is generated, the affected network element address is reported (e.g., INL address n:s:p:b or virtual
port address t:g:p). For some alarms, a qualifier (e.g., INL number for INL alarms) and/or a reason for the alarm is
also indicated.
The alarms are listed by network resource and include the qualifiers and reasons that can be reported. N/A
indicates that no qualifier or reason is reported.
Table B-1. Alarm Summary
No.
Alarm
Type
Severity
Qualifier
Reason
1001
Softload client completed
Event
Informational
Module type
Softload of code was
completed. Alarm text includes
type of module that was
softloaded.
1002
Softload client failed
Event
Major
Mismatched module
type
Software does not match
module type.
Unknown module type
Module type not recognized by
software.
Insufficient flash
memory
Not enough flash memory to
complete loading of software.
Flash write error
Error in writing to flash PROM.
CRC error
Cyclic redundancy check error.
Softload Alarms
STCPSUG
7/31/97
B-1
Table B-1. Alarm Summary (Cont’d)
No.
Alarm
Type
Severity
Qualifier
Reason
Softload Alarms (Cont’d)
1002
Softload client failed
(Cont’d)
Event
Major
TFTP protocol error
Protocol problem in
transferring file
Invalid node identifier
Not a valid node number
Nonexistent file name
File name does not exist.
Cannot initiate comm
Cannot initiate communication
Invalid IP address of
softload sender
Invalid IP address of softload
sender
Invalid file name
extension
File name extension is not a
valid name.
Miscellaneous failure
Indicates a softload failure not
covered by any previously
listed conditions.
1003
Softload client standby
completed
Event
Informational
Module type
Transfer of software to
standby NCP completed
1004
Softload client standby
failed
Event
Major
Module type
Cannot communicate with
standby NCP
CRC error on standby NCP
CRC error on active NCP
1005
Softload server failed
Event
Major
Module type
No resource
Transmit failure
Receive failure
1006
Database copy to
standby completed
Event
Informational
Standby NCP address
Database was successfully
copied from active NCP to
standby NCP.
1007
Database copy to
standby failed
Event
Major
Standby NCP address
Active NCP database
corruption detected
Standby NCP removed
Node Alarms
2101
Node restart
Event
Critical
Active NCP slot
Node is active. Alarm text
identifies active NCP Module.
2102
Illegal IP access
Event
Minor
IP address
IP address is illegal. Alarm text
includes IP address.
2103
Illegal node access
Event
Minor
Root node partition ID
Root node address is illegal.
Alarm text includes root node
address.
2104
Slave PLL error
Event
Minor
N/A
Phase lock loop hardware
failure
2105
Clock qualifier circuit
error
Event
Minor
N/A
Hardware failure
2106
Clock fallback
Event
Informational
Index of fallback clock
Informational message
2107
Check clock qualifier
circuit
Event
Minor
N/A
No clock on clock fallback list
qualifies.
2108
Selected clock not
qualified
Event
Informational
Index of fallback clock
2109
Master PLL error
Event
Major
N/A
Master phase lock loop failure
210A
PLL hardware error
Event
Major
N/A
Hardware failure
B-2
STCPSUG
7/31/97
No.
Alarm
Type
Severity
Qualifier
Reason
Node Alarms (Cont’d)
210B
Configuration change
Event
Informational
network element
address
NOTE: A configuration change
alarm will be generated for
each individual parameter
configuration change that is
made.
210C
NCP boot revision
mismatch
Event
Major
N/A
Online and redundant NCP
boot code revisions do not
match.
210D
MIB schema mismatch
Event
Critical
NCP software
version/MIB schema
version
Online and redundant NCP
database versions do not
match.
2201
Shelf inserted
Event
Minor
N/A
Shelf is inserted in node.
2202
Shelf removed
Event
Minor
N/A
Shelf is removed from node.
2203
Shelf failed
Event
Critical
N/A
A shelf has failed. This
message is generated by an
upstream node.
2204
Shelf reset
Event
Major
N/A
Shelf, including all modules,
has been reset.
2205
Shelf invalid module
Event
Minor
Type and subtype
Shelf module configuration is
not valid. Alarm text includes
slot number, module type, and
subtype, if applicable.
2206
Shelf circuit toggled
Event
Major
LXM or RXM
RXM or LXM Module circuit
has toggled to alternate circuit.
Alarm text includes LXM or
RXM information.
2207
Shelf LXM circuit failed
Event
Major
Circuit number
An LXM circuit has failed.
Alarm text specifies upper
circuit (1) or lower circuit (2)
failure.
2208
Shelf RXM circuit failed
Event
Major
Circuit number
An RXM circuit has failed.
Alarm text specifies upper
circuit (1) or lower circuit (2)
failure.
2209
Shelf power supply failed
Event
Major
N/A
A power supply has failed in
the power system.
220A
Shelf fan failed
Event
Major
N/A
A fan has failed in the fan
assembly.
220B
Shelf temperature failed
Event
Major
N/A
The shelf is over temperature.
220C
Shelf power supply OK
Event
Informational
N/A
A shelf power problem has
been corrected.
220D
Shelf fan OK
Event
Informational
N/A
A shelf fan problem has been
corrected.
220E
Shelf temperature OK
Event
Informational
N/A
A shelf temperature problem
has been corrected.
Shelf Alarms
STCPSUG
7/31/97
B-3
No.
Alarm
Type
Severity
Qualifier
Reason
Module Alarms
2301
Module inserted
Event
Informational
N/A
Module is logically inserted.
This alarm is canceled by
module removed alarm.
2302
Module removed
Event
Informational
N/A
Module is logically removed.
module inserted alarm.
2303
Module updated
Event
Minor
N/A
Module is updated with
changed configuration
parameters.
2304
Module reset
Event
Minor
N/A
Module has been reset.
2305
Module active
State
Informational
N/A
Module is initialized and in
service.
2306
Module standby
State
Informational
N/A
Module is initialized and ready
for service. This alarm is
canceled by module failed
alarm.
2307
Module failed
State
Major
WDT expired
Watchdog timer has expired.
Reset detected
A module reset has been
detected.
OK line failure
Power supply OK. Cable
problem
N/A
Invalid message received
N/A
Shelf failed
B-4
N/A
Background diagnostics failure
Module RTS failure
Module run-time software
failure
N/A
Fatal start-up diagnostics
failure
N/A
MIB download failure
N/A
Module deleted
N/A
Module mismatch
N/A
No MIB
N/A
Out of memory
N/A
BSS error
N/A
Restarted standby module
N/A
Internal software failure
Module comm error
Communications problem
between NCP and other
module
Port failure
Failure occurred on port
associated with this module.
DSP failure
Failure of digital processing
engine
N/A
Module physically removed
N/A
Non-fatal startup diagnostics
failure (module operable)
STCPSUG
7/31/97
No.
Alarm
Type
Severity
Qualifier
Reason
Module Alarms (Cont’d)
2307
Module failed (Cont’d)
State
Major
N/A
Non-fatal background
diagnostics failure (module
operable)
2308
Standby module detected
Event
Informational
N/A
The NCP has detected that the
designated module is initialized
and ready for service.
2309
NCP background test
failed
Event
Major
Online or standby
NCP test failed
Module failed background
diagnostic tests.
230A
RTS alarm miscellaneous
Event
Major
Command ID
Diagnostic command failed.
BER change
Bit error rate is unacceptably
high.
N/A
Phasor error
DSP failure
Digital processing engine
failed.
Element loopback
failure
Diagnostic loopback test has
failed on module.
N/A
Number of loopbacks
exceeded.
N/A
Element not connected.
230B
RTS log threshold
Event
Minor
Log type/log ID
Call Detail Record log has
reached threshold.
230C
RTS log overflow
Event
Major
Log type/log ID
Call Detail Record log has
exceeded threshold.
230D
RTS table full
Event
Informational
Local or remote
routing table
Local or remote routing table is
full.
230E
RTS table overflow
Event
Major
Local or remote
routing table
Local or remote routing table
overflowed.
230F
RTS channel failure
State
Major
Channel type
Channel failed
2310
RTS channel connect
State
Informational
Channel type
Channel successfully
connected
2311
Non-fatal diagnostic
failure
Event
Minor
Diagnostic type
Module failed a non-fatal
diagnostic test
Port Alarms
2401
Port inserted
Event
Informational
Port address
Port is logically inserted and
ready for use.
2402
Port removed
Event
Informational
Port address
Port is logically removed and
not ready for service.
2403
Port reset
Event
Informational
Port address
Port is reinitialized with
changed configuration
parameters.
2404
Port updated
Event
Informational
Port address
Port parameters have been
updated.
2405
Port failed
Event
Major
Port address
RTS detected invalid MIB
DSP failure
Module reset
Invalid port message received
MIB download failure
STCPSUG
7/31/97
B-5
No.
Alarm
Type
Severity
Qualifier
Reason
Port Alarms (Cont’d)
2405
Port failed (Cont’d)
Event
Major
Port address
Out of memory
RTS loopback failure
Invalid INL assignment
Module failure
Port hardware failure
Port deleted
NCP detected invalid MIB
No MIB
Port reset
Bandwidth exceeded
Exceeded module capacity
INL failure
No bandwidth
2406
Port up
State
Major
Port address
2407
Port down
State
Major
Port address
New port is initialized. This
alarm is canceled by a port
failed alarm.
RTS detected invalid MIB
Module deleted
Module reset
Invalid port message received
RTS loopback failure
Port removed
Condition change:
red alarm
yellow alarm
LMI failure
clock failure
BER exceeds failure
threshold
invalid port message
received
configuration mismatch
download remote
out of service
local out-of-sync
remote out-of-sync
both local and remote
out-of-sync
pending
Server port disconnected
2408
Port in maintenance
State
Major
Port address
Port is in loopback.
2409
Port loopback cleared
State
Minor
Port address
Port loopback has been
cleared.
240A
Port BER quality change
Event
Minor
New BER level
The BER quality level has
changed for this port.
B-6
STCPSUG
7/31/97
No.
Alarm
Type
Severity
Qualifier
Reason
Port Alarms (Cont’d)
240B
Port change in
subcondition
State
Informational
N/A
240C
Port loopback failed
State
Major
Port address
Port condition (port up, port
down) has remained constant
while one of the following
subconditions has changed:
red alarm
yellow alarm
LMI failure
clock failure
BER over fail threshold
invalid port message
received
Server loopback failure
Invalid module state
240D
Port enabled
Event
Informational
Port address
Port has been enabled. This
alarm is canceled by Port
disabled alarm.
240E
Port disabled
Event
Informational
Port address
Port has been disabled. This
alarm is canceled by Port
enabled alarm.
2501
Bundle inserted
Event
Informational
N/A
Bundle has been logically
inserted. This alarm is
canceled by Bundle removed
alarm.
2502
Bundle removed
Event
Informational
N/A
Bundle has been logically
removed. This alarm is
canceled by Bundle inserted
alarm.
2503
Bundle reset
Event
Informational
N/A
Bundle has been reset.
2504
Bundle up
State
Major
N/A
New bundle is initialized. This
alarm is canceled by a Bundle
failed alarm.
2505
Bundle down
State
Major
N/A
Bundle is out of service.
2506
Bundle failed
Event
Minor
N/A
Bundle removed
Bundle Alarms
No MIB
Invalid MIB
2507
Bundle updated
Event
Informational
N/A
Bundle parameters have been
updated.
INL Alarms
2601
INL in service
State
Minor
INL number
INL is in service. This alarm is
canceled by an INL out of
service alarm.
2602
INL out of service
State
Major
INL number
INL deleted
STCPSUG
7/31/97
B-7
No.
Alarm
Type
Severity
Qualifier
Reason
INL Alarms (Cont’d)
2602
INL out of service
(Cont’d)
State
Major
INL number
INL out of service:
loopback cleared
revision level inconsistency
ARQ failure
INL device driver failure
port down due to red alarm
INL did not go in-service
after one minute
bad BER
2603
INL quality change
Event
Minor
INL number
Link quality change for INL.
Possible faulty INL. Alarm text
includes INL number, current
quality level, and current BER
level.
2604
INL in maintenance
State
Minor
INL number
INL is in loopback.
2605
INL loopback failed
Event
Minor
INL number
Loopback was initiated but not
in operation. Possible faulty
INL or module.
2606
INL clear loopback failed
Event
Minor
INL number
Attempt to clear loopback has
failed (usually because the INL
was not in loopback).
2607
INL inserted
Event
Informational
INL number
An internodal link has been
enabled.
2608
INL removed
Event
Informational
INL number
An internodal link has been
disabled.
2609
INL restarted
Event
Minor
INL number
An internodal link has been reenabled.
260A
INL loopback cleared
State
Informational
INL number
An INL loopback has been
successfully cleared.
260B
INL revision level error
Event
Minor
INL number
Remote INL number mismatch
Remote node number
mismatch
User partition mismatch
Software revision level
mismatch
ARQ CIR mismatch
Packet CIR mismatch
Max packet DS0 mismatch
Max TDM DS0 mismatch
Address mismatch
ARQ bandwidth and packet
CIR occupancy exceeds max
packet DS0
Insufficient ARQ CIR
260C
B-8
INL reset
Event
Informational
INL number
An INL has been reset.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
No.
Alarm
Type
Severity
Qualifier
Reason
Networkable Element Alarms
2701
Element inserted
Event
Informational
N/A
Element is logically inserted.
Element removed alarm.
2702
Element removed
Event
Informational
N/A
Element is logically removed.
Element inserted alarm.
2703
Element reset
Event
Informational
N/A
Element has been reset.
2704
Element updated
Event
Informational
N/A
Element has been updated
with changed configuration
parameters.
2705
Element failed
Event
Major
N/A
Invalid MIB
Insufficient bandwidth
No response from module
Exceeded module capacity
2706
Element up
Event
Informational
N/A
Element is initialized and ready
for service. This alarm is
canceled by Element down
alarm.
2707
Element down
Event
Informational
N/A
Element removed
Element reset
Start mode set to off
2708
Element loopback set
Event
Informational
N/A
Element has been placed in
loopback.
2709
Element loopback reset
Event
Informational
N/A
Element loopback has been
cleared.
2801
Set DLCI congestion
State
Informational
N/A
DLCI traffic has exceeded
acceptable levels for a
significant period.
2802
Clear DLCI congestion
State
Informational
N/A
DLCI congestion has been
reduced to acceptable levels.
DLCI Alarms
Channel Alarms
3101
Channel disconnect error
State
Minor
Channel type and
connect time
Source I/O unusable
Destination I/O unusable
No INL bandwidth
No server
3102
Connection attempt
failure
Event
Minor
Channel type
No source I/O MIB
No source channel profile
No destination channel profile
Source I/O unusable
Destination I/O unusable
Source channel MIB off
Destination channel MIB off
No destination channel MIB
No destination I/O MIB
STCPSUG
7/31/97
B-9
No.
Alarm
Type
Severity
Qualifier
Reason
Channel Alarms (Cont’d)
3102
Connection attempt
failure (Cont’d)
Event
Minor
Channel type
Device type mismatch
I/O speed mismatch
Partition ID mismatch
Bit mode mismatch
Signaling mismatch
Destination busy
Destination mismatch
No INL bandwidth
No server
Source exceeds shared
bandwidth.
Destination exceeds shared
bandwidth.
Link disconnect error
No bypass server
No source server
No destination server
No source SGM SAF
No destination SGM SAF
No source SGM SCF
No destination SGM SCF
No source SGM/AG SAF
No destination SGM/AG SAF
No source SGM/AG SCF
No destination SGM/AG SCF
No source ASM SAF
No destination ASM SAF
No source ASM SCF
No destination ASM SCF
No source LGM SAF
No destination LGM SAF
No source LGM SCF
No destination LGM SCF
No source RTM SAF
No destination RTM SAF
No source RTM SCF
No destination RTM SCF
No source voice port
No destination voice port
No route
B-10
STCPSUG
7/31/97
No.
Alarm
Type
Severity
Qualifier
Reason
Channel Alarms (Cont’d)
3103
Channel connect
State
Informational
Channel type and
connect time
A channel connection is
successfully established:
contention initiated
user initiated
auto connect
3104
Channel loopback failed
Event
Minor
N/A
Loopback was initiated but is
not in operation.
3105
Channel loopback
cleared
State
Minor
N/A
A channel loopback has been
successfully cleared.
3106
Channel in loopback
State
Minor
N/A
Channel is in loopback.
3107
Channel disconnect
State
Informational
Channel type and
connect time
Channel is disconnected:
contention terminated
user initiated
3108
Channel clear loopback
failed
Event
Minor
N/A
Attempt to clear a channel
loopback was unsuccessful.
3109
Channel degraded
service
State
Informational
Channel address
Service has become degraded
on this channel.
Access Device Alarms
4001
AD-10 alarm
Event
Major
For SGM/AG data or
CC configuration mismatch
voice channel
I/O port read/write fault
(t:g:p:e), the server
TOD test fault
port (n:s:p)
Watchdog test fault
E2 PROM write fault
E2 checksum fault
CPI download fault
CPI Rx FIFO fault
CPI loopback fault
Local hardware mismatch
GDI loopback fault
No mux
Internal fault
Rx clock error
Tx clock error
Rx FIFO over
Rx FIFO under
Tx FIFO over
Tx FIFO under
Invalid NID
Rx sync
Level 2 T/O
Same NID
Loss of synchronization
Hardware fault
A/B byte fault
STCPSUG
7/31/97
B-11
No.
Alarm
Type
Severity
Qualifier
Reason
Access Device Alarms (Cont’d)
4001
AD-10 alarm (Cont’d)
Event
Major
For SGM/AG data or
Mux side Rx over
voice channel
Mux side Rx under
(t:g:p:e), the server
Mux side Tx over
Mux side Tx under
HBER
Checksum test fault
RAM test fault
8 KHz test fault
SCC disabled
SCC parity error
SCC overrun
SCC underrun
CP level 3 T/O
Remote hardware and ST
ST configuration and AD-10
SCC Rx underrun
SCC Tx underrun
4002
AD-10 softload failed
Event
Major
For SGM/AG server
port (n:s:p)
Response timeout
Reset timeout
Info incorrect
AD-10 link down
B-12
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Table B-2 lists error messages that can be displayed by the CPS. The messages are listed in alphabetical order and
a brief description is provided for each message.
Table B-2. Error Messages
Message
Description
Attribute Is Read Only
A display keyword was inadvertently used in conjunction with a set command.
Boot Interrupted on Local Node
The boot process has been interrupted on the local node. To resume the
boot process, enter the terminal mode by pressing the F10 key and then
typing: go.
Command Failed
The NCP rejected the command.
Incomplete Response
A partial response was recieved from the NCP before the CPS timed out.
The response was not terminated by the standard CPI prompt.
Incorrect Attribute: Response
Ignored
The NCP responded with a different attribute than requested. The results are
ignored. This occurs most commonly when one keyword times out and
another is sent, then the NCP replies to the first keyword.
Incorrect Instance: Response
Ignored
The NCP responded with a different instance than requested. The results are
ignored. This occurs most commonly when one keyword times out and
another is sent, then the NCP replies to the first keyword.
Internal Transmit Error
Internal CPS transmit error; requires rebooting PC
Interrupted
The command was not completed because the CPS user typed Ctrl C.
Local Node Reset
The local node has been reset, and the boot messages were received as part
of the response to the last command.
No Response
The NCP did not respond to the command.
Node is Busy: Command was
Ignored
The NCP is busy processing a previous command or a higher priority task.
Node is Halted in DBG Monitor
Mode
All processing on the NCP has been halted and the NCP has been placed in
a debug monitor mode. To resume normal operation, enter the terminal
mode by pressing the F10 key and then typing: go. If this condition should
occur, contact Customer Support.
NOT_APPLIC
When no value is returned to the CPS by the NCP in response to a CPS
command, the CPS interprets this as not applicable. (NOTE: not_applic is
also a selection for certain keywords.)
Password Enabled: Login
Required
The command was rejected because passwords are enabled for CPI and the
user is not currently logged in.
Permission Denied: Insufficient
Login Access Level
The command was rejected because the user is currently logged in at a level
that does not allow the specified access.
Remote Node is not in Node List
The remote node specified is not in the local NCP’s node list.
Remote Node is Unreachable
The local NCP is unable to communicate with the remote node specified.
Success
The command was accepted by the NCP.
Undefined
There is nothing configured for the specified instance or keyword.
Unrecognized CPI Response
This is a generic error message when a complete response has been
received from the NCP, but the message format is not recognized by CPS.
This may result from extraneous or dropped characters. Re-issue the
command.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
B-13
Appendix
C
Status Parameters
Table C-1 provides descriptions of the status parameters.
Table C-1. Status Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Node Status (dsp st sys)
Status
Condition
Initializing
Node initializing
Online
Node online
Fail
Node failure
Normal
Exception
At least one port in node inoperative
Software Revision
current value
Node software revision number
MIB Revision
current value
MIB revision number
Up Time
current value
Elapsed online time
Error Minutes
0 to 1440
Number of errored minutes on bus in past 24
hours
Number of Shelves
1 to 4
Number of active shelves
Available Packet Bandwidth
current value
Available packet bandwidth in units of 64 kbps
current value
Total packet bandwidth in units of 64 kbps
Maximum Packet Bandwidth
Node Status: Master Clock Status (dsp st clk mstr)
Master Clock Priority
Master Clock Message
Master 1 to Master 16
For master clock nodes
Slave
Slave node
Asserting Master Mode
Alive and well
Default Internal
Fallback to internal oscillator
Unavailable
Node unavailable as master clock node
Node Status: Clock Fallback Status (dsp st clk fbk, dsp st sys)
Clock Table Index
1 to 8
Index for the currently active clock source on the
clock fallback table
Clock Status
Locked
Node locked to valid clock source
Locked Stable
Node locked to valid clock source, history
compiled for slave holdover
Locking
Node locking to presented clock source
Relocking
Clock source qualification
Slave Holdover
Clock source failure, seeking new valid clock
source (see Clock Substatus below)
Wait Internal
Determining clock source (locked to internal
oscillator)
STCPSUG
7/31/97
C-1
Table C-1. Status Parameter Descriptions (Cont’d)
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Node Status: Clock Status (dsp st clk fbk, dsp st sys) (Cont’d)
Clock Status (Cont’d)
Clock Substatus
Clock Source Type
Hardware Check
90-second clock qualifier and PLL circuitry check
Start-Up
State at start-up
Default Internal Oscillator
Locked to internal oscillator
Check Qualifier
For slave holdover or start-up, verification of
qualifier circuitry
Delay Fallback
For slave holdover, awaiting recovery of last valid
clock before shifting to next source on the clock
fallback list
Prequalify Clock
For slave holdover or start-up, prequalifying a
clock source
Qualify Invalid
For slave holdover or start-up, verifying that clock
is unusable prior to disqualifying
Qualify Valid
For slave holdover or start-up, final validation of a
clock source (3 minutes)
Requalifying
For slave holdover, locking to next available clock
source and returning to normal operation
Wait Invalid
Shifting to next available clock source
Wait Qualify
Preliminary validation of a prequalified clock
(30 sec)
Internal
Clock type of the currently active clock source
Station 1
Station 2
Port Receive Independent
Port Receive Dependent
Port Transmit
Clock Source Port
n:s:p
For an active port receive clock source, the port
address
Clock Source Priority
1 to 8
Priority of the currently active clock source
High
Quality of the currently active clock source
Clock Source Quality
Low
Clock Qualifier Status
Good
Clock qualifier and PLL circuitry verification
Error
Node Status: TDM Test Message Generator (dsp st mg tdm, dsp st sys)
Test Generator Status
Test Generator Type
Test Generator TDM
Channel
C-2
Idle
Generator inactive
Good
No errors detected in current test
Error
Error detected in current test
None
Generator inactive
Local
Generator directed to the local channel endpoint
Remote
Generator directed to the remote channel endpoint
n:s:p:e
Current channel address for generator. The test
message generator injects data into the I/O path
and is used in conjunction with a channel
loopback.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Node Status: Packet Test Message Generator (dsp st mg pkt)
Test Packet Gen Status
Active Local
State of test packet generator
Active Remote
Inactive
Test Packets Sent
current value
For active test packet generator, the number of
test packets sent
Test Packets Received OK
current value
test packets received without error
Test Packets Received Err
current value
errored test packets received
Test Packets Time Out
current value
test packets not received before time out
Ping Status
Active
Test packet generator is sending ping messages.
Inactive
Test packet generator is not sending ping
messages.
Pings remaining
current value
Number of times that ping message still has to be
sent
Comm Status
Active
DSM Module communications port packet channel
is active.
Inactive
DSM Module communications port packet channel
is inactive.
Node Status: CPI and Modem Status (dsp st sys)
CPI Status
Idle
Status of Craft Person Interface (CPI) port
In Session
Modem Status
Idle
Modem port idle
In CPS Session
Modem port in use by Craft Person Station (CPS)
In NMS Session
Modem port in use by Synchrony Network
Management System
Node Status: Softload Status (dsp st sfload)
File Name
current value
File name of software to be downloaded
Directory Name
current value
Directory location of file to be downloaded
Destination Port
current value
Softload destination module or port
Software Type
NCP
Specified software type
T1M
E1M
SGM
LGM
ASM
FSM
SDM
RTM
DSM
AD10
MAP
MIB
STCPSUG
7/31/97
C-3
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Node Status: Softload Status (dsp st sfload) (Cont’d)
Software Type (Cont’d)
ST_DB
AD10_DB
RTM_AD_DB
Source NMS Node
current value
Root node number of source workstation
Source NMS IP
current value
IP address of source workstation
Timeout
current value
Inactivity timeout in seconds
Softload Status
Idle
No softload in progress
Softloading
Softload in progress
Copying to Standby NCP
Copying software to redundant NCP
Copying to Module
Copying software to module
Success
Softload completed successfully
Not Match Module Type
Downloaded software does not match specified
software type
Unknown Module Type
Specified module type unrecognized
Out of Flash
Insufficient flash memory
Flash Write Error
Flash memory error
CRC Error
Cyclic redundancy check (CRC) error for software
copied to primary module
Communication Error
Receiver or transmitter error
Invalid Node ID
Specified node number invalid
Filename Does Not Exist
Specified file not found on server
Cannot Communicate with
Server
No response to client request for communication
(timeout)
Invalid IP Address
Specified workstation IP address invalid
Invalid Filename Ext
Specified file extension invalid
Cannot Communicate with
Standby
Online module unable to establish communication
with standby (redundant) module
Standby CRC Error
Cyclic redundancy check (CRC) error for software
copied from primary to standby module
Maximum Sessions in
Progress
Maximum softload sessions currently in progress
Loading in Progress
Softloading is currently in progress
Destination slot does busy
Destination module is
Invalid destination slot
Destination slot number is not valid
Misc Failure
Unspecified failure
Softload Total
current value
Total bytes to be softloaded
Softload Size
current value
Total bytes that have been softloaded (divide by
softload total for completion percentage)
NCP
Softload Software Type
T1M
E1M
SGM
LGM
ASM
C-4
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Node Status: Softload Status (dsp st sfload) (Cont’d)
Softload Software Type
(Cont’d)
FSM
SDM
RTM
DSM
AD10
MAP
MIB
ST_DB
AD10_DB
RTM_AD_DB
Node Status: Upload Status (dsp st upload)
Upload Status
Idle
No upload in progress
Uploading
Upload in progress
Success
Upload completed successfully
Failure
Unspecified upload failure
No Resource
Buffers not available
Transmit Failure
Unable to communicate with upload client
(transmission failure)
Receive Failure
Unable to communicate with upload client
Upload Total
current value
Total bytes to be uploaded to each client
Upload Size
current value
Total bytes that have been uploaded (divide by
upload total for completion percentage)
Upload Client Nodes
remote node number
Specifies the upload destination(s). If destination
is a Synchrony Network Management System, the
value is NMS.
Alarm Relay Status
Enabled
Node Status: Alarm Relay Status (dsp st sys)
Status of the major and minor alarm relays
Disabled
Alarm Relay Substatus
On On
Major and minor alarm relays on
(only applies when Alarm
On Off
Major alarm relay on and minor alarm relay off
Relay Status is Enabled)
Off On
Major alarm relay off and minor alarm relay on
Off Off
Major and minor alarm relays off
Shelf Status (dsp st shelf)
Address
n
Shelf number
Status
Initializing
Shelf initializing
Online
Shelf online
Condition
Failed
Shelf failure
Normal
Shelf is operating satisfactorily
Exception
At least one port inoperative
Number of Modules
1 to 17
Number of modules installed in shelf
Power Status
Good
Power supply status
Fail
STCPSUG
7/31/97
C-5
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Shelf Status (dsp st shelf) (Cont’d)
Fan Status
Good
Fan status
Fail
Temperature
Normal
Shelf temperature level
Excessive
Clock Reference 1
Clock Reference 2
Enable
Clock reference circuit 1 status. Circuit allows
Disable
clock source to propagate from another shelf
(e.g., for port receive clock).
Enable
Clock reference circuit 2 status
Disable
Bus Loopback Status
LXM Loopback
Bus loopback mode
RXM Loopback
None
Module Presence
current value
Listing of occupied slots by slot number
Active RXM Circuit
Circuit 1
Currently active RXM redundant circuit
Circuit 2
Active LXM Circuit
Circuit 1
Currently active LXM redundant circuit
Circuit 2
RXM Circuit 1 Status
NCP
Occupied by NCP (shelf 1)
Pass
RXM circuit 1 condition
Fail
RXM Circuit 2 Status
Pass
Fail
LXM Circuit 1 Status
Pass
Fail
LXM Circuit 2 Status
Pass
Fail
Module Status (dsp st module)
Address
n:s
Module address
Module Status
Active
Module active
Standby
Module in standby mode
Fail
Module failed
Removed
Module removed from service but still appears on
bus
Bus Disable
Module disabled for diagnostics and does not
appear on bus (as if physically removed)
Module Failure Type
C-6
Loading
Module loading software or data from NCP
Initializing
Module is initializing
Module
Module failure
Port
Port failure
No MIB
MIB not found failure
Error MIB
MIB error failure
No RTS
Run time software not found
Not Applicable
No module failure
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Module Status (dsp st module) (Cont’d)
Module Condition
Software Module Type
Normal
Module condition is satisfactory
Exception
At least one port inoperative
NCP
Network Control Processor
LXM
Left Expansion Module
RXM
Right Expansion Module
T1M
T1 Module
E1M
E1 Module
SGM
Subrate Groomer Module
LGM
LINK Gateway Module
ASM
Applications Server Module
FSM
Frame Server Module
SDM
SGM_AG
Subrate Groomer Module (AG Mode)
RTM
DSM
Software Module Subtype
1 to 255
Software module subtype
Module ID Format
ID
Module ID PROM format revision
Hardware Module Type
NCP
Network Control Processor
LXM
Left Expansion Module
RXM
Right Expansion Module
T1M
T1 Module
E1M
E1 Module
SGM
Subrate Groomer Module
LGM
LINK Gateway Module
ASM
Applications Server Module
FSM
Frame Server Module
SDM
RTM
DSM
Hardware Module Subtype
1 to 255
Hardware module subtype:
NCP
(1) NCP-1, (2) NCP-2, (3) NCP-3
SDM
(1) SDM-8/V.35, (2) SDM-8/V.11,
(3) SDM-8/V.24, (5) SDM-8E/V.35
(6) SDM-8E/V.11, (7) SDM-4R/V.35
(8) SDM-4R/V.11, (33) SDM-4R/E1 Bal
(34) SDM-4R/E1 Unbal, (40) SDM-4/Co
T1M
(1) T1M-4/DS1, (2) T1M-4/DSX1
E1M
(1) E1M-4/Unbal, (2) E1M-4/Bal
(3) E1M-2/Unbal, (4) E1M-2/Bal
ASM
(1) ASM-16, (2) ASM-16A, (3) ASM-16C
FSM
(1) FSM-16, (2) FSM-64
SGM
(1) SGM-56/64K, (4) SGM-19.2/64K
Module Assembly No
current value
Module assembly number
Module Revision
current value
Module revision number
STCPSUG
7/31/97
C-7
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Module Status (dsp st module) (Cont’d)
Module Serial No
current value
Module serial number
Module Date Made
current value
Date the module was made
Active Redundant
n:s
Slot address of redundant module
Module SW Revision
current value
Software revision number
Number Active Ports
current value
Number of ports on this module whose port status
is active
Number Normal Ports
current value
Number of ports on this module whose port
condition is normal
Module Start-Up Diagnostic
Test Results (NCP, FSM,
SDM, SGM)
current value
Refer to dsp diag module for definition of tests.
Module Background
Diagnostic Test Results
(NCP, FSM)
current value
Refer to dsp diag module for definition of tests.
Module Status: NCP Specific
Address
n:s
NCP address
Boot PROM Revision
current value
Boot PROM revision number
MAC Address
current value
MAC address of Ethernet port
Object Versions
current value
Listing of module run-time software stored in the
NCP flash PROM, including software type, CRC,
and version number
Address
n:s
FSM address
Bypass Bandwidth
current value
Maximum available bypass capability in packets
per second
Source Bandwidth
current value
Maximum available termination capability in
packets per second
Bandwidth Available
current value
Bandwidth available to serve new termination or
bypass channels in packets per second
Port Speed Available
current value
Available port speed capability in bps to serve new
I/O
DLCI Maximum
current value
Total number of DLCIs permitted on this FSM
DLCI Available
current value
Number of DLCIs that can still be connected on
this FSM
DLCI Configured
current value
Number of DLCIs configured on frame relay ports
allocated to this FSM
Bypass Channels Maximum
current value
Total number of bypass channels permitted on this
FSM
Bypass Channels Available
current value
Number of bypass channels that can still be
connected on this FSM
CIR Maximum
current value
Total CIR allowed on this FSM
CIR Available
current value
CIR that an still be allocated on this FSM
VCI Control Blocks
Maximum
current value
Total number of VCI control blocks allowed on this
FSM
VCI Control Blocks
Available
current value
Number of available VCI control blocks on this
FSM
Module Status: FSM Specific
C-8
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Module Status: FSM Specific (Cont’d)
Maximum Buffers
current value
Total number of channel buffers on this FSM
Available Buffers
current value
Number of available channel buffers on this FSM
Address
n:s
SGM slot address
Available AGM Ports
current value
Number of AGM ports available to provide access
grooming services
Maximum AGM Ports
current value
Total number of AGM ports on this SGM
Available SAF Ports
current value
Number of SAF ports available on this SGM
Maximum SAF Ports
current value
Total number of SAF ports on this SGM
Available SGM SCF Ports
current value
Number of SGM SCF ports available on this SGM
Maximum SGM SCF Ports
current value
Total number of SGM SCF ports on this SGM
Available AGM SCF Ports
current value
Number of AGM SCF ports available on this SGM
Maximum AGM SCF Ports
current value
Total number of AGM SCF ports on this SGM
Address
n:s
ASM slot address
Maximum CELP
0 to 16
Number of licensed CELP digital processing
engines (DPEs) on module
Available CELP
0 to 16
Number of licensed CELP DPEs on module that
are not in use
Maximum Engines
0 to 16
Total number of DPEs on module
Available Engines
0 to 16
Number of currently available (unused) DPEs on
module
Maximum SAF/SCF
current value
Total number of SAFs and SCFs that can be
allocated on this module
Available SAF/SCF
current value
Number of SAFs and SCFs that are currently
available on this module
Application Type
X50
CELP/ATC
ADPCM
Type of application
Application Max Ports
Allowed
0 to 32
Maximum number of ports which can be allocated
on module running specified application
Application Current Ports
Allowed
0 to 32
Current number of ports which can be allocated on
module running specified application
Application Current Ports
Allocated
0 to 32
Number of ports on module which are currently
running specified application
Application Engines Used
0 to 16
Total number of DPEs on module that are
currently allocated for specified application
Application Engines
Reserved
0 to 16
Total number of unallocated DPEs on module that
are reserved for specified application
Application Maximum
Licenses
0 to 16
Total number of licenses available on module for
specified application
Application Available
Licenses
0 to 16
Number of licenses available on module which are
not currently in use for specified application
Module Status: SGM Specific
Module Status: ASM Specific
STCPSUG
7/31/97
C-9
Table C-1. Status Parameter Descriptions (Cont’d
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
ASM Engine Status (dsp st asm engine)
Address
n:s
ASM slot address
Engine ID
1 to 16
ID number of digital processing engine (DPE)
Status
X50
Running X.50 application
CELP
Running CELP/ATC application
ADPCM
Running ADPCM application
Free
DPE is available for an application
Removed
DPE is logically removed
Normal
DPE is up and running
Failed
DPE has failed
Number of Ports
0 to 4
Number of application ports available on this ASM
Number of SAFs
0 to 4
Number of subrate aggregate formats on this DPE
Number of SCFs
0 to 80
Number of single channel formats being
processed on this DPE
Application
X50
Assigned to X.50 application
CELP/ATC
Assigned to CELP or ATC voice compression
ADPCM
Assigned to ADCPM voice compression
None
Not assigned an application
Module Status: DSM Specific
Address
n:s
DSM slot address
Communication Number
current value
Number of other DSMs that this DSM can
communicate with
Calls in Process
current value
Number of calls in process
Maximum Remote Routing
Table Entries
current value
Maximum number of entries allowed in remote
routing table
Remote Routing Table
Entries Available
current value
Number of entries available in remote routing table
Maximum Local Routing
Table Entries
current value
Maximum number of entries allowed in local
routing table
Local Routing Table Entries
Available
current value
Number of entries available in local routing table
Maximum Bypass
Bandwidth
current value
Maximum bypass bandwidth (PPS) allowed on this
DSM
Available Bypass Bandwidth
current value
Bypass bandwidth available (PPS) on this DSM
Maximum Bypass Channels
current value
Maximum number of bypass channels allowed on
this DSM
Available Bypass Channels
current value
Number of bypass channels that can still be
connected on this DSM
Maximum CIR
current value
Maximum committed information rate allowed on
this DSM
Available CIR
current value
Committed information rate still available on this
DSM
Maximum VCI Control
Blocks
current value
Maximum number of VCI control blocks allowed
on this DSM
Available VCI Control
Blocks
current value
Number of VCI control blocks still available on this
DSM
C-10
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Module Status: DSM Specific (Cont’d)
Maximum Buffers
current value
Maximum number of channel buffers allowed on
this DSM
Available Buffers
current value
Number of channel buffers available on this DSM
Maximum CDR Records
current value
Total number of call detail records allowed on this
DSM
Available CDR Records
current value
Number of call detail record log entries available
on this DSM
Maximum Calls per Second
current value
Total number of calls per second that can be
handled by this module
Available Calls per Second
current value
Number of calls per second that can be allocated
on this module
Calls per Second Factor
current value
Conversion factor between calls per second and
processing units
Bypass Factor
current value
Conversion factor between bypass bandwidth
(packets per second) and processing units
Maximum Processing Units
current value
Rating for combined processing units that
represents total number of calls per second and
bypass bandwidth allowed on this module
Available Processing Units
current value
Rating for combined processing units that
represents number of calls per second and bypass
bandwidth that can still be allocated on this
module
Module Status: LGM Specific
Maximum SAFs
current value
Maximum number of SAFs allowed on this LGM
Available SAFs
current value
Number of SAFs that can still be allocated on this
LGM
Maximum SCFs
current value
Maximum number of SCFs allowed on this LGM
Available SCFs
current value
Number of SCFs that can still be allocated on this
LGM
Module Status: RTM Specific
DS0s Used
current value
Current number of DS0 connections from AD3/AD-7 access devices to this RTM Module
DS0s Available
current value
Number of DS0 connections from AD-3/AD-7
access devices that can still be made to this RTM
Module
SAFs Used
current value
Current number of SAF connections from AD3/AD-7 access devices to this RTM Module
SAFs Available
current value
Number of SAF connections from AD-3/AD-7
access devices that can still be made to this RTM
Module
Address
n:s:p or t:g:p
Port address
Status
Active
Port active
Standby
Port in standby mode (redundant)
Port Status (dsp st port)
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Maintenance
Port under maintenance
Inactive
Port inactive
Failed
Port failure
C-11
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Port Status (dsp st port) (Cont’d)
Substatus
Condition
Subcondition
Enabled
For active or maintenance, port enabled
Disabled
For active or maintenance, port disabled
Removed
For inactive, port removed from service
Undefined
For failed, nonexistent MIB definition
Normal
Port operating satisfactorily
Exception
Port inoperative
Undefined
Nonexistent MIB definition
None
Red Alarm
For exception (T1/E1), red alarm condition
Yellow Alarm
For exception (T1/E1), yellow alarm condition
LMI Fail
For exception (FSM), local management interface
failure
Clock Fail
Type
BER Over Fail Threshold
For exception (T1/E1), bit error rate exceeded
user designated threshold
Message Timeout
For SGM port, timeout occurred in supervisory
communication between AD-10 and SGM port.
Configuration Mismatch
For SGM port, SGM detects TDM configuratio
mismatch between AD-10 and ST node.
Download Remote
Loading code to external device
ST Node to ST Node
For SGM port, SGM detects connection to another
SGM port instead of to AD-10.
Server Loopback
For SGM port, SGM detects an external loopback
(beyond SGM port).
Exceed Power Spec
For AD-7 port, more than two V.35 interfaces
installed
External Loop
Port associated with LGM is in external loopback
Remote End Reset
Port at remote end of connection was reset.
LOS
For ASM port, loss of synchronization
ROS
For ASM port, remote out of service
LOS and ROS
For ASM port, combined conditions
BER Over Maximum Fail
Failed because BER exceeded maximum
Layer 2 Timeout
No response from far side at protocol layer 2
Pending
For ASM port, allocated but not synchronized
OOS
For ASM port, local out of service
T1M
Port type
E1M
SGM
LGM
ASM
FSM
SDM
C-12
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Type (Cont’d)
SGM/AG
Port type
RTM
DSM
Loopback Duration
Loopback Status
Loopback Initiator
Error Indication
Severe Error Indication
1 to 65535
Loopback duration in minutes (permanent
loopback specified by 65535)
None
Port not in loopback
LIM
Local interface module loopback
(T1M/E1M/SDM/RTM)
LIM Disc
Local interface module with disconnection
(T1M/E1M)
RIM
Remote interface module loopback
(T1M/E1M/SDM/RTM)
Bidirectional
Bidirectional loopback (SDM/FSM/ASM/SGM)
Facility
Network initiated
Payload
Network initiated
Local
SDM local loopback
Remote
SDM remote loopback
External LIM
External local interface module loopback (RTM)
External RIM
External remote interface module loopback (RTM)
External Bidirectional
External bidirectional loopback (RTM)
External U LIM
External U interface loopback (RTM)
External IDL RIM
External integrated digital link interface loopback
(RTM)
Remote Bus
LGM port remote bus loopback. Loopback occurs
on LINK/2+ ILC Module.
Local
For remote interface loopbacks, initiated locally
Remote
For remote interface loopbacks, initiated remotely
Set
Error detected
Clear
No errors
Set
Severe error detected
Clear
No severe errors
Diagnostic Results
current value
Refer to dsp diag port for definition of tests
Number of Bundles
0 to 32
For T1/E1 port, the number of bundles
Phasor Status
current value
Port phasor status. Normal or one or more of the
following:
Tx Overflow
Port transmit timing slower than
node timing
Tx Underflow
Port transmit timing faster than
node timing
Tx Empty
Transmit phasor empty
Tx Full
Transmit phasor full
Tx FIFO Error
Hardware failure
Rx Overflow
Port receive timing faster than
node timing
STCPSUG
7/31/97
C-13
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Phasor Status (Cont’d)
Current Value
Port receive timing slower than
node timing
Rx Empty
Receive phasor empty
Rx Full
Receive phasor full
Rx FIFO Error
Hardware failure
KGROS Status ROS KG resync signal status
KGLOS Status LOS KG resync signal status
NOTE:The period of time to detect a phasor error
is dependent on the magnitude of the timing
mismatch and the number of bytes buffering. The
time it takes to detect an initial phasor error after
the port has come online may vary from the time it
takes to detect subsequent errors after resetting
the port.
Port Map
n:s:p
For server modules - maps physical port address
to virtual port address
Tone Bundle
0 to 31
For T1/E1 ports, active milliwatt tone generator
bundle assignment (bundle number). 0 indicates
no active tone.
Rx Underflow
Port Status: Synchronous Port Specific
SDM Functions
current value
State of port functions (On or Off) for the
following:
DTR RTS DSR DCD CTS
SDM Test Function
current value
State of port test functions (On or Off) for the
following:
Local loopback lead
Remote loopback lead
Test mode lead
OK
Status of signal (SDM-4R/E1)
SDM Signal Status
LOS
LOS Event
SDM Bipolar Violation
Indication
Event
Capabilities
Physical
Indicates if a bipolar violation has occurred
(SDM-4R/E1)
No Event
Displays capabilities provided by this SDM port
Electrical
Module
Port Speed
Port Status: Voice Port Specific (dsp st voice port)
Channel
n:s:p:b
Bundle address
Address
n:s:p
Physical ASM voice port address
Trunk Group
t:g:p
Trunk group address used by this ASM voice port
Engine
1 to 16
ASM digital processing engine allocated to this
ASM voice port
C-14
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Port Status: Voice Port Specific (dsp st voice port) (Cont’d)
Subrate Phasor
current value
Status of subrate phasor
Signal LOS
Insync
Signaling status is in-sync
LOS
Signaling status is out-of-sync
Frame LOS
Insync
Frame status is in-sync
LOS
Frame status is out-of-sync
Unknown
Channel is not connected or is not using CELP or
ATC voice compression
ST
Channel is connected to ST type CELP/ATC
equipment
LINK
Channel is connectd to LINK/+ type CELP/ATC
equipment
CELP Network Signal
Port Status: DSM Port Specific (dsp st dch port)
Address
t:g:p
D-channel virtual port address
Number of Calls in Process
current value
Current number of calls in process of being
completed via this D-channel
Number of Calls Connected
current value
Current number of calls connected via this
D-channel
Address
n:s:p:b
Bundle address
Status
Active
Bundle state (unknown=undefined)
Bundle Status (dsp st bdl)
Inactive
Unknown
BW Contention Status
Active
Bandwidth contention status
Inactive
Milliwatt Tone Status
Unknown
Not a bandwidth contention bundle
A0 B0 C0 D0
ABCD signaling state (1=on, 0=off) for
A0 B0 C0 D1
active tone generator on PCM bundles
A0 B0 C1 D0
A0 B0 C1 D1
A0 B1 C0 D0
A0 B1 C0 D1
A0 B1 C1 D0
A0 B1 C1 D1
A1 B0 C0 D0
A1 B0 C0 D1
A1 B0 C1 D0
A1 B0 C1 D1
A1 B1 C0 D0
A1 B1 C0 D1
A1 B1 C1 D0
A1 B1 C1 D1
Disabled
DS0 Map
STCPSUG
7/31/97
current value
Bundle time slot assignment
C-15
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Bundle Status (dsp st bdl) (Cont’d)
A Input
On
A-bit input signaling status
Off
Not Applicable
B Input
On
B-bit input signaling status
Off
Not Applicable
C Input
On
C-bit input signaling status
Off
Not Applicable
D Input
On
D-bit input signaling status
Off
Not Applicable
A Output
On
A-bit output signaling status (E1M Only)
Off
Not Applicable
B Output
On
B-bit output signaling status (E1M Only)
Off
Not Applicable
C Output
On
C-bit output signaling status (E1M Only)
Off
Not Applicable
D Output
On
D-bit output signaling status (E1M Only)
Off
Not Applicable
INL Status (dsp st inl)
Number
1 to 31
INL number assigned at local node
Address
n:s:p:b
INL local node port address
(bundle address for T1 INL or b=0 for SDM INL)
Status
Pending
Connection is pending
In Service
Connected to the remote INL
Out of Service
INL has been taken out of service
Maintenance
In loopback
Disable
For in-service, INL disabled (no new connections,
existing connections unaffected)
Enable
For in-service, INL enabled (fully functional)
Local BER Level
1 to 16
Local node bit error rate (BER) level. Value
indicates the negative exponent of BER from 10 -1
to 10-16.
Local BER Quality
Accepted
BER for previous second less than 4 x 10-4
Unaccepted
BER exceeds 4 x 10-4 (the out-of-service timer
started)
Substatus
Remote Node ID
Node Number
Remote node number
Remote Port Address
n:s:p:b
INL remote node port address
(bundle address for T1 INL or b=0 for SDM INL)
C-16
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
INL Status (dsp st inl) (Cont’d)
Remote INL ID
1 to 31
INL number assigned at remote node
Remote BER Level
1 to 16
Remote node bit error rate (BER) level . Value
indicates the negative exponent of BER from 10 -1
to 10-16.
Remote BER Quality
Accepted
BER within user specifications
Unaccepted
BER exceeds user specifications
Available TDM DS0
current value
Number of DS0s available to TDM traffic
Available Packet DS0
current value
Number of DS0s available to packet traffic
Loopback Duration
1 to 65535
For INL in loopback, loopback duration in minutes
(permanent loopback specified by 65535)
Loopback Status
None
INL not in loopback
Originator
INL is the origin of the loopback
Terminator
INL is at the point of the loopback
External
External network
CRC Errors
current value
Total number of CRC errors
BER Window Fill
current value
Internal use, e.g., 10/32, 5/32
Number of TDM Channels
current value
Number of TDM channels connected over INL
Number of Frame Relay
Channels
current value
Number of channels connected over INL packet
band
INL Speed
current value
Speed of INL (b = bps, kb = kbps)
Number of SAFs
current value
Number of subrate aggregate format channels
connected over INL
LOS Mode
LOS
Local end of INL is out-of-sync
LIS
Local end of INL is in-sync
Addback
Bus frame is in addback mode. No DS0s are
padded (Normal mode).
Fallback
Bus frame is in fallback mode. All but the first TX
DS0 is padded.
Bus Frame Mode
LGM Datalink Status (dsp st dl)
Address
t:g:p
LGM Module virtual port address
Local BER Quality
Not Available
Local bit error rate quality
Pending
Poor
Fair
Good
Very Good
BER Window Fill
current value
Internal use (e.g., 10/32, 5/32)
Remote Node
Node Number
Remote node number
Remote Port
Port or Bundle Address
Remote port or bundle address that terminates
ST-LINK/+ INL
STCPSUG
7/31/97
C-17
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
LGM Datalink Status (dsp st dl) (Cont’d)
Remote BER Quality
Not Available
Remote bit error rate quality
Pending
Poor
Fair
Good
Very Good
Remote Revision
current value
Revision level of remote node
Available Bandwidth
current value
Bandwidth available (bps) on this ST-LINK/+ INL
Used Bandwidth
current value
Bandwidth currently being used (bps) on this STLINK/+ INL
Number of Channels
current value
Number of channels on this ST-LINK/+ INL
LGM Port
n:s:p
Physical port address of associated LGM port
Link Speed
current value
Aggregate port speed (bps) of this ST-LINK/+ INL
Sync State
In Sync
Synchronization status of LGM virtual port
LOS
associated with LGM datalink
ROS
LOS and ROS
Channel Status (dsp st ch, dsp st rch)
Address
n:s:p:e or t:g:p:e
Channel address
Source Node ID
Node number
Node number at origin (connection initiator)
Source Address
n:s:p:e or t:g:p:e
Channel origin address
Dest Node ID
Node Number
Node number at destination
Dest Address
n:s:p:e or t:g:p:e
Channel destination address
Status
Connecting
For channel originating at local node, connection
pending
C-18
Connected
Connection established
Disconnecting
Awaiting RTS
Loopback
Channel in loopback
Retry No Server
Channel on retry queue, no server module
resource available
Retry No BW
Channel on retry queue, no bandwidth available
Retry Dest IO Unusable
Channel on retry queue, destination channel in
exception
Retry Dest IO In Use
Channel on retry queue, destination channel
occupied
Retry Auto
Channel on retry queue
Retry Exceed Share BW
For channels in a partitioned environment,
bandwidth assigned to partition exceeded
Pending
Waiting for end-to-end acknowledgment
Disconnected
Channel disconnected.
Use the dsp ch fr state or dsp ch tdm state
command to determine reason for disconnection.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Channel Status (dsp st ch, dsp st rch) (Cont’d)
Substatus
Wait For RTS Ack
Type
TDM
For status=connecting, indicates awaiting RTS
acknowledgment
None
Channel type
Packet
Subrate
Trunk Group
Bandwidth
current value
Bandwidth that channel occupies on INL or bus
Bypass Count
current value
Number of intermediate INLs traversed between
origin and destination
Path
current value
Channel path:
For TDM channels, sequence of
node number + INL number
For packet channels, sequence of
node number + FSM slot (n:s) + INL number
Route Quality
As Specified
Channel connection conforms to channel profile
restrictions
Overridden
Channel connection does not conform to channel
profile restrictions (connected in override mode)
Connect Time
current value
Date and time of channel connect
Retry Counter
current value
For channels on retry queue, the number of
connection attempts
Loopback Node
Node Number
For local channel in loopback, node at which the
loopback occurs
Nodal Subrate Path
Path
Subrate channel path from originating side to
terminating side of channel
Originator Node
Node Number
Node at which associated originating D-channel
port is located
Originator Address
Port Address
Port address of associated originating D-channel
Terminator Node
Node Number
Node at which associated terminating D-channel
port is located
Terminator Address
Port Address
Port address of associated terminating D-channel
Loop Module Address
Module Address
Address of module that implements channel
loopback
Channel Status: D-Channel Specific (dsp st dch cdr real)
Address
t:g:p
D-channel port address
Bundle
1 to 31
Bundle number
Content
current value
Contents of call detail record for real call in
progress
Channel Status: D-Channel Specific (dsp st dch cdr virt)
Address
t:g:p
D-channel port address
Index
1 to 480
CDR index entry
Content
current value
Contents of call detail record for virtual call in
progress
STCPSUG
7/31/97
C-19
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Subrate Aggregate Format Status (dsp st saf)
Address
n:s:p
SAF address
Status
Insync
Indicates if SAF is synchronized or not
Sub Status
Sync Error
Remote Node
Node Number
Outsync
If SAF is not synchronized, indicates if out-of-sync
condition is due to error
No Error
Node number at remote end of SAF connection
Remote Address
Port Address
Port address of remote end of SAF connection
Internodal Link
INL Number
INL number at remote end of SAF connection
Bandwidth Available
current value
Bandwidth available on this SAF
Number of Channels
current value
Number of subrate channels currently connected
on this SAF
Hardware Phasor
current value
Status of SAF hardware aggregate phasor
Software Phasor
current value
Status of SAF software aggregate phasor
Address
t:g:p
X.50 port address
Engine
1-16
ASM digital processing engine assignment
Receive Housekeeping Bits
current value
Division 2 receive housekeeping bit state (On or
Off) for the following:
HGFEDCB
Timeslot Map
current value
Listing of X.50 circuit entries showing
corresponding phase and timeslot assignments
Pending
Status of associated X.50 aggregate
ASM X.50 Port Status (dsp st x50 port)
Aggregate Status
Insync
LOS
ROS
LOS and ROS
OOS
Loopback
ASM X.50 Circuit Status (dsp st x50 ckt)
Address
t:g:p:e
X.50 circuit address
S-bit Status
One
S-bit (status bit) state
Zero
Phasor Status
C-20
current value
X.50 circuit phasor status. OK or one or more of
the following:
Rx Underflow
Rx Overflow
Rx Empty
Rx Full
Rx FIFO Error
Rx Not Applic
Tx Underflow
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
ASM X.50 Circuit Status (dsp st x50 ckt) (Cont’d)
Phasor Status (Cont’d)
current value
Address
t:g:p:e
Frame relay channel address
Hop Number
1 to 17
Hop number at which status of test packet is
displayed
Delay
current value
Round trip delay in 10-millisecond units between
this node and specified hop
Originator to Terminator
Congestion
Normal
Congestion mode of queue that forwards packet
toward terminator end of frame relay channel
Tx Overflow
Tx Empty
Tx Full
Tx FIFO Error
Tx Not Applic
PING Status (dsp st ping)
Yellow
Red
Critical
Terminator to Originator
Congestion
Normal
Congestion mode of queue that forwards packet
toward originator end of frame relay channel
Yellow
Red
Critical
Database Status (dsp st db)
Security MIB CRC
Success
Security MIB cyclic redundancy check verification
Fail
Security MIB Flush BRAM
Enable
Security MIB flush reset function
Disable
Resource MIB CRC
Success
Resource MIB cyclic redundancy check verification
Fail
Resource MIB Flush BRAM
Enable
Resource flush reset function
Disable
Alarm MIB CRC
Success
Alarm MIB cyclic redundancy check verification
Fail
Alarm MIB Flush BRAM
Enable
Alarm MIB flush reset function
Disable
PBX Networking: Call Detail Record Entry (dsp st dsm cdr)
Address
n:s:x:e
CDR index entry address
Log Number
1 to 32
CDR log number
Index
1 to 1000
CDR index entry
Content
current value
Contents of CDR
STCPSUG
7/31/97
C-21
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
PBX Networking: Exchange Code (dsp st dsm exch)
Address
n:s:length:number:partition
Exchange code address
Called Number Length
0 to 16
Number of digits in called number
Called Number
current value
Number called
Partition
1 to 1023
Partition number
current value
Exchange code
Code
PBX Networking: Call Detail Record Log (dsp st dsm log)
Address
n:s:x
CDR log address
Index
1 to 32
CDR log index number
Overflow
Overflow
Status of CDR overflow flag
No Overflow
Level 1 Entries
Level 2 Entries
current value
Number of level 1 entries in this CDR log
current value
Number of level 2 entries in this CDR log
PBX Networking: Routing Table Entries (dsp st dsm rte, dsp st dsm allrte)
n:s:code:length:partition:
node:slot:port
Address
Routing table entry
Exchange Code Length
1 to 16
Number of digits in exchange code
Exchange Code
current value
Exchange code
Partition
1 to 1023
Partition number
Remote Node
Node Number
Remote node containing destination DSM
Remote Slot
Slot Number
Slot location of destination DSM
Local Port
0 to 64
Physical D-channel port on DSM containing
routing table
PBX Networking: CDR Status for Real Call In Process (dsp st dch cdr real)
Real Address
t:g:p
Real Bundle
b
Bundle associated with D-channel port
Real CDR Contents
current value
Contents of CDR for a real call in progress
Real Layer 2 Status
Pending
Layer 2 status for a real call in progress
In Service
Layer 2 Timeout
Layer 2 Mismatch
Not Applicable
Real Layer 2 State
Returned for D-channel bundle (DPNSS) or for
bundles not used for the D-channel (QSIG)
Idle
Layer 2 protocol state for real call in progress
Ready
(DPNSS)
Waiting For Response
Waiting for Establishment
Out of Service
Assigned TEI
Assign Awaiting TEI
(QSIG)
Established Awaiting TEI
Awaiting Establishment
Awaiting Release
Multiple Frame Established
C-22
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
PBX Networking: CDR Status for Real Call In Process (dsp st dch cdr real) (Cont’d)
Real Layer 2 State (Cont’d)
Real Layer 3 State
Time Recovery
Not Applicable
Returned for D-channel bundle (DPNSS) or for
bundles not used for the D-channel (QSIG)
Inactive
Idle
(DPNSS)
Outgoing Service
Incoming Service
Await NAM Out
Await NAM In
Await CCM Out
Await CCM in
Setup Complete
Call Rejecting
Call Clearing
Call Barred
Pre Idle
Await Release
Null State
Call Initiated
(QSIG)
Overlap Sending
Outgoing Call Proceeding
Call Delivered
Call Present
Call Received
Connect Request
Incoming Call Proceeding
Call Active
Disconnect Request
Disconnect Indication
Suspend Request
Resume Request
Release Request
Overlap Received
Idle State
Establish Wait
Passive Awaiting
Conference
Call Passive
Register Request
Cancel Request
Asai Tristate
U10 Hold Request
U10 Transfer Request
STCPSUG
7/31/97
C-23
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
PBX Networking: CDR Status for Real Call In Process (dsp st dch cdr real) (Cont’d)
Real Layer 3 State (Cont’d)
U10 Conference Request
U10 Reconnect Request
U10 Awaiting Disconnect
U10 Call On Hold
Deactivated
Reactivate Requested
Deactivate Requested
Nil Hold Req U3
Nil Hold Req U4
Nil Hold Req U10
Nil Retrieve U3
Nil Retrieve U4
Nil Retrieve U10
Nil Hold Active U3
Nil Hold Active U4
Nil Hold Active U10
Broadcast State
Real Transit State
Not Applicable
Returned for D-channel bundle
Inactive
Transit call control state for a real call in progress
Idle
Await Digits
Await Additional Digits
Overlap
Transit Call Proceeding
Call Alerting
Active
Await Incoming Release
Await Outgoing Release
Await Two-way Release
Await Call Real Channel
Response
Await NCP Release
Response
Await NCP Release No
Response
Await NCP Release
Await NCP Disconnect
Await NCP
Not Applicable
C-24
Returned for D-channel bundle
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
PBX Networking: CDR Status for Virtual Call In Process (dsp st dch cdr virt)
Virtual Address
t:g:p
Virtual Bundle
b
Bundle associated with D-channel port
Virtual CDR Contents
current value
Contents of CDR for a virtual call in progress
Virtual Layer 2 Status
Pending
Layer 2 status for a virtual call in progress
In Service
Layer 2 Timeout
Layer 2 Mismatch
Not Applicable
Virtual Layer 2 State
Returned for D-channel bundle (DPNSS) or for all
virtual calls (QSIG)
Idle
Layer 2 protocol state of a virtual call from the
Ready
perspective of the DSM Module (DPNSS)
Waiting For Response
Waiting for Establishment
Out of Service
Unassigned TEI
Assign Awaiting TEI
perspective of the DSM Module (QSIG)
Established Awaiting TEI
Assigned TEI
Awaiting Establishment
Awaiting Release
Multiple Frame Established
Time Recovery
Not Applicable
Returned for D-channel bundle (DPNSS) or for all
virtual calls (QSIG)
Inactive
Idle
perspective of the DSM Module (DPNSS)
Outgoing Service
Incoming Service
Await NAM Out
Await NAM In
Await CCM Out
Await CCM in
Setup Complete
Call Rejecting
Call Clearing
Call Barred
Pre Idle
Await Release
Null State
Call Initiated
perspective of the DSM Module (QSIG)
Overlap Sending
Outgoing Call Proceeding
Call Delivered
STCPSUG
7/31/97
C-25
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
(Cont’d)
Call Present
Call Received
Connect Request
Call Active
Disconnect Request
Disconnect Indication
Suspend Request
Resume Request
Release Request
Overlap Received
Idle State
Establish Wait
Passive Awaiting
Conference
Call Passive
Register Request
Cancel Request
Asai Tristate
U10 Hold Request
U10 Transfer Request
U10 Conference Request
U10 Reconnect Request
U10 Awaiting Disconnect
U10 Call On Hold
Deactivated
Reactivate Requested
Deactivate Requested
Nil Hold Req U3
Nil Hold Req U4
Nil Hold Req U10
Nil Retrieve U3
Nil Retrieve U4
Nil Retrieve U10
Nil Hold Active U3
Nil Hold Active U4
Nil Hold Active U10
Broadcast State
Not Applicable
C-26
Returned for D-channel bundle if DPNSS is used.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Virtual Transit State
Inactive
Transit call control state of a virtual call from the
perspective of the DSM Module
Idle
Await Digits
Await Additional Digits
Overlap
Transit Call Proceeding
Call Alerting
Active
Await Incoming Release
Await Outgoing Release
Await Two-way Release
Await Call Virtual Channel
Response
Await NCP Release
Response
Await NCP Release No
Response
Await NCP Release
Await NCP Disconnect
Await NCP
Not Applicable
Returned for D-channel bundle if DPNSS is used
PBX Networking: Routing Table Entries (dsp st dsm rte)
Address
n:s:code:length:partition:
node:slot:port
Routing table entry
Exchange Code Length
1 to 16
Number of digits in exchange code
Exchange Code
current value
Exchange code
Partition
1 to 1023
Partition number
Remote Node
Node Number
Remote node containing destination DSM
Remote Slot
Slot Number
Slot location of destination DSM
Local Port
0 to 64
Physical D-channel port on DSM containing
routing table
STCPSUG
7/31/97
C-27
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
ASM/LGM Engine Status (dsp st engine)
Address
n:s
ASM slot address
Engine ID
1 to 16
ID number of digital processing engine (DPE)
Status
Removed
DPE is logically removed
Normal
DPE is up and running
Failed
DPE has failed
X50
Assigned to X.50 application
CELP/ATC
Assigned to CELP or ATC application
ADPCM
Assigned to ADPCM application
LINK
Assigned to LGM application
None
Not assigned to an application
Maximum Number of Ports
current value
Maximum number of application ports available on
this module
Number of Ports
current value
Number of application ports currently in use on
this module
Maximum Number of SAFs
current value
Maximum number of subrate aggregate formats
on this DPE
Number of SAFs
current value
Number of subrate aggregate formats currently in
use on this DPE
Maximum Number of SCFs
current value
Maximum number of single channel formats being
Number of SCFs
current value
Number of single channel formats currently being
Maximum Load
current value
Total load capacity of this DPE
Current Load
current value
Percentage of total load capacity currently in use
on this DPE
Application
Upload Status (dsp st upload)
Upload Status
Idle
Current status of software upload
Uploading
Success
Failure
No Resource
Transmit Failure
Receive Failure
current value
Total number of bytes to be uploaded
Upload Size
current value
Number of bytes already uploaded
Client Nodes
Up to 8 Node Numbers
Node numbers of clients being served by this
upload
Upload Total
C-28
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
NCP Flash Memory Status (dsp st flash)
Address
n:s
NCP Module slot location
Index
x
Flash index number, where:
1 =MAP object file (active memory)
2 = MIB schema (active memory)
3 = NCP operational software (active memory)
4 = T1M operational software (active memory)
5 = E1M operational software (active memory)
6 = SGM operational software (active memory)
7 = LGM operational software (active memory)
8 = ASM operational software (active memory)
9 = FSM operational software (active memory)
10 = SDM operational software (active memory)
11 = RTM operational software (active memory)
12 = DSM operational software (active memory)
13 = Not currently supported
14 = MAP object file (recovery memory)
15 = MIB schema (recovery memory)
16 = NCP operational software (recovery memory)
17 = T1M operational software (recovery memory)
18 = E1M operational software (recovery memory)
19 = SDM operational software (recovery memory)
Module Type
NCP
Software type
T1M
E1M
SGM
LGM
ASM
FSM
SDM
RTM
DSM
MIB
MAP
Recovery Indication
Compression Indication
Normal
Software is stored in normal (active) memory.
Recovery
Software is stored in recovey memory.
Compress
Software file is compressed.
Uncompress
Software file is uncompressed.
File Version
current value
Software revision number
File Size
current value
Software file size in bytes
File Stored CRC
current value
Stored CRC of software file
File CRC Check
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Pass
Passed CRC
Fail
Failed CRC and is corrupted
C-29
Appendix
D
Scheduling Network Operations Using a
CPS-Based Facility
The Craft Person Station (CPS) facility described in this appendix can be used to schedule events in a Synchrony
Network without network operator intervention. The operations are invoked using CPS commands. Typical
applications include:
• Time-of-day channel switching
• Channel grooming
• Periodic statistics gathering
The CPS-based facility consists of three components:
• A Scheduler which invokes the batch file to be executed at the time specified by the user.
• DOS Batch Files which are invoked by the scheduler to execute at the time specified by the
user.
• CPS Script Files which are at the heart of the facility. A CPS script file specifies the
operations to be applied to the network.
Scheduler
Any DOS, MS Windows, or Windows 95 based scheduler can be employed to schedule the time to run the batch
files. The Norton Scheduler, a windows application included as part of the Norton AntiVirus package, is used as an
example. The scheduler allows you to perform the following actions:
• Add a new event - define an event
• Delete an event - cancel an event
• Edit an event - change the scheduled time and/or execution frequency of an event
• Enable an event - resume a previously suspended event
• Disable an event - suspend an event
STCPSUG
7/31/97
D-1
• Schedule an event - define the frequency to be a single occurrence, hourly, daily, weekly or
monthly at a specified time-of-day
The occurrence of a defined event causes the specified DOS batch file to be executed at the scheduled time. The
scheduler operates based on the time-of-day clock of the PC running the CPS application software. The scheduler
will run the batch file at the scheduled time without user intervention.
DOS Batch File
The DOS batch file causes the CPS to run the specified script file and track the execution results. The batch file
performs the following tasks:
1.
Prepares the CPS execution environment by:
A.
Changing the working directory to the directory containing the script file
B.
Making the script file the CPS default script file by copying the script file to a file named
cps.cfg
2.
Invokes the CPS application.The CPS will then execute the commands in the cps.cfg script file. At
completion, an execution log file cps.log is created.
3.
Appends the execution log file cps.log to a history log file history.log.
4.
Post-processes the execution log. The required post processing will be application-specific. For
example, it can search the execution log for keywords that indicate a command execution failure,
such as “<<command failed>>“ or “status=disconnected”. If found, it may be programmed to
invoke an error recovery script file, another DOS execution file, or it may present a menu allowing
the user to select the action required for error recovery. Also, C-based programs may be developed to
post-process the execution log based on the application needs.
See Example 1 at the end of this appendix for a batch file example. The example shows a simple post-processing
task that invokes a text viewer “list” to display the execution log.
CPS Script File
The scheduler and DOS batch file, together, provide a support environment to run the CPS script file that, in turn,
specifies the operations to be applied to the network. The script file contains both generic and application-specific
components. The generic component serves as both the prolog and epilog of the script file. The prolog opens an
execution log, connects the CPS to the network, and time-stamps the CPS station and affected node(s). The
application-specific component performs the desired network operations after the execution of the prolog. The
epilog will time-stamp the CPS station and affected nodes, close the execution log, and terminate the CPS
execution. A CPS Release1.2.5 or higher version is required to terminate CPS execution from a script file.
The following paragraphs describe how to design scripts for time-of-day channel switching and channel grooming
applications.
Time-of-Day Channel Switching
A typical time-of-day channel switching application would be to disconnect from node 3 a range of channels that
originate at node 1, and then reconnect these same channels to node 2 at a different time of day. The CPS script
file that implements this application will be required to disconnect the existing channels, change the destination of
the channels to the new node, reconnect the channels to to the new node, and then retrieve the channel status
D-2
STCPSUG
7/31/97
information so the user can verify the connections. The time-of-day triggering of the script file execution is
provided by the scheduler.
The script file tod_sw.cps, shown in Example 2, disconnects the channels originally connected from node 1 to node
3 and then reconnects these channels between nodes 1 and 2. The script file performs the following tasks:
1.
Prolog:
• Opens the log file cps.log.
• Connects to the Synchrony Network.
• Time-stamps the CPS station and Node 2.
2.
Disconnects the specified channels at node 3.
3.
Changes the destination node numbers of the specified channels between node 1 and node 2.
4.
Connects the specified channels between node 1 and node 2.
5.
Retrieves channel status information so that the connection status and endpoint s can be verified.
6.
Epilog:
• Time-stamps the CPS station and Node 2.
• Disconnects from the Synchrony Network.
• Terminates the CPS execution.
After execution of the script file, a log file cps.log, as shown in Example 3, is created to track the execution results.
The cps.log will be overwritten by the execution of the next script file.
Channel Grooming
The Synchrony ST-1000/ST-20 uses a source routing algorithm that selects the optimal route for a channel based
on the network topology information at the time the channel connection request is made. When the network
topology changes because of adding new INLs, the existing route for some channels may no longer be optimal.
Also, if an existing INL goes down due to a network facility problem, the channels using that INL may be rerouted
through less than optimal routes. Once the INL recovers, the Synchrony software does not groom the channels back
to the INL that provides a better route.
STCPSUG
7/31/97
D-3
The purpose of channel grooming, then, is to reroute the channels through less-cost routes. The CPS-based facility
can be employed to perform the network grooming at a time defined by the user that has minimum impact on
network traffic.
This approach requires the user to identify the channels to be groomed and then to create a CPS script file to
groom these channels. The CPS script file will include the dsc ch and con ch commands to disconnect and then
reconnect the channels.
For example, when an INL is established (new or recovering INL) between node 1 and node 2, the following
method can be employed to groom the channels over the INL:
1.
Use the dsp con inl * command to enumerate all the channels traversing through node 1 and node 2.
2.
Use the dsp st ch command to find the path (route) of each channel. If both node 1 and node 2
appears on the path, the channel is a possible candidate for grooming. If the INL recovers from a
failure, the channels that traversed the INL before the failure can also be selected as candidate
channels. These channels can be identified from the SNMS alarm log that records the channel
disconnection due to an INL failure.
3.
Sort the candidate channels based on their priority.
4.
Create a CPS script file to disconnect all candidate channels, and then reconnect the channels based
on their priority. Depending on the number of channels involved, some delay may be required
between channel connections to allow the network topology to be updated to reflect the real-time
network status.
5.
Schedule the event to run the CPS script file at a time that will have minimum impact on network
traffic.
This approach controls the grooming from a single point (CPS) and has a high probability of improving the
channel routes identified in Step 2. See Example 4, tod_grooming.cps, for a sample CPS script file.
NOTE:
For channels that traverse either Node 1, Node 2, or neither, it will
be difficult to pick a good candidate channel to groom based on the
network information that can be collected using CPS.
Sample Files
The following files provide examples of how to perform scheduled network operations from a CPS-based facility.
Example 1. example.bat File
rem set working directory
cd c:\cps
rem make the script file fr1t2.cps to be the default CPS script file
copy fr1t2.cps cps.cfg
rem invoke a version of CPS
cps0210.exe
rem invoke a batch file to append CPS.LOG to the history log HISTORY.LOG
call history
rem post-processing the execution log CPS.LOG
rem invoke the text viewer “list” to display CPS.LOG
list cps.log
D-4
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Example 2. tod_sw.cps File
//echo off
/*
PROLOG
/*
Logging the session activity
//open cps.log
//note
//note
Ascom Timeplex Synchrony Craft Person Station Log
//note
//note
//note ** Start Connection Session between node 1 and node 2.
//note
//note
/* Configure PC com port
// com 1
// baud 9600
// online
//note ** Connect to Synchrony Network on CPS Station time
//timestamp
//note
//note
//note ** Node 2 time is
node 2 dsp sys node date time
/*
START OF APPLICATION-SPECIFIC SCRIPT
//note ** Disconnect channels between node 3 and other nodes.
node 3 dsc ch 129.1.1.2-3
//note
//note ** Change channel destination of node 1 and node 2.
//note
node 1 set ch tdm 129.1.1.2-3 dst_node=2
//note
node 2 set ch tdm 129.1.1.2-3 dst_node=1
//note
//note ** Connect channels between node 1 and node 2.
node 2 con ch tdm 129.1.1.2-3
/* Delay 2 seconds before checking connection status
/* The purpose of the delay is to wait for the connections to complete
/* before displaying the channel status.
//delay 2
//note
//note ** Retrieve Channel Connection Status.
//note
node 2 dsp st ch 129.1.1.2-3 status src_node src_addr dst_node dst_addr
connect_time
/*
END OF APPLICATION-SPECIFIC SCRIPT
/*
EPILOG
//note
//note
//note ** Compelete Switching Session from Node 1 to Node 2.
//note ** Disconnect from Synchrony Network on CPS Station time
//timestamp
//note
// note ** Node 2 time is
STCPSUG
7/31/97
D-5
//note
//note ************************************************************
//close
//end
Example 3. cps.log File
** Start Connection Session between node 1 and node 2.
** Connect to Synchrony Network on CPS Station time
Wednesday, October 30, 1996
12:53:02 PM
Node 2 time is
NODE 2 DSP SYS NODE DATE TIME
NODE=2
DATE=10/30/1996
TIME=12:35:56
** Disconnect channels between node 3 and other nodes.
NODE 3 DSC CH 129.1.1.2-3
<<< Success >>>
*** 129.1.1.3 ***
<<< Success >>>
** Change channel destination of node 1 and node 2.
NODE 1 SET CH TDM 129.1.1.2 DST_NODE 2
<<< Success >>>
<<< Success >>>
<<< Success >>>
<<< Success >>>
** Connect channels between node 2 and node 3.
NODE 2 CON CH 129.1.1.2
<<< Success >>>
NODE 2 CON CH 129.1.1.3
<<< Success >>>
** Retrieve Channel Connection Status.
NODE 2 DSP ST CH 129.1.1.2 STATUS SRC_NODE SRC_ADDR DST_NODE DST_ADDR
CONNECT_TIME
STATUS=CONNECTED
SRC_NODE=2
SRC_ADDR=129.1.1.2
DST_NODE=1
DST_ADDR=129.1.1.2
CONNECT_TIME=Wed Oct 30 12:35:59 1996
D-6
STCPSUG
7/31/97
NODE 2 DSP ST CH 129.1.1.3 STATUS SRC_NODE SRC_ADDR DST_NODE DST_ADDR
CONNECT_TIME
STATUS=CONNECTED
SRC_NODE=2
SRC_ADDR=129.1.1.3
DST_NODE=1
DST_ADDR=129.1.1.3
CONNECT_TIME=Wed Oct 30 12:35:59 1996
** Compelete Switching Session from Node 2 to Node 3.
** Disconnect from Synchrony Network on CPS Station time
Wednesday, October 30, 1996
12:53:58 PM
** Node 2 time is
NODE 2 DSP SYS NODE DATE TIME
NODE=2
DATE=10/30/1996
TIME=12:36:53
*******************************************************************
Examle 4. tod_grm.cps File
//echo off
/*
PROLOG
/*
Logging the session activity
//open cps.log
//note
//note
//note
//note
//note ** Start Channel Grooming Process
//note
//note
/* Configure PC com port
// com 1
// baud 9600
// online
//note ** Connect to Synchrony Network on CPS Station time
//timestamp
//note
//note
//note ** Node 2 time is
/*
START OF APPLICATION-SPECIFIC SCRIPT
//note ** Disconnect channels to be groomed
node 3 dsc ch 129.1.1.2-8
node 4 dsc ch 1.8.1-2
//note ** Connect channels according to priority
node 4 con ch 1.8.1-2
node 3 con ch 129.1.1.2-8
/* Delay 2 seconds before checking connection status
/* The purpose of the delay is to wait for the connections to complete
STCPSUG
7/31/97
D-7
/* before displaying the channel status.
//delay 2
//note
//note ** Retrieve Channel Connection Status.
//note
node 4 dsp st ch 1.8.1-2 status src_node src_addr dst_node dst_addr
connect_time
node 3 dsp st ch 129.1.1.2-8 status src_node src_addr dst_node dst_addr
connect_time
/*
END OF APPLICATION-SPECIFIC SCRIPT
/*
EPILOG
//note
//note
//note ** Compelete Channel Grooming Process.
//note ** Disconnect from Synchrony Network on CPS Station time
//timestamp
//note
// note ** Node 2 time is
//note
//note ***********************************************************
//close
//end
D-8
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Index
A
Access Device Parameters
configuring, 4-86
Access Parameters
configuring, 4-6
Add Command Description, 3-6
Adding a Bundle, 4-26
configuring, 4-26
Addressing Conventions
device, 3-8
Alarm and Trap Parameters
configuring, 4-10
Alarm Log Parameters
configuring, 4-10
Alarm Messages, B-1
Alarm Summary, B-1
Applications Server Module. See ASM, 1-1
Arrow Keys, 3-1
ASM Voice Channels
configuring trunk group parameters , 4-44
B
Backup
database, 2-9
Bundle Parameters
configuring, 4-25
C
Cable Requirements
CPS Craft port, 2-1
CPS Modem port, 2-1
Channel Grooming
scheduling network operations, D-3
Channel Profile Parameters
configuring, 4-13
Clear Command Description, 3-6
Clear Screen (//cls), 3-2
Clocking Parameters
configuring, 4-12
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Command Descriptions
Local, 3-2
nodal, 3-6
Command Example
display command, 3-9
set command, 3-9
Command Format
CPS nodal commands, 3-7
Command Object
using ranges, 3-10
using wild cards, 3-10
Command/Configuration Parameter
Cross-Reference, A-3
Commands
LINK/2+ Key, 3-20
LINK/2+ SP, 3-17
local, 3-2
nodal, 3-5, 3-6
recalling, 3-2
Compatibility
user interface, 3-21
Configuration Command Reference, A-3
Configuring Access Device Parameters
AD-10 applications, 4-86
AD-3/AD-7 applications, 4-120
Configuring AD-10 Access Device Parameters
connections between AD-10 and ST node, 4-87
connections between AD-10 TDM mode data
ports and other devices, 4-102
connections between AD-10 TDM packet mode
ports, 4-107
connections between AD-10 TDM packet mode
ports and other devices, 4-112
connections between AD-10 voice or TDM mode
ports, 4-95
Configuring AD-3/AD-7 Access Device Parameters
connections between AD-3/AD-7 access devices
at different nodes, 4-146
connections between AD-3/AD-7 and AD-10
access devices at the same node (local drop,
4-128
connections between AD-3/AD-7 and frame relay
or HDLC at the same node (local drop), 4-139
connections between AD-3/AD-7 and X.50
network at the same node, 4-133
connections between AD-3/AD-7s and other CPE
at the same node (local drop), 4-124
connections between AD-3/AD-7s connected to
same RTM Module, 4-120
IN-1
Configuring Alarm Log Parameters , 4-10
Configuring an LGM Datalink , 4-152
Configuring Bundle Parameters, 4-25
Configuring Channel Profile Parameters , 4-13
Configuring Clocking Parameters, 4-12
Configuring CPI Communications Parameters , 4-11
Configuring CPI Port Access Parameters, 4-6
Configuring E1 Port Parameters , 4-24
Configuring Frame Relay Parameters
point-to-point frame relay and HDLC, 4-30
SDM connections, 4-36
SDM encapsulation of HDLC/SDLC, 4-40
T1M or E1M NxDS0 connections, 4-32
Configuring Internodal Link Parameters , 4-27
Configuring IP Access Parameters, 4-7
Configuring LINK Gateway Parameters, 4-151
analog voice connections, 4-169
configuring and LGM datalink , 4-152
PBX voice connections, 4-175
synchronous data connections to AD-10 ports,
4-160
synchronous data connections to SDM ports,
4-157
synchronous/asynchronous data connections to
AD-3/AD-7 ports, 4-165
Configuring Modem Communications Parameters,
4-11
Configuring Modem Port Access Parameters, 4-7
Configuring Module Parameters, 4-14
Configuring Node Access Parameters, 4-9
Configuring Node Management Parameters , 4-4
Configuring PBX Networking Parameters
central DSM Module, 4-180
local DSM Modules, 4-187
remote/local DSM Modules, 4-193
Configuring Root Access Parameters, 4-8
Configuring Softload Parameters, 4-5
Configuring Synchronous Port Parameters
SDM port to SDM port, 4-16
SDM port to T1M or E1M port, 4-19
Configuring System Profile Parameters, 4-4
Configuring T1 Port Parameters , 4-23
Configuring TDM Channel Parameters , 4-28
Configuring Trap Access Parameters, 4-10
Configuring Trunk Group Parameters
AD-10 to AD-10 at different nodes, 4-53
AD-10 to AD-10 at same nodes, 4-63
PBX to AD-10 at different nodes, 4-47
PBX to AD-10 at same nodes, 4-57
PBX to PBX at different nodes, 4-44
Configuring Voice Profile Parameters, 4-14
Configuring X.50 Parameters
connections between X.50 networks, 4-67
IN-2
connections between X.50 networks and subrate
I/O devices, 4-73
connections between X.50 networks and subrate
I/O devices remote to ASM, 4-79
Connect Command Description, 3-6
Controlling Output Devices, 3-5
Conventions
device addressing, 3-8
CPI and Modem Parameters
configuring, 4-11
CPI Communications Parameters
configuring, 4-11
CPI Port Parameters
configuring, 4-6
CPS
command/configuration parameter
cross-reference, A-3
communicating with local or remote LINK/2+
node
via LINK/2+ supervisory port, 3-19
communicating with remote LINK/2+ node
via ST Craft port or Modem port, 3-18
communicating with remote ST node
via LINK/2+ supervisory port, 3-16
configuration command reference, A-3
customizing environment, 2-9
display screen, 2-8
entering commands, 3-1
entering local commands, 3-2
features, 1-1
installing software using DOS, 2-5
installing software using Windows 3.1, 2-5
installing software using Windows 95, 2-6
nodal command format, 3-7
nodal commands, 3-5, 3-6
prompt, 2-8
software installation, 2-5
system connections, 2-1
system requirements, 1-2
using local commands, 3-5
CPS Application
starting using DOS, 2-7
starting using Windows 3.1, 2-7
starting using Windows 95, 2-8
start-up, 2-7
CPS Cable Requirements
Craft port, 2-1
Modem port, 2-1
CPS Commands
entering, 3-1
CPS Help System, 3-12
CPS Nodal Commands
format, 3-7
remote commands, 3-10
STCPSUG
7/31/97
CPS Operation
additional modes, 3-14
CPS Prompt Format, 2-8
CPS Requirements
cables, 2-1
CPS Script File
CPS-Based Facility
Craft Person Station. See CPS, 1-1
Craft Port
specifications, 2-1
Cursor Control Keys, 3-1
Customizing CPS Environment , 2-9
D
Database
backup and restore, 2-9
Database Backup and Restore, 2-9
D-Channel Server Module. See DSM, 1-1
Delete Command Description, 3-6
Descriptions
nodal commands, 3-6
Device Addressing Conventions, 3-8
Disable Command Description, 3-6
Disconnect Command Description, 3-6
Display Command
example, 3-9
Display Command Description, 3-6
Display Statistics Command Description, 3-6
Display Status Command Description, 3-6
DOS Batch File
Download Start Command Description, 3-6
E
E1 Module. See E1M, 1-1
E1 Port Parameters
configuring, 4-24
Echo Output (//echo), 3-3
Enable Command Description, 3-6
Entering CPS Commands , 3-1
Entering Local CPS Commands, 3-2
Error Messages, B-13
Example
display command, 3-9
set command, 3-9
F
Features
craft person station, 1-1
Flush Command Description, 3-6
Frame Relay Parameters
configuring, 4-29
Frame Server Module. See FSM, 1-1
G
Getting Started, 2-1
H
Help, 3-3
CPS, 3-12
Hybrid Networks
Using CPS, 3-16
I
Insert Command Description, 3 -6
Installation
CPS software, 2-5
Installing CPS Software
STCPSUG
7/31/97
IN-3
using DOS, 2-5
using Windows 3.1, 2-5
using Windows 95, 2-6
Internodal Link Parameters
configuring, 4-27
Intrusive Pamameter Changes, 3-11
IP Access Parameters
configuring, 4-7
K
Key Commands
LINK/2+, 3-20
Keys
CPS cursor control, 3-1
Keywords, 3-5, 3-9
L
LINK Gateway Module. See LGM, 1-1
LINK Gateway Parameters
configuring, 4-151
LINK/2+ Key Commands, 3-20
LINK/2+ SP Commands
from CPS in SP mode, 3-17
LINK/2+ Supervisory Port
CPS communicating with local or remote
LINK/2+ node, 3-19
CPS communicating with remote ST node, 3-16
Local Commands
//ackalm, 3-2
//alm, 3-2
//alm_nodelist, 3-2
//append, 3-2
//baud, 3-2
//close, 3-2
//cls, 3-2
//com, 3-2
//cpi_mode, 3-2
//cps_ip, 3-3
//databits, 3-3
//date, 3-3
//delay, 3-3
//disable, 3-3
//do, 3-3
//echo, 3-3
//edit, 3-3
//editor, 3-3
//enable, 3-3
//end, 3-3
//exit, 3-3
//fc, 3-3
IN-4
//fifo, 3-3
//getalm, 3-3
//help, 3-3
//home, 3-3
//host_ip, 3-3
//login, 3-3
//logout, 3-3
//loop, 3-3
//more, 3-4
//node, 3-4
//note, 3-4
//offline, 3-4
//online, 3-4
//open, 3-4
//parity, 3-4
//ping, 3-4
//printer lpt , 3-4
//shell, 3-4
//showalm, 3-4
//status, 3-4
//stopbits, 3-4
//terminal, 3-4
//time, 3-4
//timeout, 3-4
//timestamp, 3-4
//transparent , 3-4
//version, 3-4
Local CPS Commands
entering, 3-2
using, 3-5
Log Files, 3-5
//append, 3-2
//close, 3-2
//open, 3-4
Loopback Command Description, 3-6
M
Modem Communications Parameters
configuring, 4-11
Modem Port
specifications, 2-2
Modem Port Access Parameters
configuring, 4-7
Modes of Operation
offline, 1-2
online, 1-2, 3-4
terminal mode, 3-14
transparent mode, 3-14
Module Parameters
configuring, 4-14
STCPSUG
7/31/97
N
Network Element, 3-8
Network Operations
scheduling, D-1
Nodal Commands
descriptions, 3-6
node prefix, 3-10
remote, 3-10
using, 3-9
Nodal Control Processor. See NCP, 1-1
Node
default local (//node), 3-4
Node Access Parameters
configuring, 4-9
Node Configuration
steps in configuring, A-1
Node Configuration Steps, A-1
Node Management Parameters
configuring, 4-4, 4-5
Node Parameters
configuring, 4-4
Node Prefix, 3-10
Nonintrusive Parameter Changes , 3-11
O
Offline Mode, 3-4
Online Mode, 3-4
Output Devices
controlling, 3-5
P
Parameter Changes
intrusive, 3-11
nonintrusive, 3-11
PBX Networking Parameters
configuring, 4-180
Q
Quitting
CPS, 3-3
scripts, 3-3
R
Recalling Commands, 3-2
Remote CPS Nodal Commands, 3-10
Remote Termination Module. See RTM, 1-1
Remove Command Description, 3-6
Reset Command Description, 3-6
Restart Command Description, 3-6
Restore
database, 2-9
Root Access Parameters
configuring, 4-8
S
Sample Files
Scheduler
Scheduling
network operations, D-1
Scheduling Network Operations
channel grooming, D-3
CPS script file, D-2
CPS-based facility, D-1
DOS batch file, D-2
sample files, D-4
scheduler, D-1
time-of-day channel switching, D-3
Scripts, 1-1, 2-9, 3-2, 3-3
exit, 3-3
Set Command
example, 3-9
STCPSUG
7/31/97
IN-5
Set Command Description, 3-6
Softload Start Command Description, 3-6
Software Installation
CPS, 2-5
SP Port
Specifications
Craft port, 2-1
Modem port, 2-2
ST Craft Port or Modem Port
CPS communicating with remote LINK/2+ node,
3-18
ST Node
system configuration, 2-9
Starting CPS Software Application
using DOS, 2-7
using Windows 3.1, 2-7
using Windows 95, 2-8
Start-Up
CPS application, 2-7
ST-LINK/+ Hybrid Networks
using CPS in, 3-16
Subrate Configuration, 4-16
Subrate Groomer Module. See SGM, 1-1
Synchronous Data Module. See SDM, 1-1
Synchronous Port Parameters
configuring, 4-16
Synchrony NMS
IP access, 4-7
Syntax
address, 3-9
display commands, 3-9
local commands, 3-2
node prefix, 3-10
set commands, 3-10
System Configuration
ST node, 2-9
System Connections
CPS, 2-1
Craft port, 2-2
Modem port, 2-3
SP port, 2-4
System Profile Parameters
configuring, 4-4
System Requirements
CPS, 1-2
T
T1 Module. See T1M, 1-1
T1 Port Parameters
configuring, 4-23
TDM Channel Parameters
configuring, 4-28
Terminal Mode, 3-4, 3-14
Time-of-Day Channel Switching
Toggle Command Description, 3-6
Trace Channel Command Description, 3 -6
Transparent Mode, 3-15
Trap Access Parameters
configuring, 4-10
Trunk Group Parameters
configuring, 4-43
Typical Configuration Activities
adding a bundle to a T1 or E1 port , 4-26
configuring access device parameters, 4-86
configuring access parameters, 4-6
configuring alarm and trap parameters , 4-10
configuring bundle parameters, 4-25
configuring channel profile parameters , 4-13
configuring clocking parameters, 4-12
configuring CPI and modem parameters , 4-11
configuring E1 port parameters , 4-24
configuring frame relay parameters, 4-29
configuring internodal link parameters , 4-27
configuring LINK gateway parameters, 4-151
configuring module parameters, 4-14
configuring node parameters, 4-4
configuring PBX networking parameters, 4-180
configuring synchronous port parameters, 4-16
configuring T1 port parameters , 4-23
configuring TDM channel parameters , 4-28
configuring trunk group parameters , 4-43
configuring voice profile parameters, 4-13
configuring X.50 parameters, 4-67
U
Update Command Description, 3-6
User Interface
compatibility, 3-21
Using
nodal commands, 3-9
Using CPS
ST-LINK/+ hybrid networks, 3-16
IN-6
STCPSUG
7/31/97
Using Local CPS Commands, 3-5
Using Nodal Commands, 3-9
Using the WITH keyword, 3-11
V
W
Wild Cards, using, 3-10
WITH Keyword
using, 3-11
Voice Profile Parameters
configuring, 4-13
X
X.50 Parameters
configuring, 4-67
STCPSUG
7/31/97
IN-7